CMA3000_User_Guide_09108217e

CMA 3000 User Guide Anritsu A/S Kirkebjerg Allé 90 DK-2605 Brøndby, Denmark Phone.: +45 72 11 22 00 Fax: +45 72 11 22 10 E-mail: [email protected] www.anritsu.com

Headquarters: Japan +81-46-223-1111 Sales Offices: Hong Kong +852-2301-4980 UK +44 (0) 1582-433 200 USA +1-972-644-1777 USA toll free +1-800-ANRITSU (267-4878)

09108208

09912044, Cover for User Guide (# 09108208)

Technical Documentation, Anritsu A/S, Denmark

User Guide CMA 3000

CE

The CMA 3000 is CE-marked and complies with: • EN 61326-1 : 2006 • EN300386 V1.3.3 (2005) • EN61010-1

Reference

Please read section 1.3, Warnings and take the recommendations there into consideration before using the instrument.

Software version

This user guide covers SW version 4.3x.

Disclaimer

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent any commitment on the part of Anritsu.

Copyright © 2004 - 2011 by Anritsu A/S. All rights reserved.

CMA 3000 A

Editorial Information Title

User Guide

Author

Technical Documentation, Anritsu A/S, Denmark

Subject

CMA 3000 SW version 4.3x

Order No.

09108217

Released

Nov, 2011

CMA 3000 B

Table of contents 1

Introduction

1.1

Basic Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2

1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5

Symbols and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3

1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4 General Service or Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4 Information for Anritsu Authorized Personnel Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4 Mains Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5 Optical Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5 Personal Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6

1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 Radio Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Optical Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9

2

Configuration

2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2

Delivered Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

2.2 2.2.1

Mains Power Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 Connecting Mains Power Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3

2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4

Rechargeable Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Installing or Replacing Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Charging Battery in Fast Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Charging Battery in Normal Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Battery Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7

2.4 2.4.1

Measurement Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8 Connecting Measurement Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8

CMA 3000 I

2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2

Support Stand and Carrying Strap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10 Support Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10 Carrying Strap (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 10

3

Man-Machine-Interface

3.1

Touch Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9

Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Power ON/OFF Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 SHIFT Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 LED TRAP Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Start/Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Error Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4 Volume Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4 Navigation Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4 Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 ESC Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5

3.3

LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6

3.4

Telephone Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8

3.5

Earphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9

3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5

Back Panel Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10 Basic Instrument (2 Mbps). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10 Fully Equipped Instrument (Internally Mounted Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12 High Speed Single Port Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13 High Speed Dual Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14

3.7

Left Panel Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15

3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5

FrontSim Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16 Installation of FrontSim Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16 Connection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16 Launching FrontSim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16 Assigning Instruments to the List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18 Selecting and Connecting Instruments From the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18

3.9

Command Based Remote Control Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19

3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.10.3 3.10.4

External GPS Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20 Activating the GPS sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21 Using the GPS service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21 GPS status bar icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22 Setting the instrument time from the GPS sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24

CMA 3000 II

4

Graphical User Interface

4.1

General Handling of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2

4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Loading, Renaming or Deleting a Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Saving a Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 Load and Save Settings List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 Importing and Exporting Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5

4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2

Interface > 2 Mbps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6 Transmitter A and Transmitter B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6 Receiver A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13

4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2

Interface > SDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17 Transmitter A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17 Receiver A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19

4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2

Interface > E3/DS3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20 Transmitter A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20 Receiver A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22

4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2

Interface > E4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23 Receiver A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24

4.7 4.7.1

Interface > V-Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26 Codirectional Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28

4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 4.8.9 4.8.10

Interface > Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31 Port Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31 Port A/B setup > Traffic Sub-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43 Port A/B setup > WAN Frame Sub-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 46 Port A/B Setup > Frame Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 49 Port A/B Setup > Settings Sub-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 59 Port A/B setup > Filter Sub-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 61 Port A/B setup > Thresholds Sub-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63 Port A/B setup > SyncE Sub-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63 Port A/S setup > IEEE 1588v2 sub-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 65 Timing Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 69

4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2

Interface> T1 Unframed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 71 Transmitter A and Transmitter B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 71 Receiver A and Receiver B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 73

4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4

Application > Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 75 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 75 Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 78 Filters (Log Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 79 Filters (Statistics Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 81

4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.11.4

Application > Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 82 Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 82 Frame Relay BERT Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 85 DLCI Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 87 CIR Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 88

CMA 3000 III

4.11.5 4.11.6 4.11.7 4.11.8 4.11.9

CIR Test Setup Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 88 CIR Test Result Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 89 Ping Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 90 Ping Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 90 Ping Test Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 91

4.12

Application > Auto Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 93

4.13 Application > Stimuli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 95 4.13.1 2 Mbps TxA and 2 Mbps TxB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 96 4.13.2 Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 97 4.13.3 Codirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 98 4.13.4 ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 99 4.13.5 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 100 4.13.6 E3/DS3 TxA (TxB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 101 4.13.7 SDH Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 102 4.13.8 SDH Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 103 4.13.9 AU4 Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 104 4.13.10 TU3 and TU12 Pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 105 4.13.11 V-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 106 4.13.12 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 107 4.13.13 Ethernet WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 108 4.13.14 Ethernet Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 109 4.13.15 Using Stimuli for Basic Transmission Line Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 109 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.14.3 4.14.4

Application > ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 111 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 111 Receiver A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 113 VP/VC Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 114 Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 115

4.15

Application > APS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 116

4.16

Application > Pointer Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 118

4.17

Application > Tributary Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 122

4.18 Application > Ethernet RFC2544 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 124 4.18.1 Test setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 124 4.18.2 Port A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 128 4.18.3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 129 4.18.4 Test Configuration > Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 131 4.18.5 Test Configuration > Frame Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 133 4.18.6 Test Configuration > Throughput and Frame loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 133 4.18.7 Test Configuration > Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 135 4.18.8 Test Configuration > Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 136 4.18.9 General Comments to Sub-tabs under Results Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 137 4.18.10 General Comments About the RFC2544 Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 138 4.18.11 Results > Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 139 4.18.12 RFC2544 Results > Frame Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 140 4.18.13 RFC2544 results > Throughput and Frame Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 141 4.18.14 RFC2544 Results > Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 142 4.18.15 RFC2544 Results > Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 143 4.19 Application > Ethernet Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 144 4.19.1 Ping Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 144

CMA 3000 IV

4.19.2 4.19.3 4.19.4 4.19.5

Port A/B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 144 Frame Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 145 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 146 Graphical Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 147

4.20 4.20.1 4.20.2 4.20.3

Application > BERT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 148 BERT Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 148 Traffic Port A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 150 Frame Content Port A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 151

4.21 Application > Channel Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 152 4.21.1 Port A/B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 152 4.22 4.22.1 4.22.2 4.22.3

Application > Ethernet Traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 155 Traceroute Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 155 Port A/B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 156 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 156

4.23 4.23.1 4.23.2 4.23.3 4.23.4

Application > Cable Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 157 Time Domain Reflectometry Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 157 Wiring of Ethernet Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 157 Ethernet Cable Test Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 158 10/100 Switch/Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 159

4.24 4.24.1 4.24.2 4.24.3 4.24.4

Application > VoIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 160 Port A/B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 160 Emulator Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 166 Emulator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 169 Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 179

4.25

Application > WAN Pointer Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 181

4.26 4.26.1 4.26.2 4.26.3

Application > ISDN Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 183 Emulator Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 183 Emulator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 186 ISDN Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 190

4.27 4.27.1 4.27.2 4.27.3 4.27.4 4.27.5

Application > Service Activation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 192 Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 192 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 195 Services > Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 197 Services > Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 200 Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 201

4.28

Result > Measurement Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 204

4.29 4.29.1 4.29.2 4.29.3 4.29.4 4.29.5 4.29.6

Result > Result List (2 Mbps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 205 Result List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 205 Display Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 209 Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 210 2 Mbps G.821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 211 2 Mbps Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 212 2 Mbps BERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 212

4.30 Result > Result List (SDH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 213 4.30.1 SDH Alarms and Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 214

CMA 3000 V

4.30.2 SDH Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 214 4.30.3 SDH G.828. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 215 4.30.4 SDH M.2100.1 (M.2100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 216 4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 218 4.31.1 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 219 4.31.2 Frame Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 220 4.31.3 Burst Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 221 4.31.4 Size Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 222 4.31.5 Transmit Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 223 4.31.6 Multistream Transmit Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 224 4.31.7 Multistream Throughput Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 225 4.31.8 Multistream Frame Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 226 4.31.9 Multistream Latency/Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 227 4.31.10 BERT – Alarms & Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 228 4.31.11 WAN – Alarms & Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 229 4.31.12 WAN – Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 230 4.31.13 WAN – Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 231 4.31.14 SyncE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 232 4.31.15 IEEE 1588v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 233 4.32 4.32.1 4.32.2 4.32.3 4.32.4

Result > Result List (ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 235 ATM Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 235 ATM Cell Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 237 ATM VPI/VCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 238 ATM QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 239

4.33 4.33.1 4.33.2 4.33.3 4.33.4 4.33.5 4.33.6 4.33.7

Result > Results VoIP Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 241 Total Call Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 241 Total Call Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 241 Total Voice Quality (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 243 Call Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 245 Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 246 Call Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 247 Voice Quality (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 248

4.34

Result > Result List (T1 Unframed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 249

4.35

Result > IEEE 1588v2 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 250

4.36 4.36.1 4.36.2 4.36.3 4.36.4

Status > Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 251 2 Mbps Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 251 E3/DS3 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 252 STM-1/4/16/64 Optical/Electrical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 252 ATM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 253

CMA 3000 VI

4.37

Status > Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 254

4.38

Status > ATM Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 255

4.39

Status > ATM IMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 256

4.40

Status > SDH Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 257

4.41

Status > Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 259

4.42

Status > CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 260

4.43

Status > Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 262

4.44

Status > Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 265

4.45

Status > Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 266

4.46

Status > V-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 267

4.47 4.47.1 4.47.2 4.47.3 4.47.4 4.47.5 4.47.6 4.47.7 4.47.8

Status > Ethernet Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 268 Ethernet Interface > Interface Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 268 Ethernet Interface > Optical Status SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 269 Ethernet Interface > Optical Status XFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 270 Ethernet Interface > WAN - Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 271 Ethernet Interface > WAN - Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 272 Ethernet Interface > Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 274 Ethernet Interface > SyncE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 275 Ethernet Interface IEEE 1588v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 276

4.48 Status > T1 Unframed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 279 4.48.1 Status -> Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 279 4.49

Misc. > Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 282

4.50

Misc. > Stored Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 283

4.51 4.51.1 4.51.2 4.51.3 4.51.4 4.51.5

Misc. > Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 285 2Mbps Print Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 285 PDF Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 286 Activating Print Setup Directly From a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 287 Printing Directly to a USB Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 292 Loading a File From the USB Memory Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 293

4.52

Misc. >Touch Screen Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 294

4.53 4.53.1 4.53.2 4.53.3 4.53.4 4.53.5 4.53.6

Misc. > System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 295 Instrument Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 295 Service Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 296 Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 300 Global Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 301 Local Access Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 304 Remote Access Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 305

CMA 3000 VII

4.54

Misc. > Front Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 307

5

Specifications

5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7

Specifications, Basic Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 2 Mbps interface, Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 2 Mbps interface, Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 Memory Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 Service Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 Other Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6

5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2

Specifications, SDH Test Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12

5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2

Specifications, E3 Test Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2

Specifications, E4 Test Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17

5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4

Specifications, V-Series Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 Data Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20

5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.6.11 5.6.12

Specifications, Ethernet Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 Ethernet Test Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 Reflector Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 Ethernet Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 Ethernet Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25 Ethernet Multistream Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27 IP Channel Statistics Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27 VoIP Call Emulation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29 MPLS Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31 Stacked VLAN Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31 10 GigE WAN Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 31 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32 Synchronous Ethernet Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33

5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3

Specifications, ATM Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36 Traffic Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36 ATM Layer Traffic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37

5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4

Specifications, ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39 Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 Options Related to the ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42

CMA 3000 VIII

5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3

Specifications, Unframed T1 option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43 Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43 Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45

6

Support

6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2

Maintenance and Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3

Support and Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 Before you obtain assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 Obtaining Support or Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3

6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2

Packing and Shipping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6

6.4

Anritsu Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7

6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2

Special Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10 Licensing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10 Availability of Source Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10

6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2

Declarations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19 Disposal According to WEEE Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19 Information for the Chinese Market Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20

Index

CMA 3000 IX

CMA 3000 X

Fig. 2.1 Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Fig. 2.5 Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7 Fig. 2.8 Fig. 2.9 Fig. 2.10 Fig. 2.11 Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.3 Fig. 3.4 Fig. 3.5 Fig. 3.6 Fig. 3.7 Fig. 3.8 Fig. 3.9 Fig. 3.10 Fig. 3.11 Fig. 3.12 Fig. 3.13 Fig. 3.14 Fig. 3.15 Fig. 3.16 Fig. 3.17 Fig. 3.18 Fig. 3.19 Fig. 3.20 Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2 Fig. 4.3 Fig. 4.4 Fig. 4.5 Fig. 4.6 Fig. 4.7 Fig. 4.8 Fig. 4.9 Fig. 4.10 Fig. 4.11 Fig. 4.12 Fig. 4.13 Fig. 4.14 Fig. 4.15 Fig. 4.16 Fig. 4.17 Fig. 4.18 Fig. 4.19 Fig. 4.20 Fig. 4.21 Fig. 4.22 Fig. 4.23 Fig. 4.24 Fig. 4.25

The 18 V DC power connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 CMA 3000 battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Battery compartment lock screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Press the notch to release battery door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 The battery status information screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rear panel connectors for measurement cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Optional Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface Module mounted.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Optional High Speed Single Port Interface and Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface Module mounted.9 Optional High Speed Dual Port Interface and Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface Module mounted.. 9 The support stand extracted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Releasing the spring lock before installing the hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Operating the touch screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Illustration of the 3 screen sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Examples of the LED overlay explanation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Setting up the normal/slim LED indicator layout.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Connector for optional telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Headphones/earphones is connected to this socket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Back panel on basic instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Back panel connectors presented. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The externally mounted Ethernet 10/100/1000 Module.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 The externally mounted High Speed Single Port Interface Module.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 The externally mounted High Speed Dual Port Interface Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Left panel connectors presented. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 The FrontSim intro screen launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connection management screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 FrontSim remote control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 External GPS Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 External GPS sensor connected to CMA 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 GPS icon on status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 GPS information pop-up box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Adjust date and time pop-up box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Press OK or Cancel to accept or reject, respectively. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Quick start screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Choosing a setup file from the list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The save setup menu.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 On-screen keyboard launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Export menu launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Setup parameters for 2 Mbps transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 The Sa-bits setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Pattern Time Slots menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Different types of User Pattern setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Channel Time Slot screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Subchannel Number screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The receiver A screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Receiver Pattern Time Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Channel Time Slot screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Subchannel Number screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Audio Time Slot screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Audio Subchannel screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 The SDH transmitter setup screen launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Example shows the SOH editor screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 The SDH receiver setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setup parameters for E3 transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Setup parameters for E3 receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Setup parameters for E4 transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Setup parameters for E4 receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CMA 3000 1

Fig. 4.26 Fig. 4.27 Fig. 4.28 Fig. 4.29 Fig. 4.30 Fig. 4.31 Fig. 4.32 Fig. 4.33 Fig. 4.34 Fig. 4.35 Fig. 4.36 Fig. 4.37 Fig. 4.38 Fig. 4.39 Fig. 4.40 Fig. 4.41 Fig. 4.42 Fig. 4.43 Fig. 4.44 Fig. 4.45 Fig. 4.46 Fig. 4.47 Fig. 4.48 Fig. 4.49 Fig. 4.50 Fig. 4.51 Fig. 4.52 Fig. 4.53 Fig. 4.54 Fig. 4.55 Fig. 4.56 Fig. 4.57 Fig. 4.58 Fig. 4.59 Fig. 4.60 Fig. 4.61 Fig. 4.62 Fig. 4.63 Fig. 4.64 Fig. 4.65 Fig. 4.66 Fig. 4.67 Fig. 4.68 Fig. 4.69 Fig. 4.70 Fig. 4.71 Fig. 4.72 Fig. 4.73 Fig. 4.74 Fig. 4.75 Fig. 4.76 Fig. 4.77 Fig. 4.78 Fig. 4.79 Fig. 4.80 Fig. 4.81

V-Series setup screen launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Codirectional interface screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Port Control tab launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Monitor/Generate selected in Port Control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Port Control screen with multistream shown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Pass through selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Port control pass through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Reflector mode selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Selecting either quick or advanced setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Quick setup menu launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 The two Advanced Setup menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 The ‘Forced’ setup launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 The ‘Auto Detect’ running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Optical Setup launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Optical Setup menu.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Traffic screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Ramp setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Ramp modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Traffic screen appearing with Multistream option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 WAN setup screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 SOH Editor popup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 POH Editor popup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Frame Content screen found in Port A/B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 The Ethernet field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 The [ ! ] softkey appears when pressing the [ARP] softkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 The MPLS field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 The EoMPLS field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 The VLAN field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 The stacked VLAN field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 The stacked VLAN field when the level count is 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 The IPv4 field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 DHCP setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 The IPv6 field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 The UDP field.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 The TCP field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Settings screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Filter screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Setup of the ‘Filter and mask’ field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Encapsulation types selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Thresholds screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Port Setup SyncE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 IEEE 1588v2 setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 IEEE 1588v2 - Transport Protocol setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Timing setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 T1 Unframed Transmitter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 T1 Unframed Receiver Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 The General screen of the Application folder.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Delayed start setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Duration setup menu.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Evaluation Item menu.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Part of the Signaling screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Log Filter screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 The Statistics Filters setup screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Example of a ‘Counts’ drop-down menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Frame Relay screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Timeslot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

CMA 3000 2

Fig. 4.82 Fig. 4.83 Fig. 4.84 Fig. 4.85 Fig. 4.86 Fig. 4.87 Fig. 4.88 Fig. 4.89 Fig. 4.90 Fig. 4.91 Fig. 4.92 Fig. 4.93 Fig. 4.94 Fig. 4.95 Fig. 4.96 Fig. 4.97 Fig. 4.98 Fig. 4.99 Fig. 4.100 Fig. 4.101 Fig. 4.102 Fig. 4.103 Fig. 4.104 Fig. 4.105 Fig. 4.106 Fig. 4.107 Fig. 4.108 Fig. 4.109 Fig. 4.110 Fig. 4.111 Fig. 4.112 Fig. 4.113 Fig. 4.114 Fig. 4.115 Fig. 4.116 Fig. 4.117 Fig. 4.118 Fig. 4.119 Fig. 4.120 Fig. 4.121 Fig. 4.122 Fig. 4.123 Fig. 4.124 Fig. 4.125 Fig. 4.126 Fig. 4.127 Fig. 4.128 Fig. 4.129 Fig. 4.130 Fig. 4.131 Fig. 4.132 Fig. 4.133 Fig. 4.134 Fig. 4.135 Fig. 4.136 Fig. 4.137

Frame relay BERT load screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 DLCI statistics setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 CIR Test screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 The Ping Test setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Auto configuration screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Example showing collapsed interface-structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 The ‘please wait’ screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Stimuli setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 2 Mbps TxA or TxB stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Frame Relay stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Codirectional stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ATM stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Frequency stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 E3/DS3 TxA (TxB) stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 SDH Alarm stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 SDH Error stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 AU4 Pointer stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 TU3 (TU12) stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 V-Series Interface stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Ethernet stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 WAN stimuli setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Ethernet Timing stimuli setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Monitoring received frequency vs. transmitted frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 The ATM Transmitter screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Examples of traffic profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 The ATM Receiver setup screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 O.191 setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 The VP/VC Filter setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 The Scan screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 The APS test setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Pointer movements screen launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Using a finger or stylus pen to select zoom area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Selected area expanded.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Using view all function to zoom out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Whole plot area displayed (custom y-scaling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Tributary Scan screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Tributary details presented for VC12#2 in this example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 RFC2544 Test Setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Quick Setup launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 RFC2544 config Port setup tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 General setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Average throughput. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Throughput setup screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Latency setup screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Burst setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Results presentation in graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 RFC2544 results throughput screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 RFC2544 results frame loss screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 RFC2544 results throughput and frame loss screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 RFC2544 results latency screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 RFC2544 results burst screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Ping control screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Frame config screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Results screen of ping test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Graphical presentation of the ping test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 BERT control setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

CMA 3000 3

Fig. 4.138 Fig. 4.139 Fig. 4.140 Fig. 4.141 Fig. 4.142 Fig. 4.143 Fig. 4.144 Fig. 4.145 Fig. 4.146 Fig. 4.147 Fig. 4.148 Fig. 4.149 Fig. 4.150 Fig. 4.151 Fig. 4.152 Fig. 4.153 Fig. 4.154 Fig. 4.155 Fig. 4.156 Fig. 4.157 Fig. 4.158 Fig. 4.159 Fig. 4.160 Fig. 4.161 Fig. 4.162 Fig. 4.163 Fig. 4.164 Fig. 4.165 Fig. 4.166 Fig. 4.167 Fig. 4.168 Fig. 4.169 Fig. 4.170 Fig. 4.171 Fig. 4.172 Fig. 4.173 Fig. 4.174 Fig. 4.175 Fig. 4.176 Fig. 4.177 Fig. 4.178 Fig. 4.179 Fig. 4.180 Fig. 4.181 Fig. 4.182 Fig. 4.183 Fig. 4.184 Fig. 4.185 Fig. 4.186 Fig. 4.187 Fig. 4.188 Fig. 4.189 Fig. 4.190 Fig. 4.191 Fig. 4.192 Fig. 4.193

(BERT) Traffic Port setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 (BERT) Frame Content Port setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Port A/B Channel Statistics screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Channel Statistics Port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Traceroute Setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Traceroute results screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 The Ethernet Cable Test screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Test of a 10/100 Mbps switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 The Port B setup screen launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 The Ethernet field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 The [ ! ] softkey appears when pressing the [ARP] softkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 The MPLS field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 The EoMPLS field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 The VLAN field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 The stacked VLAN field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 The IPv4 field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 DHCP setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 The UDP field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 The Emulator Setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 White List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 The Emulator Control screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Info tab launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Log tab launched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Quality tab launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Voice tab launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Thresholds tab launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Emulator tab shown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Generator tab shown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 The Address Book screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 WAN Pointer Movement Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ISDN Emulator Setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ISDN Emulator Control - Emulator section launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ISDN Tests - Bear. Cap. Test launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Service Activation Test Control screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 The Service Activation Test Services screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 The Service Activation Test Attributes screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 The Service Activation Test Frame Size popup in constant mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 The Service Activation Test Frame Size popup in EMIX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 The Service Activation Test Steps screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 The Service Activation Test Result screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 The measurement information screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Example showing Log - Result list.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Part of result list showing specific contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Example showing Signaling - Result list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Part of result list showing specific contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Message presented as Hex code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Message shown as detailed information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Examples on different message types.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Display filter screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Graphics screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Example showing G.821 result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Example showing Alarms & Errors result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Example showing BERT result.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Example showing Alarms and errors result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Example showing SDH quality.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Example showing SDH G.828 screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

CMA 3000 4

Fig. 4.194 Fig. 4.195 Fig. 4.196 Fig. 4.197 Fig. 4.198 Fig. 4.199 Fig. 4.200 Fig. 4.201 Fig. 4.202 Fig. 4.203 Fig. 4.204 Fig. 4.205 Fig. 4.206 Fig. 4.207 Fig. 4.208 Fig. 4.209 Fig. 4.210 Fig. 4.211 Fig. 4.212 Fig. 4.213 Fig. 4.214 Fig. 4.215 Fig. 4.216 Fig. 4.217 Fig. 4.218 Fig. 4.219 Fig. 4.220 Fig. 4.221 Fig. 4.222 Fig. 4.223 Fig. 4.224 Fig. 4.225 Fig. 4.226 Fig. 4.227 Fig. 4.228 Fig. 4.229 Fig. 4.230 Fig. 4.231 Fig. 4.232 Fig. 4.233 Fig. 4.234 Fig. 4.235 Fig. 4.236 Fig. 4.237 Fig. 4.238 Fig. 4.239 Fig. 4.240 Fig. 4.241 Fig. 4.242 Fig. 4.243 Fig. 4.244 Fig. 4.245 Fig. 4.246 Fig. 4.247 Fig. 4.248 Fig. 4.249

Example showing SDH M.2101 screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Graphical presentation of Ethernet Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Frame Stat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Graphical presentation of Ethernet Frame Stat.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Burst Stat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Graphical presentation of Ethernet Burst Stat results.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Size Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Graphical presentation of Size Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Tabular presentation of the Ethernet Transmit Stat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Tabular presentation of the Multistream Transmit Stat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Tabular presentation of the Multistream Throughput Stat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Graphical presentation of the Multistream Frame Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Tabular presentation of the Multistream Latency/Jitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 BERT – Ethernet Alarms & Errors screen - Scroll top.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 BERT – Ethernet Alarms & Errors screen - Scroll down.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 WAN – Alarms & Errors screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 WAN – Performance screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 WAN – Test screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 SyncE result screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 IEEE 1588v2 result screen. Port A is Master and port B is slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Result screen showing ATM alarms and errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Result screen showing ATM cell statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Result screen showing ATM VPI/VCI channel results.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Result screen showing ATM VPI/VCI parameter results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 ATM QoS results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 The Total Call Info result tab displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 The Total Call Quality result tab displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 The Total Voice Quality result tab displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 The Call Info result tab displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 The Call Log result tab displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 The Call Quality result tab displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 The Voice Quality result tab displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 T1 Unframed result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 IEEE 1588v2 Log screen. Port B has Ext. log enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Example shows 2 Mbps Alarms and Errors screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ATM Alarms and Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Example showing SDH capture results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Detailed frame information launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Alignment example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 The CAS screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Red pattern setup menu launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Traffic screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Traffic screen displaying ‘TS Content’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Audio Channel screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Frame relay status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 The V-Series status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Ethernet Interface Status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Ethernet Optical Status SFP screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Ethernet Optical Status XFP screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Example shows WAN Alarms and Errors screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Example showing WAN Capture screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Detailed frame information launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Ethernet Timing status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Ethernet SyncE status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Ethernet IEEE 1588v2 status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

CMA 3000 5

Fig. 4.250 Fig. 4.251 Fig. 4.252 Fig. 4.253 Fig. 4.254 Fig. 4.255 Fig. 4.256 Fig. 4.257 Fig. 4.258 Fig. 4.259 Fig. 4.260 Fig. 4.261 Fig. 4.262 Fig. 4.263 Fig. 4.264 Fig. 4.265 Fig. 4.266 Fig. 4.267 Fig. 4.268 Fig. 4.269 Fig. 4.270 Fig. 4.271 Fig. 4.272 Fig. 4.273 Fig. 4.274 Fig. 5.1

T1 Unframed Status Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 T1 Unframed Status Alarms & Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Stored measurement information screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 The Print setup screen.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 SDH Alarms and Errors screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Printout menu for Log measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Animated icon during pending state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Name field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Please wait pop-up launched during printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 The animated printer icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Stop printer process menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Printer status/cancel pop-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Printout example.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Touch Screen Calibration screen launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Instrument Information screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Service Interfaces screen launched.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 IP Address numeric key pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Example on mounted USB storage device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 The Display Setup screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 The Global Configuration screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Set measurement name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Optional fields on the Global Configuration screen. You may need to use the scrollbar to view these.303 The Local Access Configuration screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 The Remote Access Configuration screen launched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 The soft version of the front panel keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Throughtput calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

CMA 3000 6

1

Introduction The introduction chapter contains brief description of how this guide is structured and explains the symbols and conventions used.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-1

1.1

Basic Instrument

1.1

Basic Instrument The CMA 3000 is a battery-powered multipurpose telecommunications test instrument for field use. The CMA 3000 is a tool for a wide range of applications from fast first aid troubleshooting to comprehensive, indepth analysis of transmission problems. With the optional modules installed the CMA 3000 will turn from a full-featured transmission line quality tester into an advanced signaling analyzer. The basic CMA 3000, with its two 2 Mbps receivers and transmitters, supports framed and unframed testing and monitoring of 2 Mbps systems. The instrument is thus ideal for both in-service and out-of-service transmission-quality measurement. For fast troubleshooting, the CMA 3000 displays alarms and transmission link status on LED indicators. The instrument's two inputs permit immediate monitoring of the two sides of a line and allow comparison of simultaneously recorded results. With options added the CMA 3000 tests a large variety of interfaces and systems, like SDH interfaces, frame relay lines and the A-bis interface of GSM/GPRS networks. Yet other options turn the CMA 3000 into a very powerful signaling analyzer for GSM/GPRS/EDGE, SS7 and ISDN protocols. Results are easily read from the large color LCD display, where the colors and graphical symbols facilitate interpretation. Together with the touch screen operation, this makes the CMA 3000 very user-friendly in operation. The CMA 3000 can automatically configure to the received signal, eliminating time-consuming instrument set-up. Set-ups supporting particular applications may be stored in the instrument. The instrument has the following interface for data transfer and external communication: LAN interface and two USB ports. Fault location is greatly facilitated by the high degree of portability of the robust CMA 3000, allowing measurements to be taken at any suitable measuring point. The instrument is powered by rechargeable and replaceable intelligent high-capacity LiIon batteries. The CMA 3000 can also be powered via an external mains adapter for long-term measurements.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-2

1.2

1.2

Symbols and Conventions

Symbols and Conventions A number of typographical conventions are used for easy spotting of information. Examples below are shown in grey boxes in this section only to indicate that they are ‘examples’.

1.2.1

Warnings

! 1.2.2

Warnings indicate that a specific procedure needs to be followed correctly to avoid personal injury or damage to the instrument.

Precautions Precautions indicate that a specific procedure needs to be followed correctly to avoid damage to or malfunction of the instrument. When the symbol used in this example is found either in this manual or on any item, special attention should be paid concerning Electrostatic sensitive devices.

1.2.3

Notes The Note symbol indicates information, procedures or recommendations that need to be followed to make correct measurements etc. Note text is written in italic to separate the information from the other text elements on a page.

1.2.4

Hints The Hint symbol indicates information that should be treated as hints, suggestions, recommendations etc. Hint text is written in italic to separate the information from the other text elements on a page.

1.2.5

Option The Option symbol indicates that the information described covers an option (hardware and software) and that this option must be installed before use. Text is written in italic to separate the information from the other text elements on a page.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-3

1.3

Warnings

1.3

Warnings This section contains warnings which should be followed to avoid personal injury, product damage, as well as damage to the environment.

1.3.1

General Service or Repair To avoid personal injury/damage to the equipment or environment, always leave any service or repair to authorized Anritsu personnel.

!

Service or repair of the CMA 3000 should be performed by Anritsu authorized personnel only.

FOR CALIFORNIA USA ONLY This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

1.3.2

Information for Anritsu Authorized Personnel Only This CMA 3000 contains a lithium battery. Always pay special attention when handling this battery.

!

Replace battery with specified type only, and install with correct polarity. If wrong battery type is used or if installed incorrect there is risk of explosion.

!

Always dispose used batteries in accordance to the instructions from the battery manufacturer and the local law.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-4

1.3 Warnings

1.3.3

Mains Power To maintain the protection provided by the equipment always:

! ! ! 1.3.4

Use original power cable delivered by Anritsu only.

Use AC mains adapter delivered by Anritsu only. Anritsu Part No. 01582600.

The user must be aware that the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired, if the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer.

Optical Laser If the instrument is installed with optical interfaces, it contains Class 1 laser transmitters transmitting at wavelengths of 850 nm, 1310 nm or 1550 nm, which is invisible to the human eye. Output power is typically more than -10 dBm giving an IEC 60825-1:2007 classification as a class 1 laser product. CMA 3000 equipped with SDH, Ethernet 10/100/1000 modules and/or High Speed Interface modules contain optical interfaces that use:

!

CAUTION - LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

!

Invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct eye exposure.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-5

1.3

Warnings

! 1.3.5

To ensure proper function of the instrument - use only optical modules supplied by Anritsu.

Personal Warnings To avoid personal injury due to hazardous voltages when installing and/ or configuring the CMA 3000, always: •

Turn off power and disconnect power cable from CMA 3000

•

Disconnect all signal cables from the CMA 3000

!

Always disconnect all cables (including power cable) from the CMA 3000 before any installation.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-6

1.4

1.4

Precautions

Precautions This section contains some precautions which should be followed to avoid damage or malfunction due to incorrect use, handling and transportation of the CMA 3000.

1.4.1

ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) Modules and options for the CMA 3000 contain electronic devices that are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge). Therefore, all ESD sensitive items are delivered from Anritsu A/S in antistatic shielding packages. Electrostatic discharge during installation can result in destruction or degradation of these devices. The damage may lead to equipment failure later. When you install or remove modules, it is your responsibility to control ESD. To control ESD take the issues described below into consideration. Avoid build-up of electrostatic charge •

Keep your workplace clear of any item that can generate electrostatic charges e.g. all items that are not made of antistatic materials.

Minimize the exposure to ESD •

Keep ESD sensitive items in antistatic shielding packaging as long as possible.

•

Do not remove ESD sensitive items from equipment or the antistatic shielding packaging unless you are connected to the equipment with a grounding wrist strap (as described later).

•

Return ESD sensitive items to antistatic shielding packaging.

Keep equipment, the ESD sensitive items and yourself at same static potential •

If your workplace is already prepared for handling ESD sensitive items, then follow your usual procedure. If not, you should follow the procedure below using a ground wrist strap.

•

Attach the wrist end of the wrist strap firmly around your wrist and the other end to the equipment chassis or ground plug.

•

Keep the wrist strap on while you install or remove ESD sensitive items. Do not remove the wrist strap until the ESD sensitive parts are either installed or returned to the antistatic shielding package.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-7

1.4

Precautions

1.4.2

Radio Emissions This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN 55022.

! 1.4.3

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet emission limits.

Transportation Always handle and transport the CMA 3000 carefully, as it contains delicate components.

! 1.4.4

Do not expose the CMA 3000 to shocks during transportation and operation.

Port Connectors Please note the following warnings regarding the CMA 3000 Port connections.

!

The CMA 3000 is intended for use in an environment that is protected against lightning induced over-voltages and AC power line surges.

!

The BNC and BNO connectors on the back of the instrument shall only be connected to isolated and protected test points on the telecom equipment.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-8

1.4

1.4.5

Precautions

Optical Surfaces The optical interfaces - transmitter as well as receiver - are very sensitive to contamination. Be aware that contamination of the optical surfaces may result in severe loss of signal.

1.4.6

!

To prevent contamination of the optical surfaces, mount protective caps to seal the transmitter/receiver connectors, when no fiber optic cables are connected.

!

Correct functioning of the instrument can only be ensured if optical modules, supplied by Anritsu for the CMA 3000 are used.

Ventilation Depending of the installed options, the instrument can have build-in fan(s), to prevent the temperature to raise inside the instrument.

!

Be sure not to block the ventilation holes.

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-9

1.4

Precautions

This page intentionally left blank

CMA 3000, Introduction 1-10

2

Configuration This chapter contains information about the included accessories and the basic configuration. You will find information about how to connect the mains adapter, about the battery used and how to charge it.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-1

2.1

Delivered Accessories

2.1

Delivered Accessories The instrument is delivered in a shipment container together with various accessories depending on the order. When unpacking the first time, it is recommended to check these accessories from the list(s) below.

2.1.1

Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are delivered with the instrument:

2.1.2

•

User Guide (this book)

•

Rechargeable battery

•

Mains adapter

•

Mains cable

•

Stylus Touch Pen

Optional Accessories The following optional accessories may be delivered with the instrument (if included in the order): •

Instrument carrying strap

•

Carrying case

•

Soft bag

•

Measuring cables

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-2

2.2

2.2

Mains Power Adapter

Mains Power Adapter The CMA 3000 can be powered from the supplied AC mains adapter.

! 2.2.1

Always use AC mains adapter delivered from Anritsu. Anritsu part No. 01582600.

Connecting Mains Power Adapter To connect the mains power adapter to the CMA 3000, follow the procedure below. •

Insert the mains adapter’s DC power plug into the socket connector marked ‘18 V DC’. The DC input connector is located on the left panel of the CMA 3000.

•

Connect the AC plug of the mains adapter to the mains and switch on the mains wall outlet.

Fig. 2.1 The 18 V DC power connector.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-3

2.3

Rechargeable Battery

2.3

Rechargeable Battery CMA 3000 is delivered with a 10.8 V intelligent Li-Ion rechargeable and replaceable battery. The typical operation capacity (with a fully charged battery) will for the basic instrument be more than 10 hours with ‘PowerSave’ enabled, or more than 6 hours with ‘PowerSave’ disabled.

Fig. 2.2 CMA 3000 battery.

Initial charging

!

Use only original batteries delivered from Anritsu, to prevent the risk of instrument damage or personal injury.

!

Battery should only be charged at room temperature.

The battery will normally be partially or fully discharged on delivery. It is recommended to charge the battery as the first thing after delivery and unpacking. In Stand By Mode, the ON/OFF LED indicator will stop flashing when the battery is fully charged. If the battery happens not to be used for a longer period of time it is recommended that it contains at least 20% capacity. Charge the battery before storage, if necessary.

Temperature

When charging is in process, the temperature of the battery will increase. The intelligence of the battery will ensure that the charging takes place at the correct temperature.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-4

2.3 Rechargeable Battery

2.3.1

Installing or Replacing Battery To install or replace the battery in the CMA 3000 follow the procedure below: •

Place the instrument on its front on a plain surface and unscrew the battery compartment lock screw, as shown in Fig. 2.3.

Fig. 2.3 Battery compartment lock screw. •

To release the battery compartment door - press down at the notch, while dragging it outwards.

Fig. 2.4 Press the notch to release battery door.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-5

2.3

Rechargeable Battery

2.3.2

•

Pull out the battery from the compartment using the strap fixed to it.

•

When installing the battery, note the direction of the battery terminals. With the instrument placed on its front - and the battery compartment in front of you - the terminals should be in the upper left corner.

•

Re-install the battery compartment door and tighten the lock screw.

Charging Battery in Fast Mode Power is applied from the external AC mains adapter - and the CMA 3000 is switched OFF during the charging (Stand By Mode). To charge the CMA 3000 battery using the fast charge mode follow the procedure below. •

Switch OFF the CMA 3000

•

Connect mains adapter, as described in Connecting Mains Power Adapter on page 2-3

ON/OFF indicator

When connected, the ON/OFF indicator will after approx. 30 seconds flash indicating that charging is in progress. When the flashing stops, the charging is complete. If the battery is defect - the ON/OFF indicator will also light. Therefore, the best way to check the battery status is to switch on the CMA 3000 and observe the status indicator at the bottom of the screen, or click the status indicator as described in Battery Status Information on page 2-7.

2.3.3

Charging Battery in Normal Mode Power is applied from the external AC mains adapter - and the CMA 3000 is switched ON during the charging. A normal charge of the battery is taking place every time the instrument is in use and connected to the mains adapter. The battery status can be checked in the status line at the bottom of the screen - or in the miscellaneous screen, as described in Battery Status Information on page 2-7.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-6

2.3 Rechargeable Battery

2.3.4

Battery Status Information The battery status is indicated as an icon in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. One of the 4 icons shown below will be displayed. Icon indicates that the battery is charging. CMA 3000 is using the net adapter as power source.

Icon indicates that the battery is fully charged. CMA 3000 is using the net adapter as power source.

Icon indicates that there is no battery in the CMA 3000 (or the battery is malfunctioning). CMA 3000 is using the net adapter as power source.

Icon indicates that CMA 3000 is using the battery as power source. The net adaptor is not connected.

There is a delay of several seconds until the battery status is updated.

A more detailed battery status information is launched when clicking the Battery symbol found in the status bar. The example in Fig. 2.5 shows the status screen of a battery under charging.

Fig. 2.5 The battery status information screen.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-7

2.4

Measurement Cables

2.4

Measurement Cables When connecting the CMA 3000 to the line to be tested or monitored - it is recommended always to use shielded cables of good quality, to avoid the possibility of corrupting the measuring results. For the same reason, the mains adapter, if used, should be connected to the instrument and switched on before starting the measurement. For connection of the CMA 3000 to different types of equipment, different cables are available. Please request your Anritsu representative for information.

2.4.1

Connecting Measurement Cables Measurement cables are connected to the input and output connectors located on the rear panel of the instrument. Various connector types: Unbalanced, balanced and optical types are available. Fig. 2.6, shows rear panel equipped with three internally installed options: Data Option,10/100 Ethernet option and SDH test option.

Fig. 2.6 Rear panel connectors for measurement cables. Fig. 2.7, shows rear panel equipped with two internally installed options, as well as the externally mounted option, Ethernet 10/100/1000.

Fig. 2.7 Optional Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface Module mounted.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-8

2.4

Measurement Cables

Fig. 2.8, shows rear panel equipped with the High Speed Single Port Interface and Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface.

Fig. 2.8 Optional High Speed Single Port Interface and Ethernet 10/ 100/1000 Interface Module mounted. Fig. 2.9, shows rear panel equipped with the High Speed Dual Port Interface and Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface.

Fig. 2.9 Optional High Speed Dual Port Interface and Ethernet 10/100/ 1000 Interface Module mounted.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-9

2.5

Support Stand and Carrying Strap

2.5

Support Stand and Carrying Strap

2.5.1

Support Stand CMA 3000 is equipped with a support stand keeping the instrument in a convenient angle during operation. To extract the stand: pull out the bracket underneath the instrument - it automatically stays in this position.

Fig. 2.10 The support stand extracted.

2.5.2

Carrying Strap (Optional) The optional carrying strap can easily be mounted for your convenience when transporting the CMA 3000. The carrying strap is equipped with self-closing hooks for easy installation. Pull back the spring part to open the hook, and place it around the lock pin on the instrument.

Fig. 2.11 Releasing the spring lock before installing the hook.

CMA 3000, Configuration 2-10

3

Man-Machine-Interface

Man-Machine-Interface (MMI) covers the relation between the user and the instrument, in other words - the information you get from the instrument combined with the action you add to the instrument. The informative parts are the TFT display and the LED indicators. The parts susceptible to influence are function keys and the touch-active layer of the screen. Connections made to the input and output connectors are included in the MMI as well. The optional FrontSim software that makes remote operation of the CMA 3000 is also part of the MMI.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-1

3.1 Touch Screen Display

3.1

Touch Screen Display The 8 ¼ inch active TFT display with VGA resolution (640x480 pixels) is used for setups and presentation of results. As the display includes touch screen functionality it is possible to navigate and operate directly from it.

Fig. 3.1 Operating the touch screen. The touch screen display is constructed to be operated by the tip of your fingers or by the included Stylus Touch Pen (Anritsu part No. 97600800), only. The touch screen surface is made of delicate material and is easily scratched or damaged, if handled incorrectly.

!

Never expose the touch screen to excessive pressure, as this may damage its functionality.

!

Never use sharp objects e.g. pens, paper clips etc. to operate the touch screen, as this may damage the surface.

!

Only use a soft cloth moisturized with a mild detergent to clean the surface of the touch screen.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-2

3.2

3.2

Key Operation

Key Operation The physical operator keys on the front are described in this section.

3.2.1

Power ON/OFF Key This key has a combined function, which is activated the following way: Press power (ON/OFF) key directly, to switch on power. Press the (SHIFT) key followed by the power (ON/OFF) key to switch off power.

3.2.2

SHIFT Keys These keys enable the shift function. Pressing a (SHIFT) key followed by another key having a dual function - will activate this other function. The dual function is indicated by the ‘orange colored text’ on the key.

3.2.3

LED TRAP Key This key enables the TRAP function. All alarms since last reset are displayed in the LED indicators. Press the (LED TRAP) key activate the TRAP function. The LED adjacent to the trap key flashes if any alarm has been trapped. Press (SHIFT) followed by (LED TRAP) key to reset the alarm trap function.

3.2.4

Start/Stop Key This key has a combined function, which is activated the following way: Press (START/STOP) key to start a measurement. Press (SHIFT) followed by (START/STOP) to stop a measurement.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-3

3.2

Key Operation

3.2.5

Error Key This key is directly activated. Press the (ERROR) key to insert an error in the transmitted signal. The type of error depends on the current setup.

3.2.6

Volume Keys These keys are used for control of sound level (volume) of the built in speaker or the connected earphones (optional). Press the

key to decrease the volume.

Press (SHIFT) followed by the

Press the

key to increase the volume.

Press (SHIFT) followed by the

3.2.7

key to mute.

key to unmute.

Navigation Keys These keys are used for navigation and operation of the menus displayed on the touch screen.

UP

Press the (UP) navigator key to move the cursor upwards. RIGHT

LEFT

Press the (DOWN) navigator key to move the cursor downwards. DOWN

Press the (RIGHT) navigator key to move the cursor to the right. Press the (LEFT) navigator key to move the cursor to the left. Press (SHIFT) followed by (UP) or (DOWN) to move the cursor between the 3 screen sections. See the illustration Fig. 3.2.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-4

3.2

Key Operation

Fig. 3.2 Illustration of the 3 screen sections.

3.2.8

Enter Key This key is an integrated part of the navigation keys. Press the (ENTER) key (centre of the navigator key) to accept the selections. This function will act the same way as the [OK] softkey in the screen menus.

3.2.9

ESC Key This key covers the escape function. Press the (ESC) key to cancel the current selection(s).

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-5

3.3

LED Indicators

3.3

LED Indicators The functionality of the LED indicators is dynamic, i.e. that the individual LED has no permanent function, but its function will be dedicated to it dynamically dependant on the actual mode of operation. Fig. 3.3 shows examples on this function. When pressing the first tab to the left on the screen, the ‘LED overlay’ screen part will appear showing the reason behind the physical LED on the front of the instrument.

Fig. 3.3 Examples of the LED overlay explanation.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-6

3.3 LED Indicators

As shown in Fig. 3.3, it is possible to select a normal or a slimmer LED indication layout. The slim layout makes more screen space available for general purpose. The change of the LED layout is done from the Global Configuration screen found under the Misc. > System configuration folder. The figure below shows this screen setup.

Fig. 3.4 Setting up the normal/slim LED indicator layout.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-7

3.4

Telephone Interface

3.4

Telephone Interface With the optional telephone available from Anritsu (P/N 07530010) connected to the telephone interface of the CMA 3000, it is possible to listen and insert speech in the audio channels available in the system The telephone is connected to the connector (marked with a telephone symbol) at the back panel of the CMA 3000.

Fig. 3.5 Connector for optional telephone.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-8

3.5 Earphone

3.5

Earphone With the optional earphone (P/N 80701200) available from Anritsu, it is possible for you to listen to speech channels in the telephone network.

!

The CMA 3000 is in combination with headphones or earphones capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable.

The adjustment of the output level is controlled from the ‘Audio’ keys on the front of the CMA 3000. The built-in loudspeaker is automatically disconnected when the jack connector of the headphones is connected to the socket on the left panel of the CMA 3000. Headphones or earphone is connected to the socket marked with a headset symbol.

Fig. 3.6 Headphones/earphones is connected to this socket.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-9

3.6

Back Panel Connectors

3.6

Back Panel Connectors All connections concerning the Test interface are placed at the back panel of the CMA 3000. The exact look of the CMA 3000 back panel and number of connectors depends on the optional interfaces installed.

3.6.1

Basic Instrument (2 Mbps) Below the back panel of a basic instrument (equipped with 2 Mbps only) is shown. 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fig. 3.7 Back panel on basic instrument. The table below describes where the different connectors are located. 1

TxB, unbalanced

2

TxB, balanced

Balanced transmitter B output

3

TxA, unbalanced

Unbalanced transmitter A output

4

TxA, balanced

Balanced transmitter A output

5

RxB, unbalanced

Unbalanced receiver B input

6

RxB, balanced

Balanced receiver B input

7

RxA, unbalanced

Unbalanced receiver A input

8

RxA, balanced

Balanced receiver A input

9

Aux

Auxiliary connector *Note 1

* Note 1

Unbalanced transmitter B output

Aux connector is used for External Clock In/Out. The input can be used as external input for a master clock signal to e.g. make the CMA 3000 in sync with a network. The output can generate an output clock, e.g. to be used as master clock in a network to get sync between more instruments.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-10

3.6 Back Panel Connectors

3.6.2

Fully Equipped Instrument (Internally Mounted Modules) Below the back panel of a instrument equipped will all internally installed modules is shown. 2

3

4

12

13

14

1

11

10

5

6

7

8

15

9

16

Fig. 3.8 Back panel connectors presented. The table below describes where the different connectors are located. 1

TxB, unbalanced

2

TxB, balanced

Unbalanced transmitter B output Balanced transmitter B output

3

TxA, unbalanced

Unbalanced transmitter A output

4

TxA, balanced

Balanced transmitter A output

5

RxB, unbalanced

Unbalanced receiver B input

6

RxB, balanced

Balanced receiver B input

7

RxA, unbalanced

Unbalanced receiver A input

8

RxA, balanced

Balanced receiver A input

9

Aux

Auxiliary connector *Note 1

10

Optical A

Optical connector A (optional)

11

Optical B

Optical connector B (optional)

12

STM-1, Tx

Electric STM-1 transmitter connector (optional)

13

STM-1, RxA

Electric STM-1 receiver A connector (optional)

14

STM-1, RxB

Electric STM-1 receiver B connector (optional)

15

Data

Data interface (37-pin D-sub) connector (optional) *Note 2

16

10/100 LAN

Local Area Network (LAN) connector 10/100 (optional)

* Note 1

Aux connector is used for External Clock In/Out. The input can be used as external input for a master clock signal to e.g. make the CMA 3000 in sync with a network. The output can generate an output clock, e.g. to be used as master clock in a network to get sync between more instruments.

* Note 2

A proprietary interface. This 37-pin layout is not a V.36 (or similar) interface. Use Anritsu cables to convert to selected interface e.g. V.35 or X21.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-11

3.6

Back Panel Connectors

3.6.3

Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface The optional and externally mounted Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface Module is equipped with two electrical and two optical connectors divided in Port A and Port B.

1

2

3

4

Fig. 3.9 The externally mounted Ethernet 10/100/1000 Module. Table below describes the location of the port connectors. 1

Electrical A

2

Optical A

Electrical Port A Optical Port A

3

Electrical B

Electrical Port B

4

Optical B

Optical Port B

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-12

3.6 Back Panel Connectors

3.6.4

High Speed Single Port Interface The optional and externally mounted High Speed Single Port Interface and Ethernet 10/100/1000 Module is equipped with two electrical and three optical connectors divided in Port A and Port B.

1

2

3

4

5

Fig. 3.10 The externally mounted High Speed Single Port Interface Module. Table below describes the location of the port connectors. 1

Optical A

2

Optical B

Optical Ethernet 100/1000 Port A Optical Ethernet 100/1000 Port B

3

Electrical A

Electrical Ethernet 10/100/1000 Port A

4

Electrical B

Electrical Ethernet 10/100/1000 Port B

5

Optical A

Optical Ethernet 10G and STM-64 Port A

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-13

3.6

Back Panel Connectors

3.6.5

High Speed Dual Port Interface The optional and externally mounted High Speed Dual Port Interface and Ethernet 10/100/1000 Module is equipped with two electrical and four optical connectors divided in Port A and Port B.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Fig. 3.11 The externally mounted High Speed Dual Port Interface Module. Table below describes the location of the port connectors. 1

Optical A

2

Optical B

Optical Ethernet 100/1000 Port A Optical Ethernet 100/1000 Port B

3

Electrical A

Electrical Ethernet 10/100/1000 Port A

4

Electrical B

Electrical Ethernet 10/100/1000 Port B

5

Optical A

Optical Ethernet 10G and STM-64 Port A

6

Optical B

Optical Ethernet 10G and STM-64 Port B

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-14

3.7

3.7

Left Panel Connectors

Left Panel Connectors All connections concerning the Service interfaces are located at the left panel of the CMA 3000. USB

LAN

Telephone

Earphone

Serial

DC Power

Fig. 3.12 Left panel connectors presented.

USB

The two USB connectors are e.g. used for connection of printers with USB interface. Another convenient use of this interface is the exchange of information to and from the instrument, i.e. by using USB storage devices.

LAN

The LAN connector is used for connecting the CMA 3000 to a Local Area Network, e.g. to remotely operate the instrument from a PC.

Telephone

The Telephone connector is for connecting an optional telephone as described in Telephone Interface on page 3-8.

Earphone

The Earphone connector is used for connecting an optional earphone as described in Earphone on page 3-9.

Serial

The IOIOI connector is a serial interface used for connection of a serial printer, or for an external GPS sensor (see ).

DC Power

The DC Power connector is used for connection of 18 V DC power delivered from the AC Adapter as described in Mains Power Adapter on page 2-3.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-15

3.8

FrontSim Option

3.8

FrontSim Option With the FrontSim option installed, your PC is capable of supporting remote access to CMA 3000. FrontSim simulates the front of the instrument allowing you to operate and view results on a PC through a LAN or Internet connection. If more instruments are linked to a network they can be remotely controlled by the same PC, each at a time. Operation requires installation of both the optional FrontSim instrument part and PC part.

3.8.1

Installation of FrontSim Software Installation of FrontSim is performed as described in the ‘FrontSim.pdf’ document found on the CD-ROM delivered with the FrontSim software package.

3.8.2

Connection and Setup To connect and setup the FrontSim for operation:

3.8.3

•

Connect an Ethernet network cable to the LAN connector on your CMA 3000 and link this to a Local Area Network

•

Assign an IP address to the CMA 3000. See how to setup IP address in Service Interfaces on page 4-296. For further information about how to assign IP addresses to the instrument and the connected PC, it is recommended to read the Application Note ‘Remote operation with the FrontSim option’ available from your Anritsu representative

Launching FrontSim FrontSim software is launched by pressing the CMA 3000 FrontSim icon. This icon can be found from Start -> Programs -> Anritsu FrontSim CMA 3000, if you have accepted to install program in the default folder as suggested during the program installation. When FrontSim is launched you will see the FrontSim intro screen shown in Fig. 3.13 next page.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-16

3.8

FrontSim Option

Fig. 3.13 The FrontSim intro screen launched.

Press the [telephone] softkey at the upper part of the screen. This will open the Connection Management setup screen.

Fig. 3.14 Connection management screen.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-17

3.8

FrontSim Option

3.8.4

Assigning Instruments to the List To be able to remote control an instrument, it needs to be assigned in the Connection Management list:

3.8.5

•

Fill in a name for the specific instrument in the Name field

•

Fill in the IP address you already have assigned to the instrument, in the Address field

•

Press the [Save] softkey to save the settings

Selecting and Connecting Instruments From the List To remote control a specific instrument on your network: •

Select instrument from the Defined connection list found in the Connection Management screen

•

Press [Connect] softkey to load the front panel of the instrument

When the instrument is connected and its Quick start screen is launched, close the Connection Management screen. The FrontSim is now ready to remote control the selected CMA 3000.

Fig. 3.15 FrontSim remote control panel.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-18

3.9

3.9

Command Based Remote Control Option

Command Based Remote Control Option With the Command Based Remote Control Option installed, CMA 3000 becomes a fully automated measurement instrument. •

The CMA 3000 remote control communication functions support the built-in Ethernet service interface.

•

Software specifications are in conformity with the IEEE488.2 standard and SCPI version 1999 (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments).

•

Ethernet drivers for National Instruments LabView are available.

All remote control features are described in a seperate document: CMA 3000, Command Based Remote Control, Operation Manual (Anritsu order number 09914401).

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-19

3.10

External GPS Sensor

3.10

External GPS Sensor It is possible to connect an external GPS sensor, part no. 01475090, available from Anritsu A/S. The GPS sensor is used for: • Precise time synchronization, when making one way Frame Transfer Delay measurements as part of the Ethernet Service Activation Test, see 4.27. •

Clock source in an IEEE 1588 system, see section 4.8.9.

•

Timing source for synchronizing Ethernet transmitters, see section 4.8.10 .

•

Reference source for Ethernet bit rate measurements.

Fig. 3.16 External GPS Sensor The 3 connectors of the GPS sensor must be plugged in to the CMA 3000: • The USB connector to one of the CMA 3000 USB ports on the left panel (for power supply) •

The 9 pin sub D connector to the 9 pin serial connector on the left panel (for communication).

•

The 15 pin sub D connector to the 15 pin AUX connector on the back panel (for the PPS (Pulse Per Second) signal).

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-20

3.10

External GPS Sensor

Fig. 3.17 External GPS sensor connected to CMA 3000 The 15 pin connector is stackable, so e.g. the Clock in/clock out cable (part no. 01467890) can be used together with the GPS sensor.

3.10.1

Activating the GPS sensor To activate the external GPS sensor, "V.24 Use" must be set to "GPS sensor" in Misc > System Configuration > Service Interfaces, see 4.53.2.

3.10.2

Using the GPS service One purpose of the external GPS sensor is to provide for precise one way Frame Transfer Delay measurements as part of the Ethernet Service Activation Test (see 4.27). When the GPS sensor is activated, and the active interface is Ethernet, the CMA 3000 will calibrate its internal time base to the ultra precise time signal from the GPS sensor. The calibration process takes approximately 1 minute. After calibration, if the GPS sensor is disconnected (or the GPS signals are lost), the GPS system enters "Holdover" mode. In holdover mode, the accuracy of the Frame Transfer Delay measurement can be maintained for approximately 1 hour. After this time, the GPS system will enter a "Not OK" state. When Ethernet is not the active interface, holdover mode is not applicable, and the GPS sensor is only used for setting the instrument time (see 3.10.4).

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-21

3.10

External GPS Sensor

If you want to disconnect the GPS sensor after calibration, it is recommended that you disconnect the The 9 pin sub D connector first.

For best accuracy, let the CMA 3000 warm up for 5 - 10 minutes before removing the GPS sensor, and keep the surrounding temperature as constant as possible.

3.10.3

GPS status bar icon When the external GPS sensor is activated, an icon in the status bar will indicate the current GPS status.

Fig. 3.18 GPS icon on status bar The icon will show as one of these: Status OK; the GPS is receiving signal from a sufficient number of satellites.

Status not OK; see below.

In GPS holdover mode (see 3.10.2.).

Clicking the icon will display an information pop-up box.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-22

3.10

External GPS Sensor

Fig. 3.19 GPS information pop-up box The pop-up box shows the current GPS status, and, for purely informational purposes, the number of satellites used for position fix, and the current geolocation of the GPS sensor, in degrees and decimal minute's format. "Status:" is one of the following: OK: The GPS sensor is connected, and is delivering timing information to the CMA 3000. OK (calibrating): As "OK", but the calibration period has not yet expired (See 3.10.2.). Only occurs when the active interface is Ethernet. Holdover (h:mm:ss remaining): In holdover mode; the maximum remaining time in this mode is stated, GPS sensor not found: The GPS sensor is not properly connected to the CMA 3000. Awaiting fix: The GPS sensor has not established proper signal reception from a sufficient number of GPS satellites.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-23

3.10

External GPS Sensor

No PPS - check cable: The Pulse Per Second signal is not detected on the 15 pin AUX connector. Presence of the PPS signal is only detected when an Ethernet interface is selected as the active interface.

3.10.4

Setting the instrument time from the GPS sensor When the external GPS sensor is connected and activated, it is possible to use the precise time of day information from the GPS system to adjust the instrument time on CMA 3000. This is also possible in GPS holdover mode, See 3.10.2. The pop-up box for setting the instrument date and time is opened by clicking the time field located rightmost on the status bar.

Fig. 3.20 Adjust date and time pop-up box. Click the Set from GPS button to get the time of day from the external GPS sensor.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-24

3.10

External GPS Sensor

The CMA 3000 does not know which time zone it is located in. Therefore, you must first set the date and time manually to within 10 minutes from the correct time, in order to have the time set correctly from GPS

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-25

3.10

External GPS Sensor

This page is intentionally left blank.

CMA 3000, Man-Machine-Interface 3-26

4

Graphical User Interface This chapter contains information about the graphical user interface.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-1

4.1

General Handling of Screens

4.1

General Handling of Screens The CMA 3000 is equipped with a touch screen display, which replaces most of the conventional front panel operator keys. The philosophy of the CMA 3000 operation principle is that you from a point of origin screen easily can manoeuvre the tabs and folders and link to other screens. All setup screens need to be accepted or rejected before the selections made will be in force. This means, that you have to press the [Ok] or the [Cancel] softkey of the actual menu before the CMA is apple to process the selection. The example below shows a typical setup screen. To increase or decrease the highlighted value stepwise by one, press the [+] or [-] softkey, respectively. The [->] and [ 2 Mbps

4.3

Interface > 2 Mbps The Interface screen contains setup parameters for two transmitters and two receivers.

4.3.1

Transmitter A and Transmitter B As the setup screens for Transmitter A and Transmitter B are identical, this description will cover both transmitters.

Fig. 4.7 Setup parameters for 2 Mbps transmitter. Transmission

Use the Transmission field to enable (On) or disable (Off) the transmitter. Output impedance is not defined when the transmitter is disabled. To generate a No Signal condition while retaining the current output impedance: set the Alarm generation to ‘No Signal’ on the next setup screen.

Connector

Use the Connector field to select the physical type of input connectors, located on the back panel of the instrument. Choose Unbalanced to link to the corresponding unbalanced connector, or Balanced to link to the corresponding balanced connector.

Drop and insert

Use the Drop and Insert field to setup the source for the transmitter. The whole contents of RxA or RxB can be selected as a source. D&I Off is identical to normal transmitter mode.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-6

4.3

Clock Source

Interface > 2 Mbps

The clock (and thus the output bit rate) can be generated internally, be derived from either of the receivers or an external clock input. An additional fixed deviation can be included if required. Press the Clock Source filed to open the setup screen - and use this menu to determine the Clock Frequency Offset deviation in ppm. In order to utilize the external clock source a proper cable (available from Anritsu A/S) must be connected to the instrument.

Line Code

Use the Line Code setup to select transmission line code HDB3 or AMI. For normal 2 Mbps systems choose HDB3. AMI is for special applications only.

PCM Frame

Use the PCM Frame setup to enable (On) or disable (Off) insertion of PCM frame in the transmitted signal. When set to Off, many of the following transmitter parameters are insignificant.

CRC4

Use the CRC4 setup to enable (On) or disable (Off) CRC4 in the transmitted signal contained in the PCM Frame. If you are uncertain whether the CRC4 should be selected or not, it is recommended to enable the CRC4. If D&I of the total contents of a receiver is selected and the signal contains CRC4, it is possible to either Bypass or Insert Sa-Bits.

Sa-Bits

From the Sa-Bits menu you set the Sa-Bits value of the non-FAS words in the transmitted signal when containing PCM Frame/CRC4. Press the Sa-Bits field to open the setup shown in Fig. 4.8.

Fig. 4.8 The Sa-bits setup screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-7

4.3

Interface > 2 Mbps

To change the Sa-bits, click the actual ‘bit key’ in the frame - this will toggle its binary value, i.e. from logic 1 to 0 or vice versa. From the adjacent drop-down menu you select whether or not to Insert Sa-bits or Bypass Sa-bits (this is only relevant when in ‘drop-and-insert’ mode. Pattern Type

Use the Pattern Type drop-down to select the pattern from the list to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Choose ATM to transmit ATM cells in the selected Pattern Time Slots. (The ATM application will become active, view Application > ATM > Transmitter). This requires that the ATM over E1 option is installed. For testing of data rates from 64 kbps to 2 Mbps in a 2 Mbps line, ITU-T O.150 recommends PBRS 11 to be used. For testing at the 2 Mbps rate, PRBS 15 is recommended in ITU-T O.150. Use the adjacent drop-down menu to select Normal or Inverted pattern type - all patterns (except All 0's, All 1's and “Fox”) may be Normal or Inverted.

Pattern Time Slots

Press the Pattern Time Slots menu field and use the launched menu to select the timeslots in where the Pattern will be inserted. Set and Clear timeslots as indicated on the screen.

Fig. 4.9 Pattern Time Slots menu screen. User Pattern [16 / 2048]

Press the User Pattern menu field and use the pop-up menu shown in Fig. 4.10 to define the user pattern. Depending on the selected pattern type different user pattern setup menus will be available.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-8

4.3

Interface > 2 Mbps

Fig. 4.10 Different types of User Pattern setup. The length can be any length from 1 bit to 16 bits or from 1 byte to 256 bytes).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-9

4.3

Interface > 2 Mbps

Unused Time Slots

Press the Unused Time Slots menu field and use the launched setup menu to define the unused time slots. To change the individual bit in the time slots, select the actual ‘bit key’ this will toggle its binary value, i.e. from logic 1 to 0 or vice versa.

Channel Content

Press the Channel Content field and select where to transmit the previously defined signal in the timeslot. The signal can either be a speech sequence or a tone, as defined in the tone fields: Off

No channel content is selected.

User Pattern

The User Pattern programmed other places.

PRBS 11

A PRBS 11 signal is transmitted.

Telephone

Input from an analog telephone, connected to the phone plug of the instrument.

Tone

1000 Hz with a level of approximately 0 dBm.

Speech

Pre-programmed speech sequence.

Idle Speech

Idle Speech frames (GSM A-bis).

Data

Data TRAU frames (GSM A-bis).

O&M

O&M TRAU frames (GSM A-bis).

Transparent

The ‘Transparent’ choice can be used, when D&I of the whole contents of a receiver is selected, to insert errors in the channel when ‘Transparent’ is selected as Error Destination.

Press the other Channel Content field below the first and select GSM Abis speech encoding from the list appearing: FR-UL

Full Rate - Up-Link

FR-DL

Full Rate - Down-Link

HR-UL

Half Rate - Up-Link

HR-DL

Half Rate - Down-Link

EFR-UL

Enhanced Full Rate Up-Link

EFR-DL

Enhanced Full Rate Down-Link

AMR12.2, AMR10.2, AMR7.95, AMR7.40, AMR6.70, AMR5.90, AMR5.15, AMR4.75

AMR - Adaptive MultiRate (with bandwidth indication)

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-10

4.3

Channel Time Slot

Interface > 2 Mbps

Press the Channel Time Slots field and select the timeslot to insert the Channel Content signal.

Fig. 4.11 Channel Time Slot screen. Subchannel Number

Press the Subchannel Number field and from the launched setup select the rate (8, 16 or 64 kbit) and location within the selected timeslot for the subchannel signal transmission.

Fig. 4.12 Subchannel Number screen. Subchannel Number defines the rate (8,16, or 64 kbit/s) and the location within the selected time slot for the subchannel signal transmission. The remaining subchannels in the selected time slot will be filled with a GSM Idle sequence. The remainder of the subchannels in the selected timeslot will be filled with a GSM Idle Sequence.

These selections requires the Basic A-bis interface and Protocol Option.

Tone

Press the Tone Frq. field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to key in the frequency, using the numeric softkeys. Press the Tone Level field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to key in or adjust the level like described for the Tone Frequency.

CAS

Selection or disabling of a CAS signaling multiframe to be inserted in time slot 16 of the transmitted signal.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-11

4.3

Interface > 2 Mbps

CAS Bits

Use CURSOR up/down to define contents of a selectable CAS channel as well as the remaining channels. Press the SELECT button to accept.

Alarm

Select an alarm to be generated from the drop-down list.

This facility is turned off when No Alarm is selected.

Error Insertion

Press the Error Insertion field and select the Error Insertion rate from the drop-down menu: Off

Error Destination

Manual

Triggered by the Error-key

Periodically triggered

Error insertion is triggered every 10-2 to 10-7, and for each trigger a burst of selectable length is inserted.

ES and SES

Error Performance Event parameters to be inserted in the signal.

Press the Error Destination field and select the destination of the Error Insertion from the drop-down menu. The FAS selection permits manual insertion of 1 to 7 bit errors in the FAS word (i.e. the fixed bit of the non-FAS word is not affected). The Transparent selection permits error insertion in one live traffic channel in the Drop and Insert mode. (Set channel content to Transparent).

Error Burst Length

Press the Error Burst Length field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to key in the length on the launched numeric keyboard. Max length is 255 except FAS word error where max. length is 16, and FAS where max. length is 7. Alarm and error insertion can also be activated in the Application/Stimuli pop-up.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-12

4.3

4.3.2

Interface > 2 Mbps

Receiver A and B The Receiver screen contains setup parameters for the receivers (RxA and RxB). Only the receiver A is described, as the channels are identical.

Fig. 4.13 The receiver A screen. Reception

From the Reception field to enabling (On) or disabling (Off) of the reception function is performed.

The input impedance is undefined when a receiver is disabled.

Setup Follows

Press the Setup Follows field and select if the receiver function should be enabled (None) or follow a transmitter or the other receiver.

Connector

Press the Connector field and select the type of connector used: Unbalanced

Selects the corresponding unbalanced connector on the back panel.

Balanced

Selects the corresponding balanced connector on the back panel.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-13

4.3

Interface > 2 Mbps

Input mode

Input Sensitivity

Line Code

Press the Input mode setup field and select the mode of input: Terminate

Terminate is used when the instrument is used as a tester, and the receiver is the only device connected to the line. Input impedance is nominal.

Bridged

Bridged is used when the receiver is connected directly in parallel to a line carrying live traffic. Please observe that this way of connecting may disturb the monitored line, connection through a protected monitor point, as well as using the input mode Monitor is recommended.

Monitor

Monitor is used when connecting to protected monitoring points. The input impedance is nominal.

From the Input Sensitivity drop-down menu it is possible to set the sensitivity of the input. Selectable inputs: Full Sensitivity

No attenuation of input signal.

-20 dB

Input signal attenuated by -20 dB.

-33 dB

Input signal attenuated by -33 dB.

Press the Line Code setup field and select line code either HDB3 or AMI reception. For normal 2 Mbps systems choose HDB3. AMI is for special applications only.

PCM Frame

Press the PCM Frame setup field and enable (On) or disable (Off) the status of the PCM Frame.

CRC4 and E-bits

Press the CRC4 and E-bits menu field, respectively - to enable (On) or disable (Off) the bit in the received signal. Is it uncertain whether the CRC4 and E-bits are supported in the monitored signal - it is recommended to select the Off mode.

Pattern Type

Press the Pattern Type field and select the requested pattern from the drop-down menu. Choose ATM to enable the ATM receiver to process data from the selected Pattern Time Slots. (The ATM application will become active, view Application > ATM > Receiver A). This requires that the ATM over E1 option is installed. For testing of data rates from 64 kbps to 2 Mbps in a 2 Mbps line, ITU-T O.150 recommends PBRS 11 to be used. For testing at the 2 Mbps rate, PRBS 15 is recommended in ITU-T O.150. Press the adjacent Pattern Type field and select either Normal or Inverted pattern type from the launched drop-down menu. Patterns (except All 0's, All 1's and “Fox”) may be Normal or Inverted.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-14

4.3

Pattern Time Slots

Interface > 2 Mbps

Press the Pattern Time Slots field to launch the setup screen shown in Fig. 4.14. Select the timeslot to receive the Channel Content signal by pressing the actual field. Set and Clear timeslots as indicated on the screen.

Fig. 4.14 Receiver Pattern Time Slot. User Pattern [16 / 2048]

Press the User Pattern field and use the launched menu to setup the user pattern. Please see Fig. 4.10 for examples on user patterns.

Subchannel Content

Press the Subchannel Content field and use the launched drop-down menu to select where the previously defined signal can be received in the timeslot. The signal can either be a speech sequence or a tone, as defined in the tone fields:

Subchannel Time Slot

Off

No subchannel content selected.

User Pattern

The User Pattern selected.

PRBS 11

A PRBS 11 signal.

Press the Subchannel Time Slot field and select the monitored time slot containing the subchannel signal from the launched setup screen. Press a timeslot number to select.

Fig. 4.15 Channel Time Slot screen. Subchannel Number

Press the Subchannel Number field to launch the setup menu shown in Fig. 4.16. Use this menu to select the rate (8 or 16 kbit) and the location within the selected time slot for the subchannel pattern reception.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-15

4.3

Interface > 2 Mbps

This requires that the Basic Abis functionality option is installed.

Fig. 4.16 Subchannel Number screen. Audio

Press the Audio drop-down and select the features for the receiver decoding. Select On to enable the audio decoding, or Off to disable.

Audio Time Slot

Press the Audio Time Slot field and select the monitored Audio Time Slot from the launched screen. An example is shown in Fig. 4.17.

Fig. 4.17 Audio Time Slot screen. Audio Subchannel

Press the Audio Subchannel field and select the audio channel width of the subchannel. (8 or 16 bit/s GSM, or 64 kbit/s A-law).

Fig. 4.18 Audio Subchannel screen. Output Clock

Use the Output Clock field to select whether or not the regenerated receiver clocks are routed to the clock output (On) or not (Off). Requires a special cable (available from Anritsu A/S) connected to the instrument.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-16

4.4 Interface > SDH

4.4

Interface > SDH This requires installation of the Enhanced SDH option. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) refers to a group of fiber-optic transmission rates that can transport digital signals with different capacities. The SDH option has two electrical receivers and one electrical transmitter. If additionally, equipped with two optical modules, the instrument supports simultaneous bi-directional monitoring of SDH lines.

4.4.1

Transmitter A The Transmitter A tab presents the transmitter setup screen. From this several setups are possible.

Fig. 4.19 The SDH transmitter setup screen launched. From the three drop-down menus located to the right on the screen it is possible to enable the optical or the electrical interface, respectively. The general principle in setting up the SDH transmitter is done by clicking the different square boxes appearing on the screen. Depending on the actual box, various setup selections will be possible from the appearing screens. Example in Fig. 4.20 shows the launched editor screen when clicking the ‘SOH’ box from the SDH transmitter screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-17

4.4

Interface > SDH

Fig. 4.20 Example shows the SOH editor screen. Principle is the same here, clicking a box or drop-down menu will open for new editor screens, menu selections etc. TCM*

From the TCM drop-down menu the possible selections are: Off, N1 (VC4) and N2 (VC12). TCM, Tandem Connection Monitoring checks the Virtual Containers (VC) for errors upon entering the second operator’s network and leaving it again and by this supervising the transmission quality. *)This requires that the TCM option is installed.

Clock

From the Clock drop-down menu it is possible to select various clock types; Internal Clock, External 2.048 MHz Clock, Received RxA E1 Clock, Received RxB E1 Clock, Received RxA Signal Clock or Received RxB Signal Clock.

ATM*

ATM over SDH is transmitted as VC4 or VC4-4C. Click on the Container 4 button and select ATM in the drop down menu. The ATM is configured by pressing on the Configure button or on the ATM page: Applications > ATM -> Transmitter. *)This requires that the ATM over SDH option is installed.

ATM over E3 over SDH*

A third way of transmitting ATM is possible; which requires the E3 option. Press the Container 3 button and select ATM in the drop down menu. Press the Configure button. On the E3 interface page select ATM in the Pattern type drop down menu. *)This requires that the ATM over E1/E3 option is installed.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-18

4.4 Interface > SDH

4.4.2

Receiver A and B The Receiver A/B tab presents the receiver setup screen. From this several setups are possible.

Fig. 4.21 The SDH receiver setup screen launched. The general principle in setting up the SDH receivers A/B is done by clicking the different square boxes appearing on the screen. Depending on the actual box, various setup selections will be possible from the appearing screens. From the Setup Follows drop-down menu it is possible to select either Tx, Rx or None, meaning that the receiver A, respectively B, will follow the transmitter or not. ATM*

ATM over SDH is received as VC4 or VC4-4C. Click on the Container 4 button and select ATM in the drop down menu. The ATM is configured by pressing on the Configure button or on the ATM page: Applications -> ATM -> Receiver A. The tabs on the ATM application page show where ATM data is received from and transmitted to. *)This requires that the ATM over SDH option is installed.

ATM over E3 over SDH*

A third way of demapping ATM is possible; which requires the E3 option. Press the Container 3 button and select ATM in the drop down menu. Press the Configure button. On the E3 interface page select ATM in the Pattern type drop down menu. E3 are framed with G.832 when it is transmitted over SDH. *)This requires that the ATM over E1/E3 option is installed.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-19

4.5

Interface > E3/DS3

4.5

Interface > E3/DS3 This requires installation of the E3 option. The Interface screen contains setup parameters for two transmitters and two receivers. The E3 interface uses the same connectors as the 2 Mbps unbalanced connectors, which means that a transmitter or a receiver can be either 2 Mbps or E3 not both. However any mixed combination of 2 Mbps and E3 is possible like e.g.: TxA=E3, TxB=2 Mbps, RxA=E3, RxB=2 Mbps.

4.5.1

Transmitter A and B As the setup screens for Transmitter A and B are identical, this description will cover both transmitters.

Fig. 4.22 Setup parameters for E3 transmitter. Transmission

Use the Transmission field to enable (On) or disable (Off) the transmitter. When transmission is set to SDH it is not possible to change its value. Output impedance is not defined when the transmitter is disabled. To generate a No Signal condition while retaining the current output impedance: set the Alarm generation to No Signal on the Application->Stimuli setup screen.

Mode

The transmission mode can be either E3 (~34 Mbit) or DS3 (~45 Mbit).

Clock Source

The clock (and thus the output bit rate) can be generated internally or derived from the receiver. An additional fixed deviation can be included if required. Press the softkey adjacent to the drop-down menu to set the Clock Frequency Offset deviation in ppm.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-20

4.5 Interface > E3/DS3

PCM Frame

Use the PCM Frame setup to enable (On) or disable (Off) insertion of PCM frame in the transmitted signal.

The PCM Frame applies for E3 only. DS3 is always unframed.

Pattern Type

Use the Pattern Type drop-down to select the pattern from the list to be inserted in the transmitted signal. If the proper Option is installed, ATM can be selected for the transmitter (A only). If ATM is selected the transmitter is setup to transmit ATMoE3 cells. Use the adjacent drop-down menu to select Normal or Inverted pattern type - all patterns (except All 0's, All 1's, 'Fox' and ATM (option) may be Normal or Inverted.

User Pattern

When a selected pattern requires more setup, this button will open a setup page to change the selected pattern.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-21

4.5

Interface > E3/DS3

4.5.2

Receiver A and B The Receiver screen contains setup parameters for the receivers (RxA and RxB). Only the receiver A is described, as the channels are identical.

Fig. 4.23 Setup parameters for E3 receiver. Reception

From the Reception field to enabling (On) or disabling (Off) of the reception function is performed.

The input impedance is undefined when a receiver is disabled.

Mode

The transmission mode can be either E3 (~34 Mbit) or DS3 (~45 Mbit).

Setup Follows

Press the Setup Follows field and select if the receiver function should be enabled (None) or follow a transmitter or the other receiver.

PCM Frame

Press the PCM Frame setup field and enable (On) or disable (Off) the status of the PCM Frame.

PCM Frame applies for E3 only. DS3 is always unframed.

Pattern Type

Press the Pattern Type field and select the requested pattern from the drop-down menu. Press the adjacent Pattern Type field and select either Normal or Inverted pattern type from the radio buttons. Patterns (except All 0's, All 1's and ‘Fox’) may be Normal or Inverted.

User Pattern

When a selected pattern requires more setup, this button will open a setup page to change the selected pattern.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-22

4.6 Interface > E4

4.6

Interface > E4 This requires installation of the E4 option. The Interface screen contains setup parameters for one transmitter and two receivers. The E4 interface uses the same connectors as the electrical STM1 interface, which means that a transmitter or a receiver can be either STM1 or E4. Mixed combinations are not available.

4.6.1

Transmitter The Transmitter screen contains setup parameters for the transmitter.

Fig. 4.24 Setup parameters for E4 transmitter.

Transmission

Use the Transmission field to enable (On) or disable (Off) the transmitter. When transmission is set to SDH the E4 signal is embedded in a STMVC4-C4 container. Output impedance is not defined when the transmitter is disabled. To generate a No Signal condition while retaining the current output impedance; set the Alarm generation to No Signal on the Application->Stimuli setup screen.

Clock Source

The clock (and thus the output bit rate) can be generated internally or derived from the receiver. An additional fixed deviation can be included if

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-23

4.6

Interface > E4

required. Press the softkey adjacent to the drop-down menu to set the Clock Frequency Offset deviation in ppm. PCM Frame

Use the PCM Frame setup to enable (On) or disable (Off) insertion of PCM frame in the transmitted signal.

Pattern Type

Use the Pattern Type drop-down list to select the pattern from the list to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Use the adjacent drop-down menu to select Normal or Inverted pattern type - all patterns (except All 0s, All 1s) may be Normal or Inverted.

User Pattern

When a selected pattern requires further setup, this button will open a setup page to change the selected pattern.

4.6.2

Receiver A and B The Receiver screen contains setup parameters for the receivers (RxA and RxB). Only the receiver A is described, as the channels are identical.

Fig. 4.25 Setup parameters for E4 receiver.

Reception

Use the Reception field for enabling (On) or disabling (Off) of the reception function. The input impedance is undefined when a receiver is disabled.

Gain

Press to select either Terminate or Monitor. (Enhanced SDH test option)

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-24

4.6 Interface > E4

Setup Follows

Press the Setup Follows field and select if the receiver function should be enabled (None) or follow the transmitter or the other receiver.

PCM Frame

Press the PCM Frame setup field and enable (On) or disable (Off) the status of the PCM Frame.

Pattern Type

Press the Pattern Type field and select the requested pattern from the drop-down menu. Press the adjacent Pattern Type field and select either Normal or Inverted pattern type from the radio buttons. Patterns (except All 0s, All 1s) may be Normal or Inverted.

User Pattern

When a selected pattern requires further setup, this button will open a setup page to change the selected pattern.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-25

4.7

Interface > V-Series

4.7

Interface > V-Series This requires installation of the V-Series option. Selecting V-Series from the Interface drop-down menu will launch the setup screen shown below.

Fig. 4.26 V-Series setup screen launched. Selection

Selection of the V-series type. Available types: None, RS-232/V.24 Async., RS-232/V.24 Sync., RS-449/V.36, RS-530, V.35, X.21/V11.

Mode

Press the Operating Mode field menu and select mode type. In DCE and DTE mode the instrument will emulate either DCE or the DTE side. Main application will be either BERT or Frame Relay testing, with one transmitter and one receiver, alternative drop and/or insert to and from 2 Mbps. In this mode the instrument will monitor and generate the signals that are relevant in each mode. The timing is normally determined by the DCE. In Monitor mode, all data and control lines from both sides will be monitored simultaneously and signaling recorded including Frame Relay monitoring. The instrument will not drive any signal and the measurement is non-intrusive. The Drop mode is a special mode where signals from both directions are driven by the instrument. It is not relevant to connect the instrument to normal DCE or DTE equipment in this situation, but it provides a way of dropping signals to equipment that can receive in monitor mode. All control signals are also to be driven by the instrument. From the adjacent col-

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-26

4.7

Interface > V-Series

umn it is possible to select whether the DCE/DTE emulation is: Receive Only, Transmit Only, Transceive, RxA-DCE & RxB-DTE and RxADTE & RxB-DCE. If operating as ‘drop’ it selects to which direction the 2 Mbit/s receivers are routed. The setting of the Selection and Operation significantly effects which of the following parameters are available. Bit Rate sets the bit rate of the interface: 50 - 115200, 8 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 1024 kbps, 4928 kbps, 4992 kbps, Incoming, or Free. From the adjacent drop-down menu it is possible to select multipliers between 1 to 8 (8 kbps), 1 to 32 (56 kbps and 64 kbps) or between 1 to 10 (1024 kbps). When "Free" is selected, the adjacent field opens a setup screen by which it is possible to set the bit rate with 1 bps resolution, from 50 bps to the interface dependent maximum. For RS-232/V.24 Async., the maximum bit rate is 128000 bps. For RS-232/V.24 Sync., the maximum bit rate is 64000 bps. For other interface types, the maximum bit rate is 10240000 bps. Format

DCE Transmit Clock (Transmit only), selects whether the DCE transmit clock is generated Internally or derived from an Incoming signal. DTE Transmit Clock (Transmit only), selects if the DTE transmit clock is derived from an Incoming signal or generated Internally. Asynchronous Format, selects the format (i.e. number of bits per character) of interfaces with asynchronous timing. Next column selects the format (i.e. number of stop bits and parity) of interfaces with asynchronous timing. X.21 X/B Signal (X.21 Interface only), selects how the X/B control signal should be used. With this parameter the user can select which clock edge from the incoming clock that is used to clock out transmitter data from the instrument. T normal is accordance with the X.21 recommendation. If there are problems with high data rates on the X.21 interface, the T displaced should be selected instead. Receiver Termination (X.21 Interface and receive only), When in DCE or DTE mode, this selects whether receiving signals are terminated or not. For the RS-449, RS-530 and V.35 interfaces the receiver termination is always on when in DCE or DTE mode.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-27

4.7

Interface > V-Series

Pattern

Pattern Type, enabling or disabling the generation and/or verification of a pattern. Choose between PRBS 6, 7, 9, 11, 12, 15, 20 or 23, or QRSS 11 or 20, or two user-defined patterns (16 bits or 2048 bits long), or 'Quick brown fox ..'-pattern or six fixed patterns (All 0's, All 1's, Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating 1:7 and Alternating 3:24). Data may also be inserted into or dropped from the 2 Mbit/s interface. The User Pattern [2048] is edited by pressing the button with the label “2048/2048 Bits”. Patterns (except All 0's, All 1's and “Fox”) may be Normal or Inverted. User Pattern (16), settings for the user defined Pattern. The pattern length is 1 to 16 bits.

Errors

Error Insertion (Transmit only), selection of the Error insertion rate. Error insertion can be “Off”, “Manually triggered” (by the ERROR key), “Periodically triggered”, or set to give a selectable Error Performance Event (ES or SES). Error Destination: (Transmit only), selects the destination for Error Insertion. Error Burst Length: (Transmit only), setting the Error Burst Length. Max. length is 255.

4.7.1

Codirectional Interface The CMA 3000 with the V-series interface option also supports the G.703 codirectional interface. The codirectional interface may be configured as either 1 transmitter - 1 receiver, or as 2 receivers. The latter is particularly suited for monitoring of CCS signalling links carried on a codirectional interface. It is also possible to transmit on the 2 Mbps interface and receive on the codirectional interface, or vice versa, for testing of demultiplexers and multiplexers. The codirectional interface can be selected in line with the various V-series interfaces. When the codirectional interface is selected, the ‘V-series/Codir.’ screen will launch (see Fig. 4.27).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-28

4.7

Interface > V-Series

Fig. 4.27 Codirectional interface screen. Speed

Bit rate, sets the interface bit rate: 64 to 512 kbps.

Codir. Transmitter

Active, sets the transmitter On or Off. Transmit Clock, selects Internal, RxA, RxB, or Incoming. RxA and RxB refers to the 2 Mbps receivers; Incoming refers to the codirectional receiver. Pattern type, selects the transmitted pattern. User Pattern [16], sets the user defined 16 bit pattern. The pattern length is 1 to 16 bits.

Codir. Receiver

Active, sets the receiver Off, On (1 receiver), or Dual Rx (2 receivers). Pattern type, sets the transmitted pattern. User Pattern [16], sets the user defined 16 bit pattern. The pattern length is 1 to 16 bits.

Errors

Error Insertion (Transmit only), selection of the Error insertion rate. Error insertion can be “Off”, “Manually triggered” (by the ERROR key), “Periodically triggered”, or set to give a selectable Error Performance Event (ES or SES). Error Destination: (Transmit only), selects the destination for Error Insertion. Error Burst Length: (Transmit only), setting the Error Burst Length.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-29

4.7

Interface > V-Series

Max. length is 255.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-30

4.8

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Interface > Ethernet This requires installation of the Ethernet 10/100 Interface option, the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option or the High Speed Interface option including 10 GigE LAN / 10 GigE WAN. Selecting Ethernet from the Interface drop-down menu will reveal 3 subtabs: Port Control, Port A setup and Port B setup.

4.8.1

Port Control Tab Selecting the Port Control tab will open a screen as shown in Fig. 4.28.

Fig. 4.28 Port Control tab launched. Port Control

From the Port Control section three port modes are available: Monitor/ Generate, Pass through and Reflector mode. These modes reflect the physical setup. The Port Control screen will have various looks depending upon the selected port control type. The dynamic diagram at the Port Control screen will show the current link status of the line and the resolved speed and duplex settings for both ports as depicted below. For a more thoroughly live status of the ports see section 4.47, Status > Ethernet Interface.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-31

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Monitor/Generate mode This mode is typically used for out-of-service and performance testing. It is possible to perform a passive, unintrusive monitoring or at the same time transmit test data, which could be reflected for further evaluation and testing of the network (as illustrated below).

Selecting the Port Control tab and selecting Monitor/Generate mode will open a screen like the one shown in Fig. 4.29.

Fig. 4.29 Monitor/Generate selected in Port Control. See Port A/B on page 4-36 for general setup of Port A and Port B.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-32

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

If the Multistream option is installed and active the Port Control screen will look as shown in Fig. 4.30.

Fig. 4.30 Port Control screen with multistream shown. The Multistream option will allow 8 streams to be transmitted and received instead of the default one (stream 1).

Pass through mode This mode enables non-intrusive in-service monitoring for both fast troubleshooting and detailed analysis of the live traffic on a network. All traffic received on a port is forwarded on the other and vice versa. Traffic between the two network DUT elements is monitored as illustrated below.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-33

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Selecting the Port Control tab and selecting Pass Through mode will open a screen like the one shown in Fig. 4.31.

Fig. 4.31 Pass through selected. See Port A/B on page 4-36 for general setup of Port A and Port B. If the Synchronous Ethernet option is installed the active Port Control screen will look as shown in Fig. 4.32

Fig. 4.32 Port control pass through SyncE Enable

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-34

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

SyncE can be enabled to allow the change of quality level reported in the passing ESMC messages and/or capture of ESMC messages in both directions. Modify QL/SSM Change the quality level reported in the passing ESMC messages on the fly. Choose the reported quality level in the select boxes. ESMC capture A check in the ESMC capture box enables capture of ESMC messages. The captured messages are stored as part of a measurement and can subsequently be exported to a PCAP file compatible with Wireshark using the FrontSim option (version 1.13 or newer). IEEE 1588v2 Enable A check in the Enable box enables update of the correction field in applicable PTP messages according to the chosen domain. PTP capture A check in the PTP capture box enables capture of PTP messages for the domain chosen in the Domain select box. The captured messages are stored as part of a measurement and can subsequently be exported to a PCAP file compatible with Wireshark using the FrontSim option (version 1.13 or newer). Ext. log A check in the Ext. log box enables that received and transmitted PTP messages are also written to the IEEE 1588 event log. Domain Select which domain to capture from, if capture is enabled. Statistics will also only be measured for the selected domain. Reflector mode In this mode CMA 3000 loops incoming traffic on a port swapping MAC and/or IP-addresses as illustrated in Fig. 4.33.

HDX is not possible in ‘Reflector’ mode.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-35

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.33 Reflector mode selected. See Port A/B on page 4-36 for general setup of Port A and Port B. MAC Swapping Control When Swap All MAC addresses is selected CMA 3000 transmits/reflects all received frames with swapped MAC addresses as opposed to when Swap Specific MAC address is selected where only the specified MAC address is swapped and reflected. The IP addresses and ports may also be swapped inside the reflected frames. Additionally the ACK flag may be forced set inside reflected TCP frames. Port A/B

From the Port A or Port B drop-down menu it is possible to select between two menu types; a ‘quick’ mode and an ‘advanced’ mode. Please observe that the available choices are dependable on the installed Ethernet type. Current auto negotiated speeds (rows) and duplex (columns), HDX to the right

Quick port setup Advanced port setup Electrical/optical port indicator

Fig. 4.34 Selecting either quick or advanced setup menu. Pressing the ‘arrow’ opens a quick menu as shown in Fig. 4.35.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-36

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.35 Quick setup menu launched. The available choices in the Quick Port Setup are dependent on the installed Ethernet option. Pressing the ‘advanced key’ opens a pop-up menu containing 3 softkeys launching a different menu each. See examples in Fig. 4.36. Port Mode

Selecting the [Off] softkey will shut down the Ethernet port and stop the physical link. Selecting the [Auto negotiate] softkey launches the menu shown in Fig. 4.36. Selecting the [Forced] softkey launches the menu shown in Fig. 4.37.

Autonegotiate The Autonegotiate menu shown to the left will be launched with the 10/ 100 Ethernet option installed and the Autonegotiate menu shown to the right will be launched with the Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface option or the High Speed Interface option installed.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-37

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.36 The two Advanced Setup menus. Auto Negotiation Advertisement

From the Auto Negotiation Advertisement field it is possible to set: FDX to 10, 100 and 1000*) HDX to 10, 100 *) Available and selectable when Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface or High Speed Interface option is installed. These are the speed and duplex capabilities that are advertised to the link partner. Using the [Select All] softkey will automatically set check marks in every checkbox.

1000 Mbps Specific Advertisement

From the Clock field a drop-down menu will launch the following settings: Prefer Master, Prefer Slave, Master or Slave

Flow Control

Enabling the ‘Respond to PAUSE frames’ field will force the transmitter to pause a short period of time in case a pause frame (defined in IEEE 802.3x) is received, e.g. in case of congestion of the foreign receiver.

Forced

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-38

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.37 The ‘Forced’ setup launched. Forced Mode Selection

Selection of forced mode speed and duplex. Available choices are: 10 Mbps HDX, 10 Mbps FDX, 100 Mbps HDX, 100 Mbps FDX and 1000 Mbps*). *) Available and selectable when the Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface or the High Speed Interface option is installed. When autonegotiating with a port that is forced (i.e. not using autonegotiation), the duplex will automatically be set to Half Duplex (HDX) and the speed to the speed used by the forced port for the port that is using autonegotiation. It is thus possible to have a duplex mismatch without knowing it.

Auto Detect

Auto Detect can be used to discover the speed and duplex capabilities of the link partner with different forced mode speed and duplex settings. When autonegotiating with a port that is forced (i.e. not using autonegotiation), the duplex will automatically be set to Half Duplex (HDX) and the speed to the speed used by the forced port for the port that is using autonegotiation, so typically a NIC with capabilities with Full Duplex (FDX) capabilities will show to be able to handle both HDX and FDX. Pressing the [Run Auto Detect] softkey starts this detection while displaying status. An example is shown in Fig. 4.38.

Fig. 4.38 The ‘Auto Detect’ running.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-39

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

This next section describing the ‘Optical’ tab available in the ‘Port Setup’ is only relevant when the Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface or the High Speed Interface option is installed.

Fig. 4.39 Optical Setup launched. The forced function under the ‘Optical’ tab is useful when there is a need for measuring on equipment that not support ‘Autonegotiating’. Then the fixed ‘Optical Forced 1000 Mbps FDX’ can be convenient.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-40

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

This section is only relevant if the High Speed Interface option and the 10 GigE WAN are installed. When running 10G only Forced mode is available.

Fig. 4.40 Optical Setup menu. Enable WAN

Enable insertion of the WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS).

Test Mode

Enable and control the WIS test-pattern generator and checker • Off (default) •

Square Wave

•

Mixed Frequency

•

PRBS 31

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-41

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Start/Stop Traffic Generator

Pressing the [Start Traffic Generator] softkey starts the generation of traffic on the respective port with the current transmitter settings, selectable under the Frame Content and Traffic folders under the Port A setup and Port B setup. To stop the generation of traffic, press the [Stop Traffic Generator] softkey. The Start key will turn into a Stop key after transmitting activation and displays progress of the transmission below the text if applicable. As depicted in Fig. 4.29 there is stated some essential information about the transmitter setup above the [Start Traffic Generator] softkey. If an optional 100 Mbit (optical) SFP module is installed, different setup settings will be available than those shown in the previous and in the following sections.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-42

4.8

4.8.2

Interface > Ethernet

Port A/B setup > Traffic Sub-tab From the Traffic sub-tab the following setups are available.

Fig. 4.41 Traffic screen. Follow port A

Feature for port B only. Setting a check in the Follow port A box will copy all the selected settings from port A and insert it in the setup of port B.

Traffic duration

From this field conditions concerning frames transmission is set. Choosing Continuous will make a continual test sequence. Alternative the duration can be set manually in either Seconds or Frames. Select respectively and select numeric field to setup.

Line load

Here the line load can be set in either % or Mbps. Also the line load profile can be selected as Constant or Ramp. If Ramp is selected press the [Line Load] soft button to enter the Ramp setup menu.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-43

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.42 Ramp setup From the line load ramp menu the following settings can be done. Line Load Start – The line load at which the ramp will start. Line Load End – The line load at which the ramp will end. Step Size – Specify the step size from start to end. Steo Duration – The duration of each step. Ramp Mode – Three different ramp modes can be selected: • Keep End Line Load • Repeat Ramp • Invert Ramp

Fig. 4.43 Ramp modes Frame sizes

From the Frame profile drop-down menu three modes are available: Constant, sends a fixed frame size specified in the Min field for the duration specified under Test duration.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-44

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Stepped, steps the frame size from Min to Max in increments of Step. Each frame size is transmitted for a period in seconds specified in Duration. If test duration is set to continuous the step sequence will be repeated infinitely. If it’s set to seconds it step sequence will be terminated when the specified total period has elapsed. Similarly for Frames, the step sequence will be terminated when the total number of transmitted frames reaches the specified count. Random, sends a continuous stream of frames of random size, evenly distributed between Min and Max.

Frame size is protocol headers and payload combined. Frame size does not include preamble and interframe gap. When the Multistream option is installed and active, the Traffic screen will contain a setup list of 8 streams which can be selected directly. See Fig. 4.44.

Fig. 4.44 Traffic screen appearing with Multistream option. Selecting one of the 8 stream ‘address boxes’ located to the left on the screen activates the relevant setup (located to the right) for this actual stream.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-45

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

4.8.3

Port A/B setup > WAN Frame Sub-tab This section is only relevant if the High Speed Interface and the WAN 10 GigE options are installed.

Fig. 4.45 WAN setup screen. Follow Port A

Feature for port B only. Setting a check in the Follow port A box will copy all the selected settings from port A and insert it in the setup of port B.

Version

Version Switches between SDH and Sonet notations on WAN status and result pages. • Sonet (default) •

Headers

SDH

Section OverHead (SOH) Example in Fig. 4.46 shows the launched editor screen when clicking the ‘SOH’ box from the WAN screen. All values are pre-set some of them are editable for the user, click a value to change it. The changes will not be applied before the [Ok] or [Apply] button is clicked.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-46

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.46 SOH Editor popup. Default: When pressed sets the default values Ok: Accept and close the popup Cancel: Reject and close the popup Apply: Apply the changes but keep the popup open

Path OverHead (POH) Example in Fig. 4.47 shows the launched editor screen when clicking the ‘POH’ box from the WAN screen. Like for the SOH all values are pre-set some of them are editable for the user, click a value to change it. The changes will not be applied before the [Ok] or [Apply] button is clicked.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-47

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.47 POH Editor popup. Default: When pressed sets the default values Ok: Accept and close the popup Cancel: Reject and close the popup Apply: Apply the changes but keep the popup open

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-48

4.8

4.8.4

Interface > Ethernet

Port A/B Setup > Frame Content Selecting the Frame Content tab found in the Port A/B Setup folder will launch a screen as shown in Fig. 4.48.

Fig. 4.48 Frame Content screen found in Port A/B setup. This screen contains setup of the Ethernet frame content transmitted by the CMA 3000. The exact layout is depending on the selected encapsulation and protocol headers. Press the buttons in the uppermost row to change the composition of the transmitted frames. This will affect the available setups in the frame and the view below will expand or contract to reflect the layout of the frame composition selected. The buttons are arranged in order, so the IP protocols are the uppermost layer and Ethernet the lowermost as depicted below compared to the OSI model (shown next page). #

OSI layer name

Protocol

3

Network

IP(1) / ICMP / ARP

2

Data Link

IEEE 802.2 LLC Type 1/ LLC1 + SNAP(2) VLAN(2) Ethernet ll Frame(1)

1

Physical

e.g. 100BASE-TX

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-49

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Referring to the table above: (1) protocols can not be excluded, but content can be changed. (2) protocols can be excluded and the content changed.

The Frame Content view shows each protocol layer with all the fields contained. Most fields are user-definable, but some are fixed, or changes dynamically based on e.g. frame size (which must be specified on the Traffic page). The following softkeys are available: Stream*), ETH, MPLS*), EoMPLS*), VLAN, LLC1, SNAP, IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP and BERT*). *) The ‘Stream’ and ‘BERT’ softkeys are only available when the Multistream option is installed. The ‘MPLS’ and ‘EoMPLS’ softkeys are only available when the MPLS option is installed. Stream 1..8

The [Stream] softkey is used to select the stream to show. When pressing this key a drop-down menu with a list from Stream 1 to Stream 8 is appearing. Selecting a stream here will show the setup frame content for this specific stream.

Port A and B

Pressing the softkey [Port A] or [Port B] opens a drop-down menu from where Stream 1 to 8 can be selected. The stream selected will hereafter be copied to the Frame Content of the actual stream selected (indicated by the name of the [Stream] softkey. The ‘Copy frame content from Port A’ and ‘Copy frame content from Port B’ softkey described above will only be available when the Ethernet Multistream option is installed.

ETH

It is possible to send unframed frames. In this mode the preamble, the BERT pattern and the optional sequence number are send on the line.

The ‘ETH’ softkey and therefore the BERT is only available in ‘Stream1’. Ethernet

The Ethernet (MAC) header contains MAC addresses and Ethertype. The type is automatically defined based on the above protocol layer.

Fig. 4.49 The Ethernet field.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-50

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

The Destination MAC address can either be specified manually, or be decided based on an ARP lookup, to enable ARP press the [ARP] softkey to the right of the Destination MAC address field. The ‘Broadcast’ control is used to set the ratio between Unicast and Broadcast frames transmitting.

Fig. 4.50 The [ ! ] softkey appears when pressing the [ARP] softkey. When ARP is selected a new softkey will appear next to the ARP key. This [ ! ] softkey is an ‘instant ARP’ key that when pressed will perform an ARP lookup immediately, instead of waiting until the transmitter starts. Source MAC address can be specified manually but the instrument comes with a default unique MAC address for each port. If the Use default field is selected the source MAC address will not be changed when settings are loaded. Encapsulation affects the Ping and RFC2544/Router Latency test, i.e. Ping replies will only be sent if the Ping request contains the same encapsulation as the one selected. VLAN affects the Ping and RFC2544/Router Latency test, i.e. when VLAN is enabled, only frames with VLAN tag will be accepted, furthermore Ping replies will only be sent if the Ping request contains the same VLAN ID as the one selected. MPLS Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) encapsulation. When the ‘MPLS’ option is installed, up to eight levels of MPLS fields can be inserted in the frame. The number of MPLS fields is selected through the Level count drop-down menu, and each level is set up individually.

Fig. 4.51 The MPLS field Pressing the Label field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup a denoting of the MPLS.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-51

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Pressing the EXP field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup the 3 bit value EXP (Experimental - used in MPLS to support differentiated services (priority)). Pressing the TTL field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup the 8 bit value TTL (Time To Live). EoMPLS Ethernet over Multi Protocol Label Switching (EoMPLS). When the ‘MPLS’ option is installed, an embedded Ethernet field can be inserted in the frame. This requires that MPLS is active. When EoMPLS is active the ARP button will be moved away from the primary Ethernet field.

Fig. 4.52 The EoMPLS field Enabling the Auto increment sequence number field makes the sequence number in the rfc4448 control word increment automatically instead of being fixed to zero. The remaining fields are described in the Ethernet part of this section.

VLAN

Virtual LAN (VLAN) is used to create independent logical networks within a physical network. When enabled, it adds a 16 bit IEEE 802.1Q field and a 16 bit Ethertype field to the header. The 802.1Q is separated into 3 parts.

Fig. 4.53 The VLAN field. Pressing the VID (VLAN ID) field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup a denoting of the virtual LAN. Enabling the CFI field sets a 1-bit flag denoting whether MAC addresses inside the frame are in canonical format.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-52

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Pressing the Priority field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup the priority level of each frame. When the ‘stacked VLAN’ option is installed, up to eight levels of VLAN can be inserted in the frame. The number of VLAN fields is selected through the Level count dropdown menu, and each level is set up individually.

Fig. 4.54 The stacked VLAN field When the VLAN level count is 2. The two VLAN levels will be designated S-VLAN and C-VLAN. S-VLAN is short for Service provider VLAN and CVLAN is short for Customer VLAN.

Fig. 4.55 The stacked VLAN field when the level count is 2 LLC

Logical Link Control (LLC). The DSAP, SSAP and Control fields are set automatically based on the upper protocol layer.

SNAP

SubNetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). The Protocol ID is fixed to 0, and the Ethertype field is depending on the upper protocol layer. SNAP’ is not possible without ‘LLC1’, and ‘IPv4’ and ‘IPv6’ are substitutes.

IPv4

Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4). When changing the DSCP/TOS (Differentiated Service Code Point/Type of Service) field it is possible to define some handling characteristics of the datagram, originally defined in RFC791. Other uses of the DSCP/TOS field are VoIP, DiffServ and ECN.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-53

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.56 The IPv4 field. The Identifier field is mainly used for uniquely identifying fragments of an IP datagram. When the Auto increment is selected, the Identifier will be different for each sent frame. Flags • MF (More Fragments) – When a packet is fragmented all fragments have the MF flag set except the last fragment. • DF (Don't Fragment) – If the DF flag is set and fragmentation is required to route the packet then the packet will be dropped. • RES (Reserved) – Must be zero. TTL (Time To Live) defines the number of 'hops' a datagram can do before it no longer is forwarded. The Protocol field defines the upper/next layer protocol encapsulated in the IP datagram. Typical values in hex are: 1 = ICMP, 6 = TCP etc. Source IP address and Destination IP address can be entered by the format: 255.255.255.255. When Multistream traffic is sent from one port to another make sure that the source address on one port is the same as the destination address on the other port for each of the active streams. This applies if the two ports are in one instrument or in two different instruments. Pressing the [DHCP] softkey located next to the source IP address line will enable the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol function. When it is active the virtual LED will turn from black to red, as shown in Fig. 4.56. Pressing the [Setup] softkey next to the virtual LED will open the DHCP Setup screen shown in Fig. 4.57.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-54

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.57 DHCP setup screen. A tick in the Renew lease when link is re-established box enables the function that automatically renew the lease when the link is reestablished. A tick in the Get gateway setup through DHCP box enables the function that automatically assign the gateway. A tick in the Get DNS servers through DHCP box enables the function that automatically assign the DNS server. Pressing the Primary DNS server and the Secondary DNS server field respectively allows you to define these IPv4 addresses for the specific stream. When allocating IP addresses using DHCP, it is ‘leased’ for a certain period of time defined by the network. The time when the lease expires is indicated as current release expire time. Pressing the [Renew now] softkey will renew the allocation of the IP address. Pressing the [Close] softkey closes the setup. Pressing the [DNS] softkey located next to the Destination IP address field launches the Keyboard pop-up for insertion of a name for the destination. When pressing the [Gateway] softkey a popup will be shown, where Default Gateway and Network mask can be specified. When Gateway is enabled and the gateway/source address mask falls outside the network mask, an ARP lookup for the gateway IP address will be made. The resulting MAC address is used as destination. Gateway is usually used with ARP enabled as well.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-55

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

IPv6

Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6). Traffic Class is similar to IPv4´s TOS field and used for the class and priority, one definition is located in RFC 2474.

Fig. 4.58 The IPv6 field. Flow Label indicates that the datagram belongs to a specific sequence of traffic between a source and destination. The default value is 0. Next Header indicates the upper/next layer of IPv6. The field corresponds to the Protocol field in IPv4. Hop Limit defines the number of 'hops' a datagram can do before it no longer is forwarded. Source IP address and Destination IP address can be entered by the format xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx (32 Hex values). UDP

User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a core protocol of the Internet protocol suite. The UDP provides a minimal and simple interface between a network layer below and a session layer or application above. This protocol does not guarantee reliable and in-order delivery from sender to receiver.

Fig. 4.59 The UDP field. Source port identifies the sending port and should be assumed to be the port to reply to if needed. If not used, then it should be zero Destination port identifies the destination port and is required. Optionally, the Checksum may be forced to zero, by selecting the Null field.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-56

4.8

TCP

Interface > Ethernet

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a core protocol of the Internet protocol suite. It is the intermediate layer between the Internet Protocol below it and the application above it. This protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery from sender to receiver. The CMA 3000 supports sending frames that resemble TCP frames, but the traffic transmitted will not constitute a real TCP stream, as no handshake is performed.

Fig. 4.60 The TCP field. By enabling the Automatic TCP connect it is possible to force the transmitter to establish a TCP connection before the actual traffic frames are send. This makes it possible to pass a firewall/nat router from the inner side. By enabling the Listen Mode the transmitter will await an external TCP connection before the actual traffic frames are send. This makes it possible to pass a firewall/nat router from the outher side (Remark: you must have something establishing the TCP connection from the inner side e.g. CMA 3000). In this mode the peers MAC, IP, and Port is taken from the incomming TCP connection. Source port identifies the sending port. Destination port identifies the receiving port. Sequence number (if the SYN flag is present) this is the initial sequence number and the first data byte is the sequence number plus 1 (if the SYN flag is not present) then the first data byte is the sequence number. The Auto increment may be selected in order for the Sequence number to follow the number of data bytes send (Remark: the first data byte will be number zero in this mode, and not the number entered into the Sequence number field). Ack number if the ACK flag is set then the value of this field is the sequence number that the sender of the acknowledgment expects next.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-57

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Data offset specifies the size of the TCP header in 32-bit words. The Min. is 5 words and the Max. is 15 words thus giving the Min. size of 20 bytes and Max. of 60 bytes. This field gets its name from the fact that it is also the offset from the start of the TCP packet to the data. Reserved for future use and should be set to zero. Flags (Control bits) – contains 8 bit flags. The flags may be programmed individually, however when Automatic TCP connect is enabled, most of the flags are controlled by the TCP state engine. Window the number of bytes that may be received on the receiving side before being halted from sliding any further and receiving any more bytes as a result of a packet at the beginning of the sliding window not having been acknowledged or received. Starts at acknowledgement field. Checksum The 16-bit checksum field is used for error-checking of the header and data. Urgent pointer if the URG flag is set, then this 16-bit field is an offset from the sequence number indicating the last urgent data byte. BERT

Press this softkey to enable the test of the received BERT.

The ‘BERT’ softkey is only available in ‘Stream1’. To enable BER testing on the Ethernet interface the payload must be set to one of the BERT modes available. Payload

At the bottom of the Frame Content page it is possible to set the pattern of the Payload of the transmitted frames. E.g. the Pattern and selecting Multistream Frame Loss.

Follow A/stream 1..8

Feature for Port B setup only. Setting a check in the Follow A box inverts the port A addresses and inserts them in the address fields of port B.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-58

4.8

4.8.5

Interface > Ethernet

Port A/B Setup > Settings Sub-tab From this Settings sub-tab the following setups are available.

Fig. 4.61 Settings screen. Incoming frames

When the Answer incoming ARP requests field is disabled, the function is inactive and the CMA 3000 will ignore incoming ARP requests. When Answer incoming ARP requests field is enabled it will use the Source MAC and IP address on the Address page in sending out replies. When using the Ping application this setting is ignored, and replies will always be sent - also from the passive port. When Answer incoming Ping requests field is enabled the CMA 3000 will reply to ping requests using the Source MAC and IP addresses on the Address page. When using the ping application (see section 4.19.1, Ping Control) this setting is ignored, and replies will always be sent, also from the passive port. When Accept incoming CMA 3000 configuration frames is selected, the instrument can be remotely controlled, through the applicable port to start an RFC2544 End to End test, and transfer the test-results to the remote instrument.

Receiver setup

The Expected preamble length field determines what preamble length the receiver should consider as 'normal' - that is non-erroneous. Range from 3 to 15, default 8.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-59

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

When the High Speed Module is mounted, and used for 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, the "Expected preamble length" specified will have a tolerance of +/-1 for detecting preamble violations. A check mark in the Filter IFG violations caused by master/slave clock synchronization field, will enable this function. The IFG will not be constant in gigabit mode, which leads to a larger number of IFG violated frames than expected. If this option is enabled, those violations will be hidden. The ‘Filter IFG violations caused by master/slave clock synchronization’ field will only be available in the GigaBit mode.

The IFG lower threshold field defines the minimum allowed receiver inter frame gap, range 8 to 15, default 12. The Jumbo frame size upper limit field defines the Jumbo frames that are Ethernet-frames longer than 1518, but not counted as oversized (and hence erroneous). Range 1519 to 10000, default 9018. Miscellaneous

From the Format all results as: drop-down menu it is possible to select the following formats: SI prefix notation, Engineering E notation, Scientific E notation or Unformatted. These formats are used to define the way that the Ethernet option in the CMA 3000 formats the measurement results. Setting a check in Show BER Ratio in percent [%] will force the Bit Error Ratio results to be shown as percent. A check in Only Show BER Alarms When Measuring will prevent alarm LEDs from flashing until the actual measurement is started. Setting a check in the Allow changes to interface setup while measuring field, will accept changes made under a measurement. A check in the Automatically start the traffic generator when a measurement is started will as indicated start the traffic generator synchronously with the measurement.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-60

4.8

4.8.6

Interface > Ethernet

Port A/B setup > Filter Sub-tab From the Filter sub-tab the following setups are available.

Fig. 4.62 Filter screen. Enable filters

To be able to setup or make changes to the Filter tab, put a check in the Enable filters box.

Select filter

Pressing the [Select filter] softkey will launch a new setup screen. From this filter setup screen a number of check boxes are available for enabling filters and masks on different addresses.

Pattern Offset

Insert the offset for the Pattern Filter in this field. This offset will be the same for all 8 filters but will only affect the enabled ones.

Filter and mask field

On the filter tab there are 8 rows each representing one filter that are applied to each received frame. Each filter is composed as a set of values and/or masks selected in the dialog when pressing the ‘Select Filter’ button E.g. MAC destination address, IP addresses etc. If all values (i.e. columns are and´ed) in at least one row/filter matches (i.e. rows are or´ed) the frame will pass.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-61

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.63 Setup of the ‘Filter and mask’ field. If the mask for a specific value is enabled only bits that are one/on is compared to the frame. E.g. MAC Destination value is ‘00-12-34-56-78-9A’ and the mask is set to: ‘00-FF-00-FF-FF-FF’ only frames with MAC addresses with ‘XX-12-XX-56-78-9A’ will pass. With the ‘pattern’ value it is possible to match a user defined 32 bit value to a specific offset defined by ‘Pattern Offset’ selected in the top right of the screen. The pattern offset applies to all 8 filters. In the bottom of the screen it is possible to only allow certain encapsulation types. If none are selected all encapsulation types will pass. For port B it is possible to copy the filter setup from port A by checking the ‘follows Port A’ checkbox. Encapsulation types

Fig. 4.64 Encapsulation types selection.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-62

4.8

4.8.7

Interface > Ethernet

Port A/B setup > Thresholds Sub-tab From the Thresholds sub-tab the following setups are available.

Fig. 4.65 Thresholds screen. Enable thresholds

A tick in the Enable thresholds box enables the thresholds function, and make selections to the Thresholds listed. Tick the thresholds check boxes individually or use the [Select all] softkey to select all, as well as the [Clear all] softkey to deselect all. Click the ‘white’ value field to open a separate keypad screen for keying in the threshold value. Absolute value or Percent setup is possible. The settings selected in this screen will affect the results presented in the Status and Result screens later on.

4.8.8

Port A/B setup > SyncE Sub-tab This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option or the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option and the Synchronous Ethernet option.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-63

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Fig. 4.66 Port Setup SyncE Enable SyncE A check in Enable SyncE enables statistics of the quality level reported in the received ESMC messages and generation of Sync Alarm when such messages are missing. Due to the properties of 10 Mbps Ethernet, the transfer of SyncE timing cannot be guaranteed at this rate.

Mode Setting Mode to Synchronous forces the quality levels specified in QL to be transmitted in an ESMC messages every second. QL Interpretation A protocol/option can be selected. This changes the textual representation of the quality levels in the select box below and on the result- and status pages. QL Used for specifying the quality level to be indicated in the transmitted Ethernet signal.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-64

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

ESMC capture At check in ESMC capture enables recording of ESMC messages. The messages can be exported in a Wireshark compatible format with the use of the FrontSim option. Source MAC Specifies the MAC address to be used in ESMC messages. A check in the check box forces an instrument specific default value.

4.8.9

Port A/S setup > IEEE 1588v2 sub-tab This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option or the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option and the Synchronous Ethernet option.

Fig. 4.67 IEEE 1588v2 setup screen Enable IEEE 1588v2

This enables IEEE 15888v2. Checking this will start the select best master clock algorithm and if Slave only is unchecked start the transmission of announce messages and thereby the possibility of the CMA 3000 to become a grandmaster clock.

Follow Port A

Make IEEE 1588v2 port B setup follow port A. Only available on Port B setup > IEEE 1588v2 screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-65

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Setup

General setup parameters for IEEE 1588v2. Slave only Port can only act as a slave clock. Domain Select between the four standard domains: • Default •

Alternate 1

•

Alternate 2

•

Alternate 3

Depending on other settings different multicast MAC and IP destination address will be used. Review the attributes in the timing section when changing the domain. Otherwise the best master algorithm may fail for all IEEE 1588v2 clocks in the domain. Protocol Select the transport protocol(s) for PTP messages. • UDP/IPv4 •

UDP/IPv6

•

IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet only)

Press the setup push button for the setup popup shown on Fig. 4.68. The parameters shown depends on the selected Protocol.

Fig. 4.68 IEEE 1588v2 - Transport Protocol setup screen Source MAC Type in the source MAC address to be used with all PTP frames. Check Use Default to use the default MAC that comes with the Ethernet port. Source IP

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-66

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Type in either the IPv4 or IPv6 source address, depending on the selected Protocol. DSCP Set the DSCP value to be used for transmitted PTP event frames and a value for all other PTP frames. Acceptable values are between 0x00 and 0x3F. Multicast scope Select one of the predefined IPv6 multicast scope values or choose User defined to manually enter a value. Acceptable values are between 0x0 and 0xF. PTP capture Enable PTP frame capture. Frames are only captured during a measurement and can be extracted from a stored measurement file with FrontSim to a Wireshark supported format. The IEEE 1588 clock on the port is used to timestamp the packets. Ext. log Extends the IEEE 1588 log with received and transmitted frame information, see section 4.8.5. Step mode Select between the two step modes. • One-step •

Two-step

In one-step mode the transmitted timestamp of a frame is inserted into the frame itself while in two-step mode the timestamp is sent in a followup messages. Delay mech. Select which mechanism to use to calculate the mean path delay. • Delay Request/Response • Clock

Peer delay

Clock specific setup. Source Select where the time of the clock should come from. • Internal (Current instrument time) •

GPS*

*) Requires external GPS Sensor, see section 3.10. Priority #1/#2

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-67

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

Set the priority 1/2 values. Acceptable values are between 0 and 255. Class Set the clock class. Acceptable values are between 0 and 255. A clock with class less than 128 can never become a slave. Identity Type the 64 bit clock identity. Check Use Source MAC address and the Source MAC will be used to generate the identity. Time source Select one of the predefined time sources or choose User defined to manually enter a value. Acceptable values are between 0x00 and 0xFF. Accuracy Select one of the predefined accuracies or choose User defined to manually enter a value. Acceptable values are between 0x00 and 0xFF. Announce interval Select the announce interval. This is the interval between transmitted announce messages. Acceptable values are between -1 and 5 (0.5s to 32 s). It is important that all IEEE 1588v2 clocks in the same domain uses the same announce interval and announce timeout values. Otherwise the best master algorithm may fail. Synch interval and min delay request interval should also match the domain. Announce timeout Select number of missed announce intervals before announce timeout. Acceptable values are between 2 and 255. Sync interval Select the sync interval, the interval between transmitted sync messages. Acceptable values are between -1 and 5 (0.5s to 32 s). Min Delay Req. interval Select the minimum delay request interval. This is the interval between transmitted delay request messages. Acceptable values are between -1 and 5 (0.5s to 32 s). UTC Offset Defines the offset between the internal clock or UTC and TAI. This value is used when converting the internal time or a GPS based UTC time to TAI based time, which is used in an IEEE 1588 clock. The correct UTC/ TAI offset value changes when leap seconds are applied to the UTC time. When the internal clock is used as reference, this offset should also include a correction of the time zone and daylight saving time.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-68

4.8

4.8.10

Interface > Ethernet

Timing Tab This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option and the Synchronous Ethernet option.

Fig. 4.69 Timing setup screen Timing

Timing source Select a source to synchronize all Ethernet transmitters to. Timing source has no influence on a port if WAN timing is Incoming Clock or if the port is in 1G electrical Slave mode. Reference source Select a source to use as reference for the bit rate measurements, see section 4.47.6, Status > Ethernet Interface > Timing. Possible sources • Internal •

GPS1

•

2.048 MHz

•

Ethernet Port A 1.Requires external GPS Sensor, see section 3.10

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-69

4.8

Interface > Ethernet

E1 RxA

•

Ethernet Port B

•

E1 RxA

•

T1 RxA

•

IEEE 1588v2 Port A

•

IEEE 1588v2 Port B

Setup for E1 RxA when E1 is selected as either timing or reference source. For more information see section 4.3.2

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-70

4.9

4.9

Interface> T1 Unframed

Interface> T1 Unframed This requires installation of the T1 Unframed option. This document briefly describes how the Unframed T1 option is operated from the Graphic User Interface. For information on remote control operation, please refer to the CMA 3000 Command Based Remote Control Operation Manual. For general information about the operation of CMA 3000, making measurements etc., please refer to the CMA 3000 User Guide. The Interface screen contains setup parameters for two transmitters and two receivers.

4.9.1

Transmitter A and Transmitter B As the setup screens for Transmitter A and Transmitter B are identical, this description will cover both transmitters.

Fig. 4.70 T1 Unframed Transmitter Setup

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-71

4.9

Interface> T1 Unframed

Transmission

Use the Transmission field to enable (On) or disable (Off) the transmitter.

Clock Source

The clock (and thus the output bit rate) can be generated internally, or be derived from either of the receivers. An additional fixed deviation can be included if required. Press the Clock Source field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to determine the Clock Source.Frequency Offset deviation in ppm.

Line Code

Use the Line Code setup to select transmission line code B8ZS or AMI. Note that the line code for each transmitter/receiver pair (A and B) must be identical.

Line Build Out

Use the Line Build Out setup to select transmission pulse shape to compensate for the applied cable length. Possible settings are 0-133 ft, 133266 ft, 266-399 ft, 399-533 ft and 533-655 ft.

Pattern Type

Use the Pattern Type drop-down to select the pattern from the list to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Use the adjacent drop-down menu to select Normal or Inverted pattern type - all patterns (except All 0's, All 1's and "Fox") may be Normal or Inverted.

User Pattern [16 / 2048]

Press the User Pattern menu field and use the pop-up menu to define the user pattern. Depending on the selected pattern type different user pattern setup menus will be available. The length can be any length from 1 bit to 16 bits or from 1 byte to 256 bytes

Alarm

Select an alarm to be generated from the drop-down list. Possible alarms are No Signal, AIS, and No Sync.

Error Insertion

Press the Error Insertion field and select the Error Insertion rate from the drop-down menu: Possibilities are: Off, Manual (triggered by the Error key), and periodic rates from 10-2 to 10-7 (only for Pattern Bit Errors).

Error Destination

Press the Error Destination field and select the destination of the Error Insertion from the drop-down menu. Possible selections are Code (BPV), Pattern (Pattern Bit Errors), or Pattern Slip.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-72

4.9

Interface> T1 Unframed

Error Burst Length

Press the Error Burst Length field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to key in the length on the launched numeric keyboard. Max length is 255 for Pattern errors; 1 for Code and Pattern Slip errors.

4.9.2

Receiver A and Receiver B The Receiver screen contains setup parameters for the receivers (RxA and RxB). Only the receiver A is described, as the channels are identical.

Fig. 4.71 T1 Unframed Receiver Setup Reception

From the Reception field to enabling (On) or disabling (Off) of the reception function is performed.

Setup Follows

Press the Setup Follows field and select if the receiver function should be enabled (None) or follow a transmitter or the other receiver.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-73

4.9

Interface> T1 Unframed

Line Code

Use the Line Code setup to select transmission line code B8ZS or AMI. Note that the line code for each transmitter/receiver pair (A and B) must be identical.

Pattern Type

Use the Pattern Type drop-down to select the pattern from the list to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Use the adjacent drop-down menu to select Normal or Inverted pattern type - all patterns (except All 0's, All 1's and "Fox") may be Normal or Inverted.

User Pattern [16 / 2048]

Press the User Pattern menu field and use the pop-up menu to define the user pattern. Depending on the selected pattern type different user pattern setup menus will be available. The length can be any length from 1 bit to 16 bits or from 1 byte to 256 bytes.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-74

4.10

4.10

Application > Measurement

Application > Measurement Selecting Measurement from the Application folder will launch the General screen (shown in Fig. 4.72) as default.

4.10.1

General The General tab screen contains the basic setup of the measurement. The contents of this screen will depend on installed options and selected interfaces.

Fig. 4.72 The General screen of the Application folder. Type

Use the Type field menu to select the measurement type. Available measurement types will depend on the selected interface. See next page for details. Statistics generates a measurement that summarises counters and status flags on an interval basis. The field to the right is used for defining the interval length i.e. the resolution of the measurement. Log generates a measurement that contains time-stamps and various events e.g. errors, changes in alarm status etc.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-75

4.10

Application > Measurement

Start Key Action

Use the Start Key Action field menu to select Immediate to let the measurement start right away the (START) button on the front of the CMA 3000 is pressed. Alternatively, select Start at to choose a delayed start. This will enable the adjacent menu field shown in Fig. 4.73, used for setting the time of the delayed start.

Fig. 4.73 Delayed start setup menu. To setup, press a field e.g. the month in the date line - and correct it by pressing the [up arrow] or [down arrow]. Stop Function

Press the Stop Function field menu and select from the launched dropdown menu. If Manual Stop is selected, the measurement will stop immediately when the (STOP) button is pressed on the front of the CMA 3000. Selecting Stop at will enable the adjacent field menu, from where you set the stop time. This menu is similar to the start menu shown in Fig. 4.73. When selecting Duration the adjacent field menu will turn into the setup type shown in Fig. 4.74. In this menu, it is possible to key in a duration time. A duration time is the time span in where the measurement will run.

Fig. 4.74 Duration setup menu. • •

Memory Allocation

The first part of the menu, sets the number of days (whole numbers). The second part of the menu, sets the hours : minutes : seconds.

Press the Memory Allocation field and select from the launched dropdown menu where to allocate and how to store the measurement. Selecting Continuous will store the measurement(s) continuously in a row, meaning that when memory is full the oldest data will be overwritten by new ones.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-76

4.10

Application > Measurement

Selecting Use all storage will stop the measurement when all storage in the CMA 3000 is used, meaning that other measurements will be overwritten as the running measurement expands. The selected labels will appear in top of the result displays. Estimated Measurement Duration

This field contains the estimated time in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, before the whole memory will be filled out, in connection with start of a measurement. The estimated value is dependend on the current interface and selections concerning this interface. During an ongoing measurement the estimate will be recalculated periodicly. This means that the estimate will be better and better. The estimate can be seen on the status line during a measurement.

Performance Parameters

From the Performance Parameters field various parameters are present dependent on the measurement type. The G.821 (expired revision) is not recommended for normal use, as it is included for backward compatibility only.

Edit

Pressing the [Edit] softkey opens the Performance parameters setup. From this setup select either G.826 or M.2100.

Evaluation Setup

Press the Evaluation Setup softkey [RxA / RxB] and select type of receiver interface from the Interface drop-down menu.

Fig. 4.75 Evaluation Item menu. HR% = Hypotetical Reference allocation in per cent. BIS = Special limits for Bringing Into Service.

Evaluation Type

Select Count or Ratio

Evaluation Item

The content in this drop-down menu is depending on the selected interface.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-77

4.10

Application > Measurement

Pass and Fail Limits

Press the first field menu of the Pass and Fail Limits and key in the pass limit value on the launched numeric key pad. Acceptable values are between 0 and 10000. To set the fail limit value, press the adjacent field menu to open a numeric key pad for this purpose. Acceptable values are between 0 and 10000.

HR%

Press the HR% field and use the launched numeric key pad to setup the HR% parameters. Acceptable values are between 0.00 and 100.00.

4.10.2

Signaling Selecting the Signaling tab will launch the screen shown in Fig. 4.76.

Fig. 4.76 Part of the Signaling screen. Signaling Reception

Press the Signaling Reception field menu and select from the launched drop-down menu. Choose between the following possibilities: Selecting Off, will take no reception into account. Normal CCS or Inverted CCS will choose the CCS or an inverted CCS signal, respectively. From the adjacent drop-down menu, the settings: 16x16 kbps, 4x64 kbps and 8-64 kbps is available.

CCS Protocol

Select the relevant CCS protocol (option) from the drop-down menu list.

Demo Records

From this drop-down menu Demo Records may be available.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-78

4.10

4.10.3

Application > Measurement

Filters (Log Measurement) Pressing the Filters tab will open a setup screen as shown in Fig. 4.77. The screen content will depend on whether ‘Log’ or ‘Statistics’ are selected in the ‘General’ folder.

Fig. 4.77 Log Filter screen. Alarms

Press the first Alarms field menu to open a drop-down menu from where you select the alarm parameters to be presented in the Log filter(s). Possible selections are: All

All alarms will be logged.

None

No alarms will be logged.

=

The specified alarm will be logged.



The specified alarm will not be logged.

Press the second Alarms field menu to open a drop-down menu from where you select the alarm types. Errors

Press the first Errors field menu to open a drop-down menu from where you select the error parameters to be presented in the Log filter(s). Possible selections are: All

All errors will be logged.

None

No errors will be logged.

=

The specified error will be logged.



The specified error will not be logged.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-79

4.10

Application > Measurement

Press the second Errors field menu to open a drop-down menu from where you select the errors type. C-Bits

Sa-Bits

Press the C-Bits field menu and select from the launched drop-down menu. Possible selections are (Abis only): All

All C-Bits will be logged.

None

No C-Bits will be logged.

< > TAF

The specified will not be logged.

< > SID, TAF

The specified will not be logged.

Press the Sa-Bits field menu and select from the launched drop-down menu. Select All to log all Sa-Bits, or None if no Sa-Bits need to be logged.

Other settings

Protocol specific.

Clear Log Filter

Press the [Clear Log Filter RxA] softkey at the end of the screen to clear all settings made to the filter.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-80

4.10

4.10.4

Application > Measurement

Filters (Statistics Measurement) Select Statistics Filters tab to launch the screen shown in Fig. 4.78. The screen content will depend on whether ‘Log’ or ‘Statistics’ are selected in the ‘General’ folder.

Fig. 4.78 The Statistics Filters setup screen. Please observe that the contents of the Type, Selector and Counts 1..8 depends on the elected CCS protocol. Type

Press Type field menu and select from the launched drop-down menu.

Selector

Press Selector field to set the SAPI value.

Counts 1..8

Press the Counts fields and select from drop-down menu. The presentations here will depend on the protocol.

Fig. 4.79 Example of a ‘Counts’ drop-down menu. Clear Filter

Press the [Clear Filter RxA/DCE] softkey at the end of the screen to clear all settings made to the filter.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-81

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

4.11

Application > Frame Relay This requires installation of the Frame Relay option. Frame relay is a WAN (Wide Area Network) protocol that operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI (Open systems Interconnection) reference model. Frame relay is a packet-switched technology. Packetswitched networks enable end stations to dynamically share the network medium and the available bandwidth. Variable-length packets are used for more efficient and flexible transfers. These packets then are switched between the various network segments until the destination is reached. Frame relay virtual circuits are identified by DLCIs (Data-Link Connection Identifiers). The DLCI values typically are assigned by the Frame relay service provider. Frame relay DLCIs have local significance, which means that the values themselves are not unique in the Frame relay WAN. Two DTE devices connected by a virtual circuit, may use a different DLCI value to refer to the same connection. Local Management Interface (LMI), the LMI is a set of enhancements to the basic Frame relay specification for management applications.

4.11.1

Frame Relay Selecting the Frame Relay tab from the Interface folder will launch the Frame relay setup screen shown in Fig. 4.80.

Fig. 4.80 Frame Relay screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-82

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

Interface

Press the Interface menu field to select between None, PRI (2 Mbps) or V-series interface to be used on the frame relay.

Mode

Select how the receiver(s) and transmitter(s) are used. Monitor

This mode uses two receivers for monitoring line traffic.

Emulate

This mode uses receiver RxA and transmitter TxA for testing a frame relay connection.

To the right of the interface selection it is indicated which of TxA, RxA and RxB that are activated for the selected mode. Frame header size

Use the Frame header size menu field to set the frame header size (in bytes). A size between 2 and 4 is selectable; 2 is normally used. Press Frame header size menu field - to open the setup menu screen.

Max. frame size

Use the Max. frame size field menu to set the maximum size (in bytes) of any frame. A size between 20 and 4093 can be selected. This size does not include the FCS field. Max. frame size is used for identifying “Long Frames”. Press Max. frame size menu field - to open the setup menu screen for this purpose.

LMI type

Press the LMI type field and use the drop-down menu to select how the LMI type is carried out. Selecting Auto will make the CMA 3000 detect the type automatically. Choosing Q.933 Annex-A, T1.617 Annex-D and Original FRF will carry out the LMI type in accordance to the respective recommendations. Press the adjacent LMI type field and use this drop-down menu to choose either UNI Terminal, UNI Network or NNI,

Heart beat interval

(Emulate mode only) Use the Heart beat interval menu field to set the period (in seconds) between LMI frames. Select period between 2 and 40 seconds. Press Heart beat interval menu field - to open the setup menu screen for this purpose.

Full status rate

(Emulate mode only) Use the Heart beat interval menu field to set the full status rate. Set value between 1 and 255. Press Full status rate menu field - to open the setup menu screen for this purpose.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-83

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

Control bits

(Emulate mode only) Press each of the Specific Control bits to set the value of the auxiliary bits in the frame header. Press the control bit you want to change. This will toggle the binary value from 0 (zero) to 1, or vice versa.

Time slots

Press the Time slots field menu and select the time slots on which to use frame relay.

Fig. 4.81 Timeslot. Frame Relay Chan- In typical GPRS implementations the Gb interface is a 2 Mbit/s line carnel Scanning rying several frame relay connections. Each frame relay connection consists of a number of time slots. CMA 3000 provides a search facility which analyses the contents of a monitored 2 Mbit/s line and identifies the frame relay connections on the line. Hereby the user will get the essential information on the configuration of the Gb interface. Scan: During the Frame Relay channel scan the above display shows the current estimate. The longer the scan runs, the more reliable the result will be.When the user stops the scan, the identified Frame Relay channels are presented one by one. The user can the choose the channel to be used for Gb interface protocol analysis (an additional option required).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-84

4.11

4.11.2

Application > Frame Relay

Frame Relay BERT Load Selecting the Frame relay BERT load tab from the Frame relay folder will launch the screen shown in Fig. 4.82. The screen contains additional setup parameters for the Frame relay option.

Fig. 4.82 Frame relay BERT load screen launched. Pattern type

Press the Pattern type field menu and select a pattern type from the dropdown menu. Press the adjacent field menu and select whether the pattern to be Normal or Inverted.

User pattern

Press the User pattern field menu and set the user-defined pattern. When clicking the digit the binary value will toggle from 0 (zero) to 1 or vice versa.

Receive pattern

Press the Receive pattern field menu to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) the receive pattern detection. Setting Receive pattern to Off it is possible to start the Frame Relay emulation with a payload, without starting a BERT measurement at the same time.

Sequence numbering

Press the Sequence numbering field menu and enable the instrument to detect sequence errors in the received frames (On) or disable this function (Off).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-85

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

Receive DLCI

Press the Receive DLCI field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to determine where the pattern is received. It is possible to setup values between 0 and 1023.

Transmit DLCI

Press the Transmit DLCI field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to determine where the pattern is transmitted. It is possible to setup values between 0 and 1023. Receive and Transmit DLCI has to match the DLCI of the frame relay channel to be tested.

Frame size

Press the Frame size field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to set the values for the minimum and maximum frame sizes. It is possible to set minimum and maximum size values from 20 to 4093.

Burst length

Press the Burst length field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to set the length i.e., number of frames per burst. Possible burst length is selectable from 1 to 255 frames.

Utilization

Press the Utilization field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to set the utilization, i.e., percentage of available bandwidth. Possible utilization is selectable from 1 to 100 percent.

Error Insertion

Press the Error Insertion field menu and set the error insertion rate from the launched drop-down menu. Off

No error insertion.

Manual

Manually triggered inserts when pressing the (ERROR) key located on the front panel.

Burst*,

Select between *10E-03, *10E-04, *10E-05, *10E-06, *10E-07

ES

Errored Seconds

SES

Severe Errored Seconds

Error destination

Press the Error destination field menu and select the destination for the error insertion from the launched drop-down menu.

Burst length

Press error Burst length field to open the setup screen - and use this menu to set the number of sequential frames that are errored. Possible burst length is selectable from 1 to 255 frames.

Error insertion can also be activated in the Application/Stimuli pop-up.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-86

4.11

4.11.3

Application > Frame Relay

DLCI Statistics From the DLCI statistics screen found in the section 4.11, Application > Frame Relay folder it is possible to setup the interval measurement. The statistics recording contains up to eight individual DLCI counters. While all are counted on totals, two of these are counted on interval basis that allows histogram presentation and general inspection of interval results. The DLCIs with interval information are marked with a (*). Counters that are not set beforehand are considered as 'free' and will be assigned to values encountered during the measurement.

Fig. 4.83 DLCI statistics setup screen launched.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-87

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

4.11.4

CIR Test The CIR, Committed Information Rate is a part of the agreement between the customer and the Frame Relay network operator. It is expressed through the parameter Bc (Burst committed) - the number of bits the network agrees to transmit over an interval (Tc). If more than the agreed number of the bits are sent the related frames must be marked (by setting the DE bit), so the network will know that the first frames might be discarded in case of congestion. Through the inspection of frames with this set over a period (Tc), the instrument can estimate the CIR. In order to enforce this situation, the instrument can be set to generate traffic at higher and higher rates. If a far-end loop back is established the instrument can estimate the CIR. Select CIR Test from the Application folder to launch the screen shown in Fig. 4.84. The CIR Test screen is divided into to parts - a setup part and a result part.

Fig. 4.84 CIR Test screen.

4.11.5

CIR Test Setup Part This contains the programming of the increased traffic load and the other parameters for the CIR Test.

Receive DLCI

Press the Receive DLCI field and use the launched key pad menu to define the DLCI value, where the pattern is received. Acceptable values between 0 and 1023, when Frame Header size is 2 (see section 4.11.1, Frame Relay).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-88

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

Transmit DLCI

Press the Transmit DLCI field and use the launched key pad menu to define the DLCI value, where the pattern is received. Acceptable values between 0 and 1023, when Frame Header size is 2 (see section 4.11.1, Frame Relay).

Frame size

Press the first part of the Frame size field to set the minimum value in the frame size interval. Press the second part of the Frame size field to set the maximum value in the frame size interval.

Burst length

Press the Burst length field and use the launched key pad menu to set the burst length, i.e. number of frames per burst.

Utilization

Press the Utilization field and use the launched key pad menu to set the utilization, i.e. percentage of available bandwidth.

Increment traffic load

Press the Increment traffic loadto increase the traffic load per each Tc period. Value is indicated in percentage.

Tc period

Press the Tc period field and select the length of the Tc period from the launched drop-down menu.

Free-run

Press the Free-run field to determine whether the CIR test is running continuously or stops after the first run.

Start test

Pressing the [Start test] softkey, will start the CIR test - and present the results of this test in the right side of the screen.

4.11.6

CIR Test Result Part The right side of the screen is dedicated the results of the CIR Test.

Received Frames

This field presents the total number of frames, received during the test.

CIR (bps)

This field presents the estimated CIR.

Approx. Bc

This field presents the estimated Burst, committed.

Approx. Be

This field presents the estimated Burst, excess.

Maximal Throughput (bps)

This field presents the maximal throughput during the test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-89

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

4.11.7

Ping Test Ping Test is a feature, that tests IP over frame relay by sending out test messages (ICMP - Internet Control Messages Protocol) that will be returned to the instrument under normal circumstances. Select Ping test from the Application folder to launch the Ping test setup screen shown in Fig. 4.85.

Fig. 4.85 The Ping Test setup screen.

4.11.8

Ping Test Setup The left part of the screen is dedicated the setup of the Ping Test.

Receive DLCI

Press the Receive DLCI field and use the launched screen to set the DLCI value, i.e. where the ping is to be received. A value between 0 and 1023 can be selected, when Frame Header size is 2 (see section 4.11.1, Frame Relay).

Transmit DLCI

Press the Transmit DLCI field and use the launched screen to set the DLCI value, i.e. where the ping is to be received. A value between 0 and 1023 can be selected, when Frame Header size is 2 (see section 4.11.1, Frame Relay).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-90

4.11

Encapsulation

Application > Frame Relay

Use this drop-down menu to select the IP encapsulation. The following encapsulations can be selected: RFC1490

IETF encapsulation according to RFC1490.

RFC1490/SNAP

IETF encapsulation with SNAP, according to RFC1490.

Cisco proprietary

Cisco proprietary encapsulation.

Source IP address

Press the Source IP address field and use the launched key pad menu to set the source IP address. Acceptable address range between 1.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.

Dest. IP address

Press the Dest. IP address field and use the launched key pad menu to set the destination IP address. Acceptable address range between 1.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.

Start Test

Press the [Start Test] softkey to activate the test.

InARP

Press the [InARP] softkey to initiate the InARP function. The Frame relay test supports InARP (Inverse Address Resolution Protocol). InARP permits a frame relay terminal to identify the IP address associated with the DLCI. Through the LMI information the frame relay terminal can identify new virtual circuits represented by their DLCI values. If the virtual circuit is used for IP, the associated IP address is not immediately available in the virtual circuit. By sending an InARP message (a “who-are-you” request) down the line, the far end IP device will respond with its IP address, and hereby give the necessary information to enable the IP service over the frame relay circuit. The InARP test is enabled in the Ping Test screen. The returned IP address will be shown as the Dest. IP address, as well as respond to the received InARP requests. As IP address it will give the Source IP address.

Stop Test

Press the [Stop Test] softkey to deactivate the test.

4.11.9

Ping Test Result The right side of the screen is dedicated the results of the Ping Test.

Send ICMP echo...

Presents the count of send ICMP echo frames.

Lost ICMP echo...

Presents the count of lost ICMP echo frames.

Bad ICMP echo...

Presents the count of mis-sequenced or duplicated ICMP echo frames.

Min. delay

Presents the minimum round trip delay, since the start of the test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-91

4.11

Application > Frame Relay

Max. delay

Presents the maximum round trip delay, since the start of the test.

Average delay

Presents the average round trip delay, since the start of the test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-92

4.12

4.12

Application > Auto Configure

Application > Auto Configure From the Auto configure screen found in the Application tab, it is possible to setup the search parameters for this auto configuration process.

Fig. 4.86 Auto configuration screen launched. The example above shows an auto configuration screen with expanded interface-structure. If you rather prefer to see a collapsed structure, this is possible by using the toggle-switched softkey described below. Expand/Collapse all

To display an expanded view, press the softkey [Expand all], alternatively press the [Collapse all] softkey to display a collapsed view. An example of a collapsed view is shown in Fig. 4.87.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-93

4.12

Application > Auto Configure

Fig. 4.87 Example showing collapsed interface-structure.

Scan Manual

If you need to do a rescan, e.g. if connectors have been removed, this can easily be done by pressing the [Scan Manual] softkey. During the manual scan a ‘please wait’ screen is shown.

Fig. 4.88 The ‘please wait’ screen launched. Scan Auto

Pressing the [Scan Auto] softkey will perform a complete scan, meaning all connected interfaces will be scanned. Please note that performing a complete scan can be very time consuming.

Select

Pressing the [Select] button will select whatever is highlighted at the moment. This button will change to [Deselect] if a highlighted item is already selected.

Apply RxA/RxB

To save the result of the configuration, press either the [RxA] or [RxB] softkey respectively. If saving the new configuration is omitted, the CMA 3000 will return to the previous saved configuration, when leaving the configuration screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-94

4.13

4.13

Application > Stimuli

Application > Stimuli With the Stimuli function it is possible to stimulate a network element under test by generating special or abnormal conditions. The stimuli signal is send via the transmitter and the received signal can simultaneously be inspected as a related status or result display. An example on how to use the stimuli function is shown in section 4.13.15, Using Stimuli for Basic Transmission Line Test, at the end of this section. The Stimuli screen found in the Application tab, will launch the setup screen shown in Fig. 4.89. The stimuli setup is a ‘float on top’ type screen, i.e. it is a movable window that you can have launched on top of any other screen launched.

Fig. 4.89 Stimuli setup screen. Setups for different signal types are described in the following pages. One common function for all the stimuli modes is the [Clear stimuli] softkey. Clear stimuli

To clear a current stimuli setup, press the [Clear stimuli] softkey.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-95

4.13

Application > Stimuli

4.13.1

2 Mbps TxA and 2 Mbps TxB

Fig. 4.90 2 Mbps TxA or TxB stimuli setup. Alarm

From the Alarm drop-down menu it is possible to select between following alarm types: No Alarm, No Signal, No Frame, AIS, Distant Alarm, No CAS MFAS and Distant MF Alarm.

Error Insertion

From the Error Insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between following error insertion types: Off, Manual, Burst* 10E-02...-07, ES and SES.

Error Destination

From the Error Destination drop-down menu it is possible to insert errors as: FAS, FAS and NFAS, FAS Word, CRC4, CRC4 MFAS, Code, Pattern, CAS MFAS, E-Bit, Pattern Slip, Frame Slip and Transparent.

Error Burst Length

To set the Error Burst Length, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 1 and 255.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-96

4.13

4.13.2

Application > Stimuli

Frame Relay This requires installation of the Frame Relay option.

Fig. 4.91 Frame Relay stimuli setup. Error Insertion

From the Error Insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between following error insertion types: Off, Manual, Burst* 10E-02...-07, ES and SES.

Error Destination

From the Error Destination drop-down menu it is possible to insert errors as: Pattern, Pattern Slip, Pattern sequence error and LMI sequence error.

Error Burst Length

To set the Error Burst Length, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 1 and 255.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-97

4.13

Application > Stimuli

4.13.3

Codirectional This feature requires the V-Series interface option to be installed.

Fig. 4.92 Codirectional stimuli setup. Error Ins.

From the Error Insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between following error insertion types: Off, Manual, Burst* 10E-02...-07, ES and SES.

Error Destination

From the Error Destination drop-down menu it is possible to insert errors as: Pattern and Pattern Slip.

Error Burst Length

To set the Error Burst Length, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 1 and 255.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-98

4.13

4.13.4

Application > Stimuli

ATM This requires installation of the ATM option.

Fig. 4.93 ATM stimuli setup. Alarm

From the Alarm drop-down menu it is possible to select between following alarm types: No Alarm, LCD, VP-AIS, VP-LOC, VP-RDI, VC-AIS, VC-LOC and VC-RDI.

Error Ins.

From the Error Insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between following error insertion types: Off, Manual, Burst* 10E-02...-07, ES and SES.

Error Destination

From the Error Destination drop-down menu it is possible to insert errors as: HEC Single, HEC Multiple, ERR PRBS, *O.191 Cell Late, *O.191 Cell Lost, *O.191 CRC16 Error and *O.191 Cell out of Seq. The *marked settings are only available, if QoS is selected under the Payload tab in the ATM / SDH transmitter setup.

In order to register QoS stimuli in result pages, the QoS must be selected as payload for one of the ATM Receivers

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-99

4.13

Application > Stimuli

Error Burst Length

To set the Error Burst Length, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 1 and 255.

4.13.5

Frequency

Fig. 4.94 Frequency stimuli setup. SDH Tx Freq. offset

To set the SDH Tx Freq. offset, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between -50 and 50.

2 Mbps TxA/B Freq. offset

To set the 2 Mbps TxA and TxB Freq. offset, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between -125 and 125.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-100

4.13

4.13.6

Application > Stimuli

E3/DS3 TxA (TxB) This requires installation of the E3/DS3 option.

Fig. 4.95 E3/DS3 TxA (TxB) stimuli setup. Alarm

From the Alarm drop-down menu it is possible to select between following alarm types: No Alarm, No Signal, AIS, No Frame, Distant and No Sync.

Error Ins.

From the Error Insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between following error insertion types: Off, Manual, Burst* 10E-02...-07.

Error Destination

From the Error Destination drop-down menu it is possible to insert errors as: Frame, Code, Pattern and Pattern Slip.

Error Burst Length

To set the Error Burst Length, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 1 and 255.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-101

4.13

Application > Stimuli

4.13.7

SDH Alarm This requires installation of the Enhanced SDH option.

Fig. 4.96 SDH Alarm stimuli setup. Insertion

From the Insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select either: No Alarm or Permanent Alarm.

Destination

From the Destination drop-down menu it is possible to select between following destinations: LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AULOP, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, HP-UNEQ, HP-RDI or LSS.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-102

4.13

4.13.8

Application > Stimuli

SDH Error This requires installation of the Enhanced SDH option.

Fig. 4.97 SDH Error stimuli setup. Insertion

From the Insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between following error insertion types: No Error, Manual Error or various Burst* 10E-07...E-11.

Destination

From the Destination drop-down menu it is possible to select between following destinations: A1A2, B1, B2, MS-REI, B3, HP-REI, ERR PRBS or ERR TRAINS.

Burst Length

To set the Burst Length, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 1 and 100 frames.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-103

4.13

Application > Stimuli

4.13.9

AU4 Pointer This requires installation of the Enhanced SDH option. Sets the value of the AU4 pointer in SOH.

Fig. 4.98 AU4 Pointer stimuli setup. Test sequence

From the Test sequence drop-down menu it is possible to select between following sequences: No Test Sequence, Single Alternating, Regular + Double, Regular + Missing or Double Alternating.

Movement

To set the Movement, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 1 and 100. It is also possible to select between Positive or Negative. Press the [Apply move] to verify the setting.

Jump

To set the Jump, press the field and setup the value. Acceptable values are between 0 and 782. It is also possible to select between With NDF or Without NDF. Press the [Apply jump] to verify the setting.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-104

4.13

4.13.10

Application > Stimuli

TU3 and TU12 Pointer This feature requires the Enhanced SDH option to be installed.

Fig. 4.99 TU3 (TU12) stimuli setup. Test Sequence

From the Test Sequence drop-down menu following test types are available: No Test Sequence, Single Alternating, Regular + Double, Regular + Missing and Double Alternating.

Movement

From the Movement menu it is possible to setup and apply move. Selections: 1 to 100, Positive or Negative.

Jump

From the Jump menu it is possible to setup and apply jump. Selections: 1 to 765, Incl. NDF or Excl. NDF.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-105

4.13

Application > Stimuli

4.13.11

V-Series This requires installation of the V-Series option.

Fig. 4.100 V-Series Interface stimuli setup. Control circuits

The state of control circuits that are driven by the CMA 3000 (CTS, DSR... shown in the example above) can be changed by pressing the actual field.

Error Ins.

From the Error Ins. drop-down menu following selections are available: Off, Manual, Burst*10E-02, Burst*10E-03, Burst*10E-04, Burst*10E05, Burst*10E-06, Burst*1+E-07, ES (Errored Seconds) and SES (Severe Errored Seconds).

Error Destination

From the Error Destination drop-down menu following destinations are available: Pattern and Pattern Slip.

Error Burst Length

To set the Error burst length, press the field and setup the value.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-106

4.13

4.13.12

Application > Stimuli

Ethernet This requires installation of the Ethernet option.

Fig. 4.101 Ethernet stimuli setup. Alarm

From the Alarm drop-down menu it is possible to select between following sequences: No alarm, No link, Remote fault or Local fault*). *) only if 10 Gbps is selected for the port.

Error

From the Error drop-down menu it is possible to select between errors: No error, IFG, Alignment, FCS, Preamble, PAUSE frames, Wrong IP chksum, fragmented IP, Wrong layer 4 check, PRBS bit error, BERT seq. error or Error symbol.

Error insertion

From the Error insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between: Off, Manual, Burst/sec and Burst/10 sec.

Error burst length

To set the Error burst length, press the field and setup the value.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-107

4.13

Application > Stimuli

4.13.13

Ethernet WAN This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option, 10 GigE LAN option and 10 GigE WAN option.

Fig. 4.102 WAN stimuli setup. Interface

If WAN is active on a port, the Interface drop-down menu is shown in the Ethernet Stimuli popup for that port. From the drop-down menu it is possible to select between Ethernet and WAN, the selection will change the lower part of the popup so Stimuli can setup for the selected Interface.

Alarm

From the Alarm drop-down menu it is possible to select a stimuli alarm or turn off alarm generation.

Error

From the Error drop-down menu it is possible to select a stimuli error errors or turn off error generation.

Error insertion

From the Error insertion drop-down menu it is possible to select between: Off or Manual.

Error Burst length

To set the Error burst length, press the field and setup the value.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-108

4.13

4.13.14

Application > Stimuli

Ethernet Timing This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option and the Synchronous Ethernet option.

Fig. 4.103 Ethernet Timing stimuli setup Interface

If the High Speed Interface and the Synchronous Ethernet option are installed, Timing can be selected from this drop-down menu.

Tx deviation

Set the Ethernet transmitters deviation from the timing source in parts per million. Acceptable values are between -100 and 100. Use the Clear stimuli button to reset the deviation to 0 ppm.

4.13.15

Using Stimuli for Basic Transmission Line Test A basic out-of-service transmission line test with generation of abnormal conditions is useful to verify that the connections are made correctly prior to the real test. In the example below, an offset of 50 ppm is inserted in the transmitter signal, and the influence on the received signal is monitored immediately.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-109

4.13

Application > Stimuli

Fig. 4.104 Monitoring received frequency vs. transmitted frequency.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-110

4.14

4.14

Application > ATM

Application > ATM This requires installation of the SDH and/or PDH and ATM option. CMA 3000 with the SDH interface option can support ATM functionality when the ATM option is installed. The ATM application may be configured as either 1 transmitter - 1 receiver, or as 2 receivers (the mode field in the setup screen dumps shown below). All ATM setup is reached by selecting ATM in the Application menu.

4.14.1

Transmitter The ATM transmitter generates ATM cells according to the following principles: •

Foreground VP/VC defines a VPI/VCI pair to carry a PRBS payload (and optionally contain certain alarms).

•

Background VP/VC defines VPI/VCI pairs carrying a constant payload.

•

Empty cells are generated when necessary to accomplish the defined rates.

Fig. 4.105 The ATM Transmitter screen. Interface

Press the Interface field and select the requested Interface from the dropdown menu. Choose E3 also in the case where the E3 frame is embedded in SDH.

Scrambling

Tick the Scrambling checkbox when ATM payload scrambling is required.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-111

4.14

Application > ATM

Type

Select either UNI or NNI interface.

Foreground VP/VC

Tick the checkbox to enable transmission of foreground cells. GFC, VPI, VCI, PTI, CLP, Payload and Rate are selectable by pressing the corresponding field. Insert values using the launched keypad menu. When QoS is selected in the ‘Payload’ drop-down menu, the transmitter sends ‘QoS cells’ which the receiver uses when analyzing the QS parameters in the network.

Empty Cells Type

Press the Empty Cells Type field and select the requested type from the drop-down menu. The rate is calculated automatically.

Background VP/ VC

Click the [Add] softkey to define a new background VPI/VCI pair to be generated. Click the [Edit] softkey to alter a background VPI/VCI pair to be generated. Click the [Delete] softkey to remove a background VPI/VCI pair to be generated. Click the [Delete All] softkey to remove all background VPI/VCI pair to be generated.

Traffic Profile

From the Traffic Profile sub- tab it is possible to select different forms of Distribution. For each distribution type, corresponding setups will appear for definition of e.g. pulse lengths, rates etc. Below some examples on traffic profiles and their setups are shown.

Fig. 4.106 Examples of traffic profiles.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-112

4.14

4.14.2

Application > ATM

Receiver A/B Receiver(s) detects and counts ATM cells for a number of VPI/VCI pairs: • The foreground VP/VC defines the VPI/VCI pair to be monitored for certain alarms (e.g. VP AIS), cell statistics and optionally a payload PRBS. • The background channels (up to 29) define VPI/VCI pairs to be monitored individually regarding cell statistics.

Fig. 4.107 The ATM Receiver setup screen. Interface

Press the Interface field and select the requested Interface from the dropdown menu. Choose E3 also in the case where the E3 frame is embedded in SDH.

IMA

Tick the IMA checkbox when monitoring IMA traffic (2 Mbps only).

Scrambling

Tick the scrambling checkbox when ATM payload scrambling is required.

Type

Select either UNI or NNI interface.

Foreground VP/VC

Defines the foreground to be monitored. GFC, VPI, VCI and Payload are selectable by pressing the corresponding field. Insert values using the launched keypad menu.

Background VP/ VC

Click the [Add] softkey to define a new background VPI/VCI pair to monitored individually. Click the [Edit] softkey to alter a background VPI/VCI pair to be monitored individually. Click the [Delete] softkey to remove a background VPI/VCI pair to be monitored individually. Click the [Delete All] softkey to remove all background VPI/VCI pair to be monitored individually. Click the [Clone] softkey to clone (make a copy of) the selected background VPI/VCI channel.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-113

4.14

Application > ATM

O.191

Selecting the O.191 sub-tab will launch its setup screen as shown below.

Fig. 4.108 O.191 setup screen launched. From the O.191 Type field, select either In-Service or Out-of-Service. From the Cell Loss Timeout field the timeout can be set. From the Cell Delay Upper Limit field the upper limit of the cell delay can be set. From the Cell Delay Lower Limit field the lower limit of the cell delay can be set. From the O.191 Block Size drop-down menu the block size can be set.

4.14.3

VP/VC Filter Selecting the VP/VC Filter tab opens a filter setup for the receivers.

Fig. 4.109 The VP/VC Filter setup screen launched. VP/VC Filter

When enabling the VP and/or VC filter (done by setting a check in the box) it is possible to define the filter settings via the ‘From’ and ‘To’ setup softkeys.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-114

4.14

4.14.4

Application > ATM

Scan ATM Scan can be started from the Scan tab by clicking the softkey located at the status bar.

Fig. 4.110 The Scan screen. As the scan functionality follows the current receiver setup - the Interface to be scanned must be selected on the ATM receiver setup pages. The scan will detect up to 150 VP/VC pairs, if more are present on the link this bandwidth is shown in the list as “Other VCC’s”. Default the Rate is shown as CPS, kbps and % the user is able to enable/ disable kbps and %. It is possible to sort the list of columns by clicking the column headers. A found VP/VC pair can be selected and applied directly as the corresponding receivers foreground channel.

When another scan is started the old results are cleared.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-115

4.15

Application > APS

4.15

Application > APS The APS test is applicable for SDH, and for 2 Mbps interfaces. On SDH, K1K2 protocol decoding is performed, as well as measurement of average and maximum duration of a specified reference event (default signal). On 2 Mbps, the average and maximum duration of a specified reference event is measured, as is the number of events that have occured.

APS on SDH requires the Enhanced SDH option to be installed. From the APS test screen found in the Application folder, it is possible to setup the parameters that the test is based upon.

Fig. 4.111 The APS test setup screen launched.

APS Configuration (SDH only)

From the configuration setup, it is possible to choose Ring or Linear and between Short path or Long path.

APS Time Reference

From the time reference setup, it is possible to choose between various time types e.g.: LOS, LOF, OOF... V5. You can also change the default reference Max. Limit time from: 0.000 ms to 5000.000 ms.

APS Request (SDH only)

From the request setup, you can choose between various types of requests, e.g.: Forced switch (ring), Signal fail (span)...

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-116

4.15 Application > APS

It is also possible to set a value between 0 and 15 for destination nodes (K1) and source nodes (K2). Apply (SDH only)

Press the [Apply] softkey to apply the selected APS request to the SDH transmitter.

Start APS Test

Press the [Start APS Test] softkey to start the test. This key will change to a [Stop APS Test] softkey when test is running - press this key to stop the test and read results.

APS Protocol Interpretation

In this section of the screen, the results of the test will appear. • For SDH: Number of APS protocol events Average duration of selected reference event Max. duration of selected reference event K1K2 protocol decode window •

For 2 Mbps: Number of occurences of selected reference events Average duration of selected reference event Max. duration of selected reference event

It is not possible to save the test result, so it will only be available as long as the power is on. After turning the instrument off, the test result will be lost.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-117

4.16

Application > Pointer Movement

4.16

Application > Pointer Movement This feature requires the Enhanced SDH option to be installed. The Pointer movement screen found in the Application tab is a test feature that graphically shows the pointer positions of the AU4 and VC3 or VC12 pointer depending of the receiver configuration. The matrix scheme found on the screen will reflect the relative positions in the frame. Pointer movement test result is automatically stored in memory and can be found in ‘Stored Measurements’ under the ‘Misc’. tab.

Start/Stop

To start a Pointer movement test, press the [Start] softkey found in the upper right corner of the screen. Observe that this softkey toggles from being a Start softkey to a Stop softkey and vice versa, depending on which one is active.

Fig. 4.112 Pointer movements screen launched. Plot info

In this field information concerning the plot interaction will appear.

Duration

This field shows the duration of the test.

Pointer source

From the Receiver field, possible receivers RxA and RxB are selectable. In the Pointer field, possible pointers AU4, VC3 or VC12 are selectable.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-118

4.16 Application > Pointer Movement

Zoom

The View mode sets the x-scaling. Possible settings are: Follow last 24H, shows a sliding window with max. width of 24 hours. View all, shows a window with a width as the duration of the test. Custom zoom, this is automatically selected when the plot view is directly manipulated. The Max ptr value sets the y-scaling of the view. The maximum amplitude of the plot always originating from the zero line. Examples on how to use the zoom function are shown next page.

Navigation keys

Keys used for navigating left, up, down and right in the plot view. General the idea of navigating the application is to use direct manipulation of the view to zoom in and use the controls in the button to zoom out. When touching the plot area with a finger or the stylus pen, a rectangle will appear. By drawing a box around the area which need closer investigation and releasing the finger (or stylus pen) pressure, a zoomed view of this selection will be shown. To cancel a zoom action, drag your finger or stylus pen out of the plot area and release the pressure. All controls below the plot are only operational on the displayed graph. A new test will always measure on all active receiver interfaces (the ones which are shown in the top left corner of the screen). When a new measurement is started - all controls are reset to default configuration.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-119

4.16

Application > Pointer Movement

Select a zoom area directly in the plot view by drawing a rectangle with a finger or the stylus pen (delivered with the CMA 3000).

Fig. 4.113 Using a finger or stylus pen to select zoom area. When releasing the finger or stylus pen, the plot view zoom in to the selected area.

Fig. 4.114 Selected area expanded.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-120

4.16 Application > Pointer Movement

To view all of the plot (zooming out) is performed by selecting the View all function from the View mode drop-down menu.

Fig. 4.115 Using view all function to zoom out. After using the View all function, the whole plot will be displayed with the custom y-scaling kept.

Fig. 4.116 Whole plot area displayed (custom y-scaling).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-121

4.17

Application > Tributary Scan

4.17

Application > Tributary Scan This feature requires the Enhanced SDH option to be installed. The Tributary scan screen found in the Application tab, is a test feature that estimates the errors of the VC-containers. Before starting a scan it is important to define which interface to scan, this is done by setting up the transmitter and receiver(s) under the Interface tab. Only one level is scanned at a time and other levels need new selections, followed by a new scan. Lowest scan level is VC-12. The scan will calculate the summarizing of alarm and error information received from each frame and indicate that state of the frame found. This test feature will automatically stop when leaving the screen, i.e. when selecting another screen.

Fig. 4.117 Tributary Scan screen launched. Start Tributary Scan

To start a tributary scan, press the [Start Tributary Scan] softkey found in the upper right corner of the screen. Observe, that this softkey toggles from being a Start Tributary Scan softkey to a Stop Tributary Scan softkey and vice versa, depending on which one is active. The fill color of the of the individual frames indicates if there are any errors.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-122

4.17

Details

Application > Tributary Scan

If pressing the [Details] softkey and then selecting a frame, detailed information will be presented for this specific frame.

Fig. 4.118 Tributary details presented for VC12#2 in this example.

It is not possible to store the Tributary scan results.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-123

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544 This feature requires an Ethernet option to be installed. The RFC2544 is a benchmarking methodology and defines a number of tests to be used for describing the performance characteristics of a network device (or a complete network). The CMA 3000 includes several physical setups (test modes) and four different tests

Throughput Test

The fastest line load a DUT (Device Under Test) can forward frames without frame loss for a specific frame size.

Frame Loss Test

The frame loss rate for different line loads for a specific frame size.

Latency Test

The latency for frames forwarded by the DUT i.e. reveals approx. the processing overhead the DUT has in order to forward frames. The test is done for different line loads for a specific frame size.

Burst Test

This is also called burstabillity or back-to-back test. Determines the largest quantity of frames transmitted with minimum IFG (interframe gap) the DUT can handle without frame loss. If your test parameters are identical for the throughput and the frame loss test, use the combined test ‘Throughput and Frame loss’ to save time and enhance overview at the results pages.

4.18.1

Test setup Clicking the sub-tab Test Setup will launch a setup shown in Fig. 4.119.

Fig. 4.119 RFC2544 Test Setup screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-124

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

Test Mode

In the Select Test Mode field 4 test modes are shown. Select one to define your test configuration. The illustration corresponding to the selected mode will turn from black/white into color.

Test Selection

It is possible to select the following tests: Throughput, Frame Loss, Throughput and Frame Loss, Latency or Burst.

Only the selected tests in ‘Test Selection’ will be available in the ‘Test Configuration’ tab and the ‘Results’ tab. Quick Setup

When pressing the [Quick Setup] softkey the pop-up menu shown below will be launched. In this menu test type (length) and speed can be defined.

Fig. 4.120 Quick Setup launched. Start Test

Clicking the [Start Test] softkey starts the test for the selected mode.

Test Status

During a full RFC2544 test this field will show current status and progress of the test as well as estimating remaining time.

Test descriptions

In the following each of the four test modes will be described briefly. Switch/Router Test

In this test mode one CMA 3000 instrument is able to test e.g. the data link layer of a switch or router. Both ports must be active and linked in this mode with port B is in ‘follow port A’ mode. IP and MAC-addresses must be swapped, ensuring that the switch will forward frames from port A to port B and vice versa.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-125

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

Router Latency Test

In this test mode, the latency-test sends out ping frames, used for measuring the response time for router equipment. The setup for the latencytest is unchanged except the fact that the line load is measured in kilo bits/sec. (Kbps), and not mega bits/sec. (Mbps). The maximum line load for the Router Latency Test is 1 Mbps. CMA 3000 is capable of responding to incoming ping frames, and can thus be used to run the Router Latency Test port to port, if required. When the CMA 3000 is used to reply to incoming ping frames the settings of the ‘Encapsulation type’ and ‘VLAN/no VLAN’ found in section 4.8.2, Port A/B setup > Traffic Sub-tab will decide which ping requests to answer. So do VLAN ID and Address setups. The Router Latency Test works with both IPv4/ICMPv4 and IPv6/ ICMPv6.

End to End Test Network Test

In this test mode, two CMA 3000 units will work together performing a RFC2544 test. The unit initiating the test is the Master and the other unit is Slave. Control information is sent from the Master on port A (alternative, port B will be used, if port A is turned off). When the test is started on the Master, the unit will try to contact the Slave on the control port using the Destination IP and MAC address (or use ARP if selected). If the slave receives the communication on a port with a matching Source address, the test will begin. Apart from the Address setup, both the Master and the Slave should have the Accept incoming CMA 3000 configuration frames option enabled. See section 4.8.5, Port A/B Setup > Settings Sub-tab. The only needed setups on the Slave side is the source addresses and the enabling of Accept incoming CMA 3000 configuration frames. The complete RFC2544 setup is transferred from the Master when the test is started (except for the address setup which is optional; see section 4.18.3, General.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-126

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

When the test is started on the Master, a popup will appear on the Slave, telling that the unit is being remotely controlled - providing a 'break connection' button. The popup will disappear when the test is completed or stopped on the Master. When the test is completed, the test results are transferred from the Slave to the Master where they appear alongside the RFC2544 results sub-tab under the name RFC2544 remote results.

The ‘local’ results and remote results are related in the way that Tx statistics for the local ports match up with the Rx statistics for the remote ports and vice versa. The End to End Test can be run in several modes: By default, both ports are used for transmitting and receiving on both the Master and the Slave. Depending on the address setup the test will run either Master port A > Slave port A, and Master port B > Slave port B or vice versa. If One Way is selected the test will transmit frames from either the Slave or the Master, see section 4.18.3, General.

Single Ended Network Test

This test is used when testing network by reflecting traffic back to the CMA 3000 instrument. This requires a device to reflect the traffic back e.g. a second CMA 3000. If both ports are active, the test will require both ports to be linked and do a dual Single Ended Network Test. Turn off one of the ports to only test on one of the ports.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-127

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

4.18.2

Port A/B In general the same facilities are available as for the port setup, described in section 4.8.4, Port A/B Setup > Frame Content. Please refer to this section.

Fig. 4.121 RFC2544 config Port setup tab.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-128

4.18

4.18.3

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

General Clicking the General sub-tab will launch a screen as shown below.

Fig. 4.122 General setup screen. Pretest options

When the Transmit Learning Frames box is enabled the RFC2544 test will send out a number of 'learning frames' before the first test-step starts on each port. This happens to train network-equipment, so that initial latency results will not be invalid.

End to End test (master side)

When the Use master Source addresses for Destination on slave side is enabled the CMA 3000 does not use the IP or MAC addresses for differentiating frames during the RFC2544 test. An exception is End to End test control, but routing equipment in the network may need the addresses to be set up correctly. To limit the amount of needed setups on the Slave side, this setting can be enabled to transfer the source address setup from the Master using it as destination on the Slave. However, the source addresses must still be correctly setup on the slave in order to make the End to End test work. In One-Way test, transmit frames from defines the direction of the frames when transmitted during an End to End test with the One-Way setting enabled. Available directions are: Master or Slave. Store test results on slave side will store the test results on the slave instrument when enabled. Results are available from the Stored Measurements section on the slave.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-129

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

Miscellaneous

Include MAC addresses...the receiver uses a filter to determine which frames should be counted in the results. When this function is enabled, the receiver will use the MAC addresses of each incoming frame in addition to the ‘filter key’ used by default. Measure jitter... When selected the Latency Test will measure jitter instead of latency. Accumulate repeated steps... repeated steps are accumulated into one result line.

Throughput calculation layer selection

This table contains the throughput calculation for various parts of the received frames. Calculation depends on the setting of the transmitted frame contents as selected in: Application > RFC2544 > Port X Even in cases where the transmitter is not used, the calculation will be based on this setting.

Throughput may be calculated on 6 different layers. See Fig. 5.1 Each calculation is done on a one second base. It is possible either to register the maximal throughput (actually showing only the second with the highest throughput), or to register an average throughput per second taken over a selected part of the test periode. See Fig. 4.123). Throughput average calculation explained

The part of the test from which the average throughput is calculated, is selected in a way to avoid influence from latency and missing frames. The drawing below shows this. The Tx graph shows the transmitted periodes, and the Rx graph shows the received periodes. Due to latency the receiver will first see the transmitted frames some time later than then transmitter actually sended the frames (the L-periodes). This is also why the receiver may have more periodes than the transmitter, in order to await delayed frames. However the receiver will maximal wait for 10 extra periodes (seconds) before it times out, as frames may actually physically be lost somewhere in the network. The average calculation is triggered when the receiver actually sees the first frame. The frames in this first I-periode are ignored. Then the average calculation is started and runs over the next duration-2 A-periodes. Frames in the last I-periode are also ignored. Frames in the remaining Speriodes have no influence on the average calculation.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-130

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

Fig. 4.123 Average throughput.

4.18.4

Test Configuration > Throughput Clicking the sub-tab found under the Test Configuration tab will launch a screen containing various layout depending on the test mode selected in the Test Setup folder. An example with Throughput test is shown below.

Fig. 4.124 Throughput setup screen. The changes affect both ‘Port A’ and ‘Port B’ when the ‘Switch/Router Test’ is selected.

Frame Size

Frame size can be varied in 3 ways. Observe that the screen layout changes depending on the type of Frame Size selected. User defined: here check boxes for the following predefined sizes are available: 64, 128, 256, 512, 768, 1024, 1280, 1518 and Jumbo. The Jumbo can be set from 1519 to 10000 as valid values.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-131

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

Stepped: setup of Start frame size, End frame size and Step frame size. The frame size starts at Start frame size and increases in intervals of step frame size until the frame size is above End frame size.

The start frame size can be specified to be higher that end frame size.

This mode is convenient for testing different frame sizes consistently and equally distributed. As a consequence it produces more smooth and detailed graphs when the step frame size is arbitrarily low. The test extends in time for smaller step frame sizes.

Frame size is protocol headers and payload combined. Frame size does not include preamble and interframe gap

Constant: setup a constant Frame size. Line Load

The different test line loads used in the test are specified as a Minimum and Maximum - varied in intervals of the value specified in the Step field. The test always starts at Maximum line load and decreases until the line load is less than Minimum. The results can be presented in either Mbps or as Percent. Minimum valid range: 1.00 to 100.00 or 1000.00*) or 10000.00**) Mbps / 0.01 to 100.00 %. Maximum valid range: 1.00 to 100.00 or 1000.00*) or 10000.00**) Mbps / 1.00 to 100.00 %. Step valid range: 0.1 to 100.00 or 1000.00*) or 10000.00**) Mbps / 0.01 to 100.00 %.

*) Setting is only available when the Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface or the High Speed Interface option is installed. **) Setting is only available when the High Speed Interface option is installed.

If the Stop on no frame loss at maximum throughput checkbox is checked, the test will continue to test the next frame size if the current test step at a specific line load and frame size do not have any frames lost, i.e. the test ignores the rest of the line load steps.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-132

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

If Auto Search checkbox is checked, the test will automatically find the maximum line load that gives zero frame loss, using the specified Resolution. Auto Search can run in two modes: Binary that will perform a binary search of the specified line load interval from Max to Min. Smart that assumes that there is a higher probability of frame loss occurring closer to Max, and therefore makes a skewed binary search searching the higher line loads first. Specify in the Resolution drop-down box the precision of the auto search. A higher precision extends the duration of the test. Available precision is: 1, 0.1 and 0.01 Mbps. Duration

In the Duration field, the Step time can be set in number of seconds (minimum 3 seconds). This is the approximately duration in time of each step of the test. Repeats, set the number of times the complete test will repeat. Valid range: 0 to 1000.

4.18.5

Test Configuration > Frame Loss Clicking the sub-tab found under the Test Configuration tab will launch a screen containing various layout depending on the test mode selected in the Test Setup tab. The settings for Frame loss are exactly identical as the ones described for Throughput. See section 4.18.4, Test Configuration > Throughput for details.

4.18.6

Test Configuration > Throughput and Frame loss Clicking the sub-tab found under the Test Configuration tab will launch a screen containing various layout depending on the test mode selected in the Test Setup folder. The settings for Latency are exactly identical as the ones described for Throughput. See section 4.18.4, Test Configuration > Throughput for details.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-133

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-134

4.18

4.18.7

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

Test Configuration > Latency Clicking the sub-tab found under the Test Configuration tab will launch a screen containing various layout depending on the test mode selected in the Test Setup folder. An example with Latency test is shown in Fig. 4.125.

Fig. 4.125 Latency setup screen. The settings for Latency are quite identical as the ones described for Throughput. See section 4.18.4, Test Configuration > Throughput for details.

If Repeats is set to 0 (zero) - the test will run a single time, and if set to 1 the test will run two times (repeated once). Only run steps where other test passed, If this checkbox is checked a drop-down menu will appear from where it is possible to select between: Throughput, Frame Loss or Throughput and Frame Loss.

When ‘Only run steps where other test passed’ is checked all settings are forced identical for the frame loss and latency test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-135

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

4.18.8

Test Configuration > Burst Clicking the sub-tab found under the Test Configuration tab will launch a screen containing various layout depending on the test mode selected in the Test Setup folder. An example with Burst test is shown below.

Fig. 4.126 Burst setup screen. The settings for Burst are quite identical as the ones described for Throughput. See section 4.18.4, Test Configuration > Throughput for details. Exceptions from the sections referred to above: Frames per burst

The number of frames per burst can either be varied when stepped is selected or held constant, when constant is selected. When stepped is selected it works like stepped for frame sizes, i.e. the test starts with start burst size and in intervals of step burst size increases or decreases to end burst sizes. Repeats, set the number of times the complete latency test will repeat. Valid range: 0 to 1000.

If Repeats is set to 0 (zero) - the test will run a single time, and if set to 1 the test will run two times (repeated once).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-136

4.18

4.18.9

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

General Comments to Sub-tabs under Results Folder Result screens of the performed RFC2544 tests are presented under the Results tab.

Status bar icons

For all screens found in the sub-tabs under the RFC2544 result tab the following icons are available. Pressing the Graph icon at the bottom of the screen will switch to a graphical mode containing a graphical presentation of the results from the tabular form. Press the Table icon at the bottom of the screen to return to the tabular form of presentation. To print all pages beneath the Result folder, press printer icon shown.

To print only the current page shown, press the printer icon shown.

It is only possible to print after the whole RFC2544 test has completed.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-137

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

4.18.10

General Comments About the RFC2544 Graphs The graphical presentation mode of the RFC2544 results gives overview of the results and the progress of the test.

This softkey zooms out to full view Press and drag to zoom Main parameter of interest Fig. 4.127 Results presentation in graphs. It is possible to zoom in on the graphs by pressing and holding at a arbitrary position on the graph and dragging a rectangular selection to define the zoomed area to be shown as depicted in Fig. 4.127. Press the [Zoom out] softkey to zoom out to full view again. To the right of the screen the main parameters of interest are shown if more than one value is tested, that is more than one graph, e.g. if more than one frame size is tested in the frame loss or throughput test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-138

4.18

4.18.11

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

Results > Throughput Results from the Throughput test are available from their own sub-tab. An example is shown in Fig. 4.128.

Fig. 4.128 RFC2544 results throughput screen. The most important columns of the tables are the varied main parameters Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameter Frames lost. The order of the tables will vary depending on the test mode and the relation of the ports. E.g. in the ‘Switch/Router Test’, Port A transmits to Port B and vice versa. The order of the tables are then: Port A Tx, Port B Rx, Port B Tx and Port A Rx.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-139

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

4.18.12

RFC2544 Results > Frame Loss Results from the Frame Loss test are available from their own sub-tab. An example is shown in Fig. 4.129.

Fig. 4.129 RFC2544 results frame loss screen. The most important columns of the tables are the varied main parameters Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameter Loss rate. The order of the tables will vary depending on the test mode and the relation of the ports. E.g. in the ‘Switch/Router Test’, Port A transmits to Port B and vice versa. The order of the tables are then: Port A Tx, Port B Rx, Port B Tx and Port A Rx.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-140

4.18

4.18.13

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

RFC2544 results > Throughput and Frame Loss Results from the Throughput and Frame Loss test are available from their own sub-tab. An example is shown in Fig. 4.130.

Fig. 4.130 RFC2544 results throughput and frame loss screen. The most important columns of the tables are the varied main parameters Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameters Frames lost and Loss rate. The order of the tables will vary depending on the test mode and the relation of the ports. E.g. in the ‘Switch/Router Test’, Port A transmits to Port B and vice versa. The order of the tables are then: Port A Tx, Port B Rx, Port B Tx and Port A Rx.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-141

4.18

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

4.18.14

RFC2544 Results > Latency Results from the Latency test are available from their own sub-tab. An example is shown in Fig. 4.131.

Fig. 4.131 RFC2544 results latency screen. The most important columns of the tables are the varied main parameters Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameters Min, Avg and Max latency stated in micro seconds. The order of the tables will vary depending on the test mode and the relation of the ports. E.g. in the ‘Switch/Router Test’, Port A transmits to Port B and vice versa. The order of the tables are then: Port A Tx, Port B Rx, Port B Tx and Port A Rx.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-142

4.18

4.18.15

Application > Ethernet RFC2544

RFC2544 Results > Burst Results from the Burst test are available from their own sub-tab. An example is shown in Fig. 4.132.

Fig. 4.132 RFC2544 results burst screen. The most important columns of the tables are the varied main parameters Frame size and Burst size (number of frames transmitted at 100% line load) and the performance parameters Frames lost. The order of the tables will vary depending on the test mode and the relation of the ports. E.g. in the ‘Switch/Router Test’, Port A transmits to Port B and vice versa. The order of the tables are then: Port A Tx, Port B Rx, Port B Tx and Port A Rx.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-143

4.19

Application > Ethernet Ping

4.19

Application > Ethernet Ping This requires installation of the Ethernet 10/100 Interface option, or the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option. The Ping test is a quick and easy way for testing, troubleshooting and verification of connectivity and latency.

4.19.1

Ping Control On the Ping control screen the conditions for the ping control are listed.

Start port A/B

Press the [Start port A] softkey to activate the Ping test. The softkey shifts to a [Stop port A] softkey after activation and while test is running.

Fig. 4.133 Ping control screen.

4.19.2

Port A/B Please see section 4.8.4, Port A/B Setup > Frame Content for general description of this setup.

Follow Port A

Feature included in Port B screen only. Setting a check in this box will transceive the destination addresses to the source address fields and vice versa.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-144

4.19 Application > Ethernet Ping

When the CMA 3000 is used to reply to incoming ping frames the settings of the ‘Encapsulation type’ and ‘VLAN/no VLAN’ found in section 4.8.2, Port A/B setup > Traffic Sub-tab will decide which ping requests to answer. So do VLAN ID and Address setups.

4.19.3

Frame Config From the Frame config sub-tab conditions for Port A and Port B are set. Setting a check in Follows Port A box copies Port A setups into Port B.

Fig. 4.134 Frame config screen. Test duration

Test duration can be defined as 3 different units. Continuous is used when a persistent Ping test is needed. Seconds is used to define the test duration in seconds. Frames is used to define length in number of ping requests.

Interval

Definition of the Interval in seconds. When interval is set to zero (0), frames are transmitted in back-to-back mode.

Frame size

Definition of the Frame size in bytes. Frame size is protocol headers and payload combined. Frame size does not include preamble and interframe gap.

TTL

Definition of the Time To Live (TTL).

Time out

Definition of the time before time out in ms (milliseconds).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-145

4.19

Application > Ethernet Ping

If Time out value is set higher than the Interval value, the interval will be overruled.

4.19.4

Results From the Results sub-tab Ping test results are displayed.

Fig. 4.135 Results screen of ping test. The results from Port A and Port B is shown in separate output windows. Included in the result is a Summary field at the bottom of the screen. From the Round Trip Time in ms field it is possible to the Minimum, Maximum and Average time in milliseconds for the Round Trip Time.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-146

4.19 Application > Ethernet Ping

4.19.5

Graphical Presentation From the Graphical presentation sub-tab the Round Trip Time and percentage of timeouts are presented. Timeouts on the graph will be set as the specified timeout under frame configuration with a red mark.

Fig. 4.136 Graphical presentation of the ping test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-147

4.20

Application > BERT

4.20

Application > BERT This feature requires the Ethernet option to be installed.

4.20.1

BERT Control Selecting the BERT control tab will launch a screen as shown in Fig. 4.137.

Fig. 4.137 BERT control setup screen Start BER Test

To start the BER Test press the [Start BER Test] softkey.

Measurement Interval Duration

The duration of the BERT intervals can be selected from the ‘Measurement Interval Duration’ drop-down menu. Select between: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec., 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 min., 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours or No Intervals.

Delayed Start

To start the measurement immediately then the [Start BER Test] button is pressed, select ‘Immediate’ in the Delayed Start field menu. Alternatively, select ‘Start At’ to choose a delayed start. This will enable the adjacent menu field, used for setting the time of the delayed start.

Measurement Duration

Press the Measurement Duration field menu and select from the launched drop-down menu.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-148

4.20

Application > BERT

If Manual Stop is selected, the measurement will stop immediately when the (STOP) button is pressed. Selecting Stop At will enable the adjacent field menu, from which you can set the stop time. When selecting Duration, the adjacent field menu will turn into the setup. In this menu, it is possible to key in a duration time. A duration time is the time span in where the measurement will run. Memory Allocation

Press the Memory Allocation field and select from the launched dropdown menu where to allocate and how to store the measurement. Selecting Continuous will store the measurement(s) continuously in a row, meaning that when memory is full the oldest data will be overwritten by new ones. Selecting Use all storage will stop the measurement when all storage in the CMA 3000 is used, meaning that other measurements will be overwritten as the running measurement expands.

Include Addresses in Frame Filter on Receiver

The receiver uses a filter to determine which frames should be counted in the results. When this function is enabled, by default, the receiver will use the MAC addresses of each incoming frame in addition to the ‘filter key’ used.

Count lost Frames as Pattern Errors

When selected, if a frame is lost all the test pattern bits in the frame are considered errored and included in the pattern error counter.

Follow A

Feature for port B only. Setting a check in the Follow A box will copy all the selected settings from port A and insert it in the setup of port B.

Port A/B

From the Payload drop-down menu it is possible to select payloads. The possible settings will depend upon the type of frame previously selected. A tick in the Use Traffic Generator box enables the generator signal to be used for the test. When disabled it is possible to run from A to B or from B to A, alternatively from one CMA 3000 to another CMA 3000. Enabling the BERT (Bit Error Rate Test) is done by setting a tick in the relevant box. When the BERT is enabled it is possible to remove the tick from the Framed box which will reveal a new box below named Enable Sequence Checking. Leaving this box without a tick disables the Sequence Checking function. In Framed mode the Sequence Checking is obligatory.

Service Disruption Measurement

In connection with the BERT application, it is possible to measure the duration of any service disruption. If a number of frames bigger than or equal to the given Min Disruption is lost, it is considered to be a single service disruption. The duration of this interruption is measured. The instrument keeps track of the number of disruption, the average duration, and the maximal duration of a disruption. If the maximal duration time exceeds the Max Limit the corresponding field will be marked red on the result pages.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-149

4.20

Application > BERT

4.20.2

Traffic Port A/B Selecting the Traffic Port A or B tab will launch a screen as shown in Fig. 4.138.

Fig. 4.138 (BERT) Traffic Port setup screen. See section 4.8.2, Port A/B setup > Traffic Sub-tab for detailed description concerning setup of the Traffic Port A and Traffic Port B tabs.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-150

4.20

4.20.3

Application > BERT

Frame Content Port A/B Selecting the Frame Content Port A/B setup folder will launch a screen as shown in Fig. 4.139.

Fig. 4.139 (BERT) Frame Content Port setup screen. See section 4.8.4, Port A/B Setup > Frame Content for detailed description concerning the Frame Content tab and its sub-tabs.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-151

4.21

Application > Channel Statistics

4.21

Application > Channel Statistics This feature requires the Channel Statistics option and an Ethernet option to be installed. When selecting the Channel Statistics from the Application drop-down menu, either the sub-tab folder Port A or Port B will be displayed automatically. In general the Channel Statistics Test separates incoming frames into channels based on a number of defining characteristics (Definitions) and shows information about each channel (Statistics). The Channel Statistics Test is mostly used for in-service monitoring, where it provides for detailed analysis of the traffic types present in the network.

4.21.1

Port A/B By default the Port A/B is separated into two lists, with definitions on the left and statistics on the right.

Fig. 4.140 Port A/B Channel Statistics screen launched. When the test is running the Start Test softkey converts to a Stop Test softkey and vice versa when the test is stopped.

Start Test

Press the [Start Test] softkey to start the test.

Stop Test

Press the [Stop Test] softkey to stop the test. When the test is stopped the results will be saved.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-152

4.21

Reset Results

Application > Channel Statistics

To reset the test without saving, press the [Reset Results] softkey (only visible when the test is running). Each channel will be shown in the list views as a row. The maximum number of channels is 232, but it is possible to configure which Definitions (frame characteristics) are considered when performing the channel separation. Enabling only the desired Definitions will minimize the number of channels.

Setup

By pressing the [Setup] softkey it is possible to select the Definitions (Active Definitions) and the columns (Shown Definitions/Statistics) to be displayed in the two views.

Fig. 4.141 Channel Statistics Port setup To change status of the Definitions from Active to inactive, it is necessary to reset the results. The ‘Active’ settings have no effects when displaying a stopped test or a test loaded from memory. If the intention is to combine channels to get a better overview of a certain aspect of the received traffic, it is also possible to use the Merge functionality (described below) which unlike the Active Definitions setup also has effect on stopped tests, and does not require a reset of the results. The View Layout softkey changes the layout of the test view, so that definitions are above, and statistics below - this makes it possible to view more information about each channel.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-153

4.21

Application > Channel Statistics

Prefix softkey

The Prefix softkey indicates that currently results are displayed using SI prefix notation. Pressing the softkey will launch a popup where a number of alternative number formats are available. This only affects the way results are displayed.

Merge softkey

Use the [Merge] softkey to combine all channels where one specific definition value (e.g. the source MAC address) is identical. Pressing this softkey will open a drop-down menu containing a list of all Active Definitions. When the test results are shown in merged mode, definitions that are not uniquely defined will be hidden, so that only the merge criterion, channel number, and protocol information will be visible. The protocol information field, which shows which protocols are detected in a channel, will in merged mode show all protocols present in the frames contained in the merged channel. Unlike the Active Definitions setup described above, the Merge setting works on the already collected channels - that is, it does not affect how the system separates channels, and it will work on both running, stopped and loaded tests. To sort the results, click on a column header in either the definition list or the statistics list. To invert the sort order, press the same column header again. To always have the latest formed channel visible, sort the channel number with largest numbers first. The Channel Statistics Test can be active while the CMA 3000 Ethernet interface is in either Monitor/Generate or Pass through mode.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-154

4.22 Application > Ethernet Traceroute

4.22

Application > Ethernet Traceroute This feature requires an Ethernet option to be installed. Traceroute is a test that is used to determine the route taken by packets in an IP network. ICMP Ping packets are sent to the desired destination, but with too low TTL (Time to Live) value. The TTL value is gradually increased from 1 with each packet, until a ping reply is received from the destination. As each host that the packet passes through in the network will decrement the TTL, ICMP type 11 packets will be sent, and the ping packets discarded when the TTL of a given packet reaches 0. The received ICMP type 11 packets are used to build a list of the hosts that the packets must pass through to reach the intended destination. The test will send regular ping packets to each host that is detected in this way, and display the resulting RTT (Round Trip Times).

4.22.1

Traceroute Setup Selecting the Traceroute Setup tab under the Traceroute folder will launch the screen shown in Fig. 4.142.

Fig. 4.142 Traceroute Setup screen launched. Port Selection

Select Port A or Port B.

Traceroute Addresses

This field lists the Destination IP Address and the Source IP Address.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-155

4.22

Application > Ethernet Traceroute

Traceroute Setup

The Number of attempts field specifies the maximum number of times that Ping packets with each TTL value is transmitted. If no ICMP type 11 or ping reply is received after this number attempts, the test will move on to a higher TTL value. The maximum number of hops to be sent is defined in the Maximum number of hops field. The test will gradually increment the TTL value until a regular ping reply is received. If no ping reply is received before this number of hops, the test will stop. The Timeout field specifies the timeout for ping packets sent by the test. The number of times each host is pinged is defined in the Ping each host field. For each hop that responds with ICMP type 11 packets, and for the desired destination, send this number of ping packets to determine the RTT.

4.22.2

Port A/B See description under section 4.8.4, Port A/B Setup > Frame Content.

4.22.3

Results Each row shown in the results screen represents a hop in the chain of host servers of the traceroute.

Fig. 4.143 Traceroute results screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-156

4.23

4.23

Application > Cable Test

Application > Cable Test This feature requires an Ethernet option to be installed. The Ethernet Cable Test is available From the Application folder. Ethernet Cable Test uses Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) to validate and detect open and short-circuited CAT5/CAT5E cables. This test is convenient for installation and troubleshooting of cables.

4.23.1

Time Domain Reflectometry Principle The TDR method can be used for control of electrical cables. The TDR transmits a short pulse which will be fully absorbed, if the cable is perfectly terminated. In case of open or short circuited cables, the pulse will be reflected. • •

An open circuited cable will result in an increase of impedance A short circuited cable will result in a decrease of impedance

These conditions will give a pulse reflection in either a positive or negative mirrored pulse. If the time is measured and the speed of the signal in the cable is known, a distance to the problem can be estimated. The magnitude of the reflection is called reflective coefficient and can be found from the formula in the margin. Z0 is the resistance in the media, and Zt is the impedance to the load. P0 indicates no reflection. +1 indicates an open circuit, and -1 indicates a short circuit.

4.23.2

Wiring of Ethernet Cables A CAT5/CAT5E cable consists of 4 twisted pairs which typically are terminated in a RJ45 connector.

CAT5

Defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A. The color code referring to this standard is called T568A.

CAT5E

Defined in TIA/EIA-568-B. The color code referring to this standard is called T568B.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-157

4.23

Application > Cable Test

4.23.3

Ethernet Cable Test Screen

Fig. 4.144 The Ethernet Cable Test screen. Pair

The Pair field lists the individual cable pairs in relation to the pin number and color coding.

Status

Status field shows the status of the wires inside the cable. OK indicates a fully functioning cable, SHORT indicates a short circuited cable and OPEN indicates a open circuited cable. The LED indicator will be green if no problem and red if there is a problem.

Length

In case of cable troubles, i.e. an open or a short circuit, the distance to the problem will be indicated approximately in the Length field.

Amp

From the Amp field the magnitude of the received pulse/reflection is displayed.

Select port

From the Select port drop-down menu it is possible to select the port to be tested.

Color Coding Standard

From the Color Coding Standard drop-menu it is possible to select between T-568A (CAT5) or T-568B (CAT5e) as color coding.

Start port A/B

Pressing the [Start port A] or [Start port B] softkey will start the Cable Test.

Test control

This bar indicates the progress of the test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-158

4.23

4.23.4

Application > Cable Test

10/100 Switch/Hub 10 and 100 Mbps equipment uses 2 pairs only. This can be shown as an open circuit or a short circuit. When this happens, a Note message will appear on the screen.

Fig. 4.145 Test of a 10/100 Mbps switch.

On the Ethernet 10/100 Mbps option port A pair 1 (which is not used for the Ethernet data) is reserved for internal applications and is not tested. The precision of the length indications is +/- 1 meter (+/-3 meter for High speed interface option).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-159

4.24

Application > VoIP

4.24

Application > VoIP This feature requires an Ethernet option to be installed. VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) is routing of voice conversation over IP network. VoIP services convert your voice into a digital signal that travels over the Internet. If you are calling a regular phone number, the signal is converted to a regular telephone signal before it reaches the destination. The optional CMA 3000 VoIP application allows simultaneous handling of up to 8 incoming or outgoing calls. It is able to answer calls as well as create calls. Values measured during a call can help a provider to determinate problems in the network and fix them, and by this make it more reliable for customers.

4.24.1

Port A/B The Port A and the Port B setup screen are almost identically with one exception, that the Port B contains the Follow A tick box.

Fig. 4.146 The Port B setup screen launched. The Port A and Port B screen contains setup of the Ethernet frame content transmitted by the CMA 3000. The exact layout is depending on the selected encapsulation and protocol headers. Press the buttons in the uppermost row to change the composition of the transmitted frames. This

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-160

4.24

Application > VoIP

will affect the available setups in the frame and the view below will expand or contract to reflect the layout of the frame composition selected. Ethernet

The Ethernet (MAC) header contains MAC addresses and Ethertype. The type is automatically defined based on the above protocol layer.

Fig. 4.147 The Ethernet field. The Destination MAC address can either be specified manually, or be decided based on an ARP lookup. To enable ARP press the [ARP] softkey to the right of the Destination MAC address field. The ‘Broadcast’ control is used to set the ratio between Unicast and Broadcast frames transmitting.

Fig. 4.148 The [ ! ] softkey appears when pressing the [ARP] softkey. When ARP is selected a new softkey will appear next to the ARP key. This [ ! ] softkey is an ‘instant ARP’ key that when pressed will perform an ARP lookup immediately, instead of waiting until the transmitter starts. Source MAC address can be specified manually but the instrument comes with a default unique MAC address for each port. Encapsulation affects the Ping and RFC2544/Router Latency test, i.e. Ping replies will only be sent if the Ping request contains the same encapsulation as the one selected. VLAN affects the Ping and RFC2544/Router Latency test, i.e. when VLAN is enabled, only frames with VLAN tag will be accepted, furthermore Ping replies will only be sent if the Ping request contains the same VLAN ID as the one selected. MPLS Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) encapsulation. When the ‘MPLS’ option is installed, up to eight levels of MPLS fields can be insert-

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-161

4.24

Application > VoIP

ed in the frame. The number of MPLS fields is selected through the Level count drop-down menu, and each level is set up individually.

Fig. 4.149 The MPLS field Pressing the Label field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup a denoting of the MPLS. Pressing the EXP field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup the 3 bit value EXP (Experimental - used in MPLS to support differentiated services (priority)). Pressing the TTL field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup the 8 bit value TTL (Time To Live). EoMPLS Ethernet over Multi Protocol Label Switching (EoMPLS). When the ‘MPLS’ option is installed an embedded ethernet field can be inserted in the frame. This requires that MPLS is active. When EoMPLS is active the ARP button will be moved away from the primary Ethernet field.

Fig. 4.150 The EoMPLS field Enabling the Auto increment sequence number field makes the sequence number in the rfc4448 control word increment automatically instead of being fixed to zero. The remaining fields are discribed in the Ethernet part of this section.

VLAN

Virtual LAN (VLAN) is used to create independent logical networks within a physical network. When enabled, it adds a 16 bit IEEE 802.1Q field and a 16 bit Ethertype field to the header. The 802.1Q is separated into 3 parts.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-162

4.24

Application > VoIP

Fig. 4.151 The VLAN field. Pressing the VID (VLAN ID) field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup a denoting of the virtual LAN. Enabling the CFI field sets a 1-bit flag denoting whether MAC addresses inside the frame are in canonical format. Pressing the Priority field launches a setup menu from which it is possible to setup the priority level of each frame. When the ‘stacked VLAN’ option is installed, up to eight levels of VLAN can be inserted in the frame. The number of VLAN fields is selected through the Level count dropdown menu, and each level is set up individually.

Fig. 4.152 The stacked VLAN field LLC

Logical Link Control (LLC). The DSAP, SSAP and Control fields are set automatically based on the upper protocol layer.

SNAP

SubNetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). The Protocol ID is fixed to 0, and the Ethertype field is dependant on the upper protocol layer. ‘SNAP’ is not possible without ‘LLC1’, and ‘IPv4’ and ‘IPv6’ are substitutes.

IPv4

Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4). When changing the DSCP/TOS (Differentiated Service Code Point/Type of Service) field it is possible to define some handling characteristics of the datagram, originally defined in RFC791. Other uses of the DSCP/TOS field are VoIP, DiffServ and ECN.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-163

4.24

Application > VoIP

Fig. 4.153 The IPv4 field. The Identifier field is mainly used for uniquely identifying fragments of an IP datagram. TTL (Time To Live) defines the number of 'hops' a datagram can do before it is no longer forwarded. The Protocol field defines the upper/next layer protocol encapsulated in the IP datagram. Typical values in hex are: 1 = ICMP, 6 = TCP etc. Source IP address and Destination IP address can be entered by the format: 255.255.255.255. Pressing the [DHCP] softkey located next to the source IP address line will enable the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol function. When it is active, the virtual LED will turn from black to red, as shown in Fig. 4.153. Pressing the [Setup] softkey next to the virtual LED will open the DHCP Setup screen shown in Fig. 4.154.

Fig. 4.154 DHCP setup screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-164

4.24

Application > VoIP

A tick in the Renew lease when link is re-established box enables the function that automatically renews the lease when the link is reestablished. A tick in the Get gateway setup through DHCP box enables the function that automatically assign the gateway. A tick in the Get DNS servers through DHCP box enables the function that automatically assign the DNS server. Pressing the Primary DNS server and the Secondary DNS server field respectively allows you to define these IPv4 addresses for the specific stream. When allocating IP addresses using DHCP, it is ‘leased’ for a certain period of time defined by the network. The time when the lease expires is indicated as current release expire time. Pressing the [Renew now] softkey will renew the allocation of the IP address. Pressing the [Close] softkey closes the setup. Pressing the [DNS] softkey located next to the Destination IP address field launches the Keyboard pop-up for insertion of a name for the destination. When pressing the [Gateway] softkey a popup will be shown, where the Default Gateway and Network mask can be specified. When Gateway is enabled and the gateway/source address mask falls outside the network mask, an ARP lookup for the gateway IP address will be made. The resulting MAC address is used as the destination. The gateway is usually used with ARP also enabled.

IPv6

NOTE: IPv6 is not supported in VoIP application.

UDP

Fig. 4.155 The UDP field

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-165

4.24

Application > VoIP

The UDP checksum may optionally be forced to zero, by checking the Null field.

4.24.2

Emulator Setup The Emulator Setup screen contains setup for general VoIP and emulator parameters that will be used during all calls.

Fig. 4.156 The Emulator Setup screen launched.

Interface

Available interfaces are: Off, Ethernet or Ethernet MS. Use of the Ethernet MS interface requires that the Ethernet Multistream option is installed.

Signaling protocol

The signaling protocol in used to create, modify and terminate calls with one or more participants. The instrument supports SIP (Session Initiation Protocol, described in RFC 3261) and H.323 full and fast connect.

SIP server

Common SIP proxy server setup for the call emulators. Proxy server - The proxy server is a service that helps routing of requests and answers to the current location of requested participant. Define the IP address and port number of the proxy server. If needed, user name and password can also be defined.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-166

4.24

H.323 Gatekeeper

Application > VoIP

Common H.323 Gatekeeper setup for the call emulators. Gatekeeper - The Gatekeeper is a network element that controls the clients within its zone. Define the Gatekeeper mode, IP address and port number. If needed, user name and password can be defined, too. GK mode • No Gatekeeper – no Gatekeeper is used. •

Auto Discover Gatekeeper – Auto discover is performed regardless of the entered IP and port.

•

Static Gatekeeper – The entered IP and port are used for contacting the Gatekeeper.

Incoming Calls

The VoIP emulator allows automatic answering and rejecting of incoming calls after a certain defined timeout. Tick off the relevant box to enable the setup fields. Press the fields to launch setup screens.

White List

If the Use white list field is selected only calls from number within the list are accepted. This selection is only available when running H.323. To maintain the white list, click the [Edit] softbutton.

Fig. 4.157 White List From the edit white list menu entities can be added, edited or deleted. To add an entity – Write the number to be accepted and select which speech channels this should apply for, coloured is on. And press [Add] soft button. To edit an entity – Select the one to be edited from the list change Number and/or Channels and press [Edit] soft button.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-167

4.24

Application > VoIP

To delete and entity – Select the one to be deleted from the list and press the [Delete] soft button. After all changed are done, to close the white list edit menu, press the [Close] soft button. Outgoing Calls

The VoIP emulator allows automatic termination of unanswered calls after certain defined timeout. Tick the relevant box to enable and launch the setup screen.

Advanced Settings

Jitter buffer delay - Press field to enable and define jitter buffer delay in milliseconds. Enable RTCP - Tick off this box to use RTCP messages. Silence Ring Signal - Tick off this box to mute the ringing signal. Use ‘rport’ extension - Tick off this box to use 'rport' extension. The SIP protocol can operate over TCP and UDP. When it operates over UDP then the 'rport' extension may be needed for correct routing of responses to requests. It is mostly needed when a NAT (Network Address Translator) is between request originator and its proxy server. Use 'Reason' header - Tick off this box to include the reason header field in Bye and Cancel messages when running SIP. (rfc 3326) Disable Quality Measurement - Tick off this box to disable the Quality Measurement function. The Disable Quality Measurement tick box is only available if the Voice Quality Measurement option is installed. Enable Frame Grabber - Tick off this box to enable the frame grabber, when a measurement is started, this will add received and transmitted signaling frames to the measurement. Use FrontSim version 1.08 or newer to extract these frames to a PCAP file. For more information please refer to the FrontSim manual. Disable DTMF Receiver - Tick off this box to disable the decoding of received DTMF tones.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-168

4.24

4.24.3

Application > VoIP

Emulator Control The VoIP emulator control page allows setup call parameters, make and answer calls as well as monitoring active calls. The page is divided into monitor part on the left side and control part on the right side.

Fig. 4.158 The Emulator Control screen launched. Call monitor

The call monitor is located on the left side. At the top is displayed graphical status of all active calls. Below is displayed more detailed information about the selected call.

Speech channels

The VoIP emulator is able to handle up to 8 incoming or outgoing calls. Each call is placed in to the one dedicated channel that shows current status of the attached call as an image. If no icon is displayed, the channel is idling and it can be used to make a call, or receive a call. Explanation of the icons follows: Call is idle Incoming call / Outgoing call

Ringing

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-169

4.24

Application > VoIP

Active call, incoming/outgoing call real-time encoded voice

Active call, incoming/outgoing prerecorded voice

Active call, incoming/outgoing prerecorded tone

Call ending

Call completed, successfully

Call completed, with failure

H.323 Audio negotiation

H.323 Admission control

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-170

4.24

Info

Application > VoIP

The ‘Info’ tab displays information on the currently selected call. It displays information concerning:

Fig. 4.159 Info tab launched. •

Call state - Current call state (Idle, Ringing ….)

•

Direction - Call direction (None, Incoming, Outgoing)

•

Start time - Time when the call was started (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS)

•

Voice codec - Type of voice codec used

•

Answer delay - Delay between ring was detected and the call was answered (DAY HH:MM:SS)

•

Silence - Silence suppression status (On/Off)

•

Call duration - Time elapsed since the call was answered till now. (DAY HH:MM:SS)

•

Call ID - An unique ID associated with each VoIP call

•

Termination - Information concerning the termination of a call

•

Local SIP/Local CC (Call Control) - Local IP and port in use for protocol

•

Local RTP - Information on RTP connection

•

Local URI - Local URI for connection

•

Remote SIP/Remote CC (Call Control) - Remote IP and port in use for protocol

•

Remote RTP - Information on RTP connection

•

Remote URI - Remote URI for connection

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-171

4.24

Application > VoIP

•

Log

DTMF rec. - The received DTMF digits

The 'Log' tab displays a call log for the currently selected call • -> outgoing messages • VoIP

The ‘Quality’ tab displays statistics of the currently selected call. It displays values concerning:

Fig. 4.161 Quality tab launched. •

Bytes - Count of received/transmitted bytes in RTP packets.

•

Packets - Count of received/transmitted RTP packets.

•

Out of Sequence - Number of received RTP packets, which are out of sequence during conversation.

•

Packet Loss - Number of RTP packages lost.

•

Packet Jitter - Jitter information on packages.

•

Packet RTT - Round Trip Time information on packages

•

Voice Quality (requires VoIP Quality option to be installed) - If the Voice Quality measurement option is installed the evaluation result is shown for one call at the time.

The following table shows which statistics are calculated. Value

Incoming

Bytes

x

Outgoing x

Packets

x

x

Out of Sequence packets

x

x

Lost packets

x

x

Packet jitter

x

x

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-173

4.24

Application > VoIP

Voice

The ‘Voice’ tab shows the voice quality for one call at the time, if the Voice Quality Measurement option is installed.

Fig. 4.162 Voice tab launched. •

MOS CQ - Estimated Conversational Quality MOS. The MOS-CQ score has close correlation with subjective MOS data obtained from conversational tests and is calculated based on the Conversational Quality R Factor. Thus, MOS-CQ incorporates factors e.g. delay and recency which effects conversational quality and implicitly affect listening quality.

•

MOS LQ - Estimated Listening Quality MOS. The MOS-LQ score has close correlation with subjective MOS listening test data, and is calculated based on the Listening Quality R Factor. The MOS-LQ estimate does not contemplate the impairments that cause conversational quality problems e.g. delay and can be compared to subjective MOS scores from Absolute Category (ACR) listening tests or to PESQ-LQ scores.

•

MOS PQ - Estimated P.862 Score. ITU Recommendation P.862 (PESQ) describes an active voice quality test measurement methodology in which an audio sample is transmitted through a voice network and recorded at the receiver. The received audio is then compared to the original audio using a number of amplitude and time alignment normalization techniques. This is a compute intensive quality scoring approach that does not lend itself to real-time quality measurement. The resulting PESQ score ranges from 4.5 to - 0.5, and while often called a MOS score, it does not correlate well with subjective MOS test data. The MOS-PQ score has close correlation with calculated, non-transformed standard PESQ scores and is calculated on the Listening Quality R-factor. the MOS-PQ score is intended to facilitate users comparing generated quality scores with standard PESQ scores.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-174

4.24

Thresholds

Application > VoIP

•

MOS Maximum - Maximal obtainable MOS score with the selected codec.

•

R Factor Conv. - Conversation Quality R Factor (R-CQ) is calculated including the effect of delay and recency.

•

R Factor Listen - Listening Quality R Factor (R-LQ) is calculated ignoring the effect of delay and recency.

•

R Factor G.107 - Calculations based on the ITU G.107 E-model.

•

R Factor Burst - Average listening R Factor for the burst periods.

•

R Factor Gap - Average listening R Factor for the gab periods.

•

R Factor Maximum - Maximal obtainable R Factor with the selected codec.

•

Lost Packages - The number of lost packages as count and percent.

The ‘Thresholds’ tab is optional (it requires the Voice Quality Measurement option to be installed). On this page thresholds may be selected.

Fig. 4.163 Thresholds tab launched. Pressing either the ‘R Factor’ or the ‘MOS CQ’ fields will launch a setup window. Type in the new R Factor or MOS CQ value directly. Changing these values will change the satisfaction level in conjunction with the changes. Pressing the [Reset] softkey will set the levels to the factory default.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-175

4.24

Application > VoIP

Emulator tab

Using the ‘Emulator’ tab setup parameters for the incoming and outgoing call in a selected call channel can be made. It allows setup of the following parameters:

Fig. 4.164 Emulator tab shown Address - The address to use for the next outgoing call. It can be entered manually or selected from the address book by clicking the [ ... ] softkey. Hide ID - Hide ID of the caller when making a call. This way the ID of the caller will not be revealed for the called party. Call type - Select type of call from this drop-down menu: •

Phone - Speech acquired from the headset (available for one channel at the time)

•

Tone - Prerecorded tone

•

Speech - Prerecorded speech

Voice Codec - Select the preferred codec from the drop-down menu: • Any*, A-Law 64 kbps (G.711), u-Law 64 kbps (G.711), ADPCM 16/ 24/32/40 kbps (G.726)**, ACLEP 5.3 kbps (G.723.1), MPCMLQ 6.3 kbps (G.723.1), GSM-FR 13 kbps (ETSI GSM 06.10) LDCELP 16 kbps (G.728), or GSM-EFR 12 kbps (ETSI GSM 06.60). * – Not available when H.323 Fast Connect is selected. ** – Only available for SIP

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-176

4.24

Application > VoIP

Port - From the drop-down menu select port A or B, on which this emulator sends and receives messages. Stream - From the drop-down menu select the stream (1 to 8) on which this emulator sends and receives messages. Only possible if Multistream option is installed and Emulator Setup interface is set to Ethernet MS. Use Proxy - Tick off this box to determine if a proxy should be used. Register - Determines if this emulator should use a registrar or not. Force TCP - Tick off this box if you want to force TCP protocol to be used for signalling instead of UDP. If a total signalling message cannot fit inside a single UDP packet, the signalling will change to use TCP independent of this setting. TCP listen port - The port used for listening for incoming VoIP calls. RTP listen port - The port used for reception of RTP and RTCP packets for this emulator. SIP Alias - The alias used for this SIP call. S. Supp./Suppress silence - Tick this box to enable silence suppress, this is not supported for all codecs and only when Call type is set to Phone. H.245 Tunnel - Tick this box to enable Tunneling of H.245 packets. Use GK. - Tick this box to enable use of Gatekeeper. UDP Call Sig. - Tick this box to use UDP instead of default TCP for call signaling. Alias - H.323 Alias for this call. H.323 ID - H.323 ID for this call. Call Ctrl. Port - Listen port for call control packets. Dial

Pressing the [Dial] softkey starts a new call on selected channel with set up parameters.

Hang Up

The [Hang Up] softkey is displayed when a selected channels contains active call. Pressing this softkey clears the call.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-177

4.24

Application > VoIP

Hang Up All

Pressing the [Hang Up All] softkey will clear calls on all channels.

Generator tab

The generator tab can be used for generation of up to 8 outgoing calls. Calls are created and also cleared automatically after the time specified in the setup tab. Below follows list of generator parameters.

Fig. 4.165 Generator tab shown. Address - List of address or number of called participants. It can be entered manually or selected from the address book by clicking the [ ... ] softkey. Cycle - Enable cycling of selected addresses when making calls. For each new call the next address is used. After last address the first one is used again. Call type - From the drop-down menu it is possible to select the following types of voice source: Tone (Prerecorded tone) or Speech (Prerecorded speech) Active Channels - Select which channels should be used for outgoing calls by the generator. Voice Codec - From the drop-down menu, select the following voice codecs to use: • Any*, A-Law 64 kbps (G.711), u-Law 64 kbps (G.711), ADPCM 16/ 24/32/40 kbps (G.726)**, ACLEP 5.3 kbps (G.723.1), MPC-MLQ 6.3 kbps (G.723.1), GSM-FR 13 kbps (ETSI GSM 06.10) or LDCELP 16 kbps (G.728). * – Not available when H.323 Fast Connect is selected. ** – Only available for SIP

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-178

4.24

Application > VoIP

Use Proxy - Tick off this box to determine if a proxy should be used. Force TCP - Tick off this box if you want to force TCP protocol to be used for signalling instead of UDP. Number of calls - Number of simultaneously active calls. Call duration - Setup the duration of a single call. Intercall delay - Setup the intercall delay. Start/Stop

The [Start] or [Stop] softkey. Pressing this softkey starts or stops a call on the selected channel.

4.24.4

Address Book The ‘Address Book’ tab allows the user to edit the address book entries. Each entry contains: Name - Name of recipient Address - VoIP address (e.g. [email protected]) Phone - Phone number Notes - User notes, comments, etc.

Fig. 4.166 The Address Book screen launched. Add

To add one or more new names to the Address Book, press the [Add] softkey and fill in the data in the launched menu.

Edit

To edit a name entry in the Address Book, select the line to edit and press the [Edit] softkey. Edit the data in the launched menu.

Delete

To delete a name and its data totally from the Address Book, select the line to delete and press the [Delete] softkey.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-179

4.24

Filter

Application > VoIP

Searching all entries in the address book which contains entered substring.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-180

4.25

4.25

Application > WAN Pointer Movement

Application > WAN Pointer Movement This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option, 10 GigE LAN option and the 10 GigE WAN option.

The Pointer movement screen found in the Application tab is a test feature that graphically shows the pointer positions of the AU4. The matrixscheme found on the screen will reflect the relative positions in the frame.

Pointer movement test result is automatically stored in memory and can be found in ‘Stored Measurements’ under the ‘Misc’. tab

Start/Stop

To start a Pointer movement test, press the [Start] softkey found in the upper right corner of the screen. Observe that this softkey toggles from being a Start softkey to a Stop softkey and vice versa, depending on which one is active.

Fig. 4.167 WAN Pointer Movement Screen. Plot info

In this field information concerning the plot interaction will appear.

Duration

This field shows the duration of the test.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-181

4.25

Application > WAN Pointer Movement

Pointer source

From the Receiver field, possible receivers RxA and RxB are selectable. In the Pointer field, the selected pointer is shown. (For WAN only AU-4).

Zoom

The View mode sets the x-scaling. Possible settings are: Follow last 24H, shows a sliding window with max. width of 24 hours. View all, shows a window with a width as the duration of the test. Custom zoom, this is automatically selected when the plot view is directly manipulated. The Max ptr value sets the y-scaling of the view. The maximum amplitude of the plot always originating from the zero line. For examples on how to use the zoom see Application > Pointer Movement section.

Navigation keys

Keys used for navigating left, up, down and right in the plot view. General the idea of navigating the application is to use direct manipulation of the view to zoom in and use the controls in the button to zoom out. When touching the plot area with a finger or the stylus pen, a rectangle will appear. By drawing a box around the area which need closer investigation and releasing the finger (or stylus pen) pressure, a zoomed view of this selection will be shown. To cancel a zoom action, drag your finger or stylus pen out of the plot area and release the pressure. All controls below the plot are only operational on the displayed graph. A new test will always measure on all active receiver interfaces (the ones which are shown in the top left corner of the screen). When a new measurement is started - all controls are reset to default configuration.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-182

4.26 Application > ISDN Emulator

4.26

Application > ISDN Emulator This feature requires the ISDN PRI Call Emulation option to be installed.

4.26.1

Emulator Setup Press the Emulator Setup tab to select the ISDN Emulator Setup screen. Here all common emulator setups may be entered.

Fig. 4.168 ISDN Emulator Setup screen. Interface

Use the Interface field to enable (PRI) or disable (None) the primary rate ISDN emulator.

Mode

Use the Mode field to select whether to emulate Network or Terminal.

Configuration

Use the Configuration field to setup the test signal verification, i.e. the method employed to get the transmitted signal returned to the instrument. Choose between End to End and Self Call when emulating a terminal. End to End is the only choice when emulating the network.

Program Selection

Use the Program Selection field to setup the wanted emulator. The CMA 3000 may only contain up to 8 different emulators in the instrument at the same time.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-183

4.26

Application > ISDN Emulator

D Channel TS

Use the D Channel TS field to select the time slot used for the D channel, e.g. the time slot carrying all the signaling messages.

For normal primary rate ISDN systems this is nearly always time slot 16. Number Design

Use the Number Design field to select the way you want to mark phone numbers in outgoing calls. The presence of and the choices for this field depends upon the selected call emulation program.

Numbering Plan

Use the Numbering Plan field to select the way you want to mark phone numbers in outgoing calls. The presence of and the choices for this field depends upon the selected call emulation program.

Dial Mode

Use the Dial Mode field to select whether a phone number is send as 'Overlap (digit-by-digit)' or 'En-bloc'. Digit by digit is only possible in terminal mode.

Instrument Phone Number

Use the Instrument Phone Number field to enter the instruments own phone number. Some exchanges require this number to be in strict accordance with the exchange settings. Otherwise outgoing calls may be rejected. If in doubt, leave this field empty.

Answer Timeout

Use the Answer Timeout field to Selects the time the instrument will wait for an outgoing call to be answered.

Answer Incoming

Use the Answer Incoming field to selects the way incoming calls are to be handled. The modes are manually using the handset, or automatically (either fully i.e. accepting all calls or selectively i.e. accepting only calls with the selected call type). Further selects whether the response to the automatically answered call is transmitting a tone, or a pattern, or doing a loop back. If ‘Answer Incoming’ is set to answer calls manually and the incoming call contain other than speech, it will be rejected.

Call Type

Use the Call Type field to select which kind of calls should be selectively answered.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-184

4.26 Application > ISDN Emulator

This field can only be selected while emulating terminal, and only if the Answer Incoming field has been set to selective answering mode.

Charging

Use the Charging field to selects whether or not to generate charge pulses during a call or charge information at the end-of-a-call. Charge pulses or charge information may be sent as FACILITY or INFO messages. Please note that the choices for this field also depend upon the selected call emulation program. Further more the emulator must be in network mode.

Charge Period

Use the Charge Period field to select the number of seconds between charge pulses. The value may be between 1 and 50 seconds.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-185

4.26

Application > ISDN Emulator

4.26.2

Emulator Control This screen covers the ISDN emulator Control. Here the actual activity going on in the individual B-channels will be displayed. You may perform 3 different tasks from this page. • • •

Normal call simulation (make and answer calls) Call generator (up to 8 concurrent calls) Performing channel tests.

Fig. 4.169 ISDN Emulator Control - Emulator section launched. B Channels

This box will show activities in the individual B-channels. A number of different information is available either as graphical or color information. The currently selected B-channel is indicated as a pressed button. The information in 'Call Status' will follow the selected B-channel. Outside active state: Icon shows activities on the signaling channel before the handset is lifted. It is also shows when the handset has been put back on hook again. Icon indicates a ringing phone. The image is animated. On incoming calls the animation will follow the physical ringing signal. On outgoing calls the remote ringing is animated as a vibrating phone. Icon indicates that the handset is lifted. It will only remain until the call enters the active state. During the active state different images will show the actual contents in the B-channel.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-186

4.26 Application > ISDN Emulator

Inside active state: Primary B-channel content during active state. This image is animated. It indicates that speech is transmitted in the B-channel. This is normally user voice conversation. Only one B-channel may contain primary contents at a time. Primary B-channel content during active state. This image is animated. It indicates that a pattern is transmitted in the B-channel. This may be either a PRBS or a user pattern. Only one B-channel may contain primary contents at a time. Primary B-channel content during active state. This image is animated. It indicates that a tone is transmitted in the B-channel. This is normally a tone selected by the user. Only one B-channel may contain primary contents at a time. Secondary B-channel content during active state. This image is animated. It indicates that an ISDN test is active in the B-channel. This is normally supplementary service test initiated by the user. Several B-channels may contain secondary contents at a time. Secondary B-channel content during active state. This image is animated. It indicates that the content of a B-channel is looped back. This may be any kind of contents. Several B-channels may contain secondary contents at a time. Secondary B-channel content during active state. This image indicates that the content of a B-channel is unknown. This may be any kind of contents. Several B-channels may contain secondary contents at a time.

Reserved Channels: [Grey square] This is the frame synchronization. It cannot be used for any other purposes. This B-channel is reserved for signaling. The user may select any B-channel for this purpose.

Color Indications: [Red square] This shows a channel test where the fails are bigger than the allowed 'Fail Limit'. [Yellow square] This shows a channel test where the fails are bigger than the allowed 'Pass Limit', but also below the given 'Fail Limit'. [Green square] This shows a channel test where the fails are below the given 'Pass Limit'. [White square] This shows a channel test where the connection to the remote client could not be established.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-187

4.26

Application > ISDN Emulator

The CMA 3000 will only show the colors when the 'Ch. Tester' tab is active. Call Status [x]

This box will show different forms of information for the selected B-channel. The [x] is the actual B-channel selected. The contents will vary with the task performed, e.g. follow the task selection tabs. Emulator and Generator: • • • •

Emulator status Phone number B-Channel, TEI, and User info Charge pulses, Call type

Channel Tester: • • • •

Control Parameters

Call starting time Call duration Called phone number Release cause

There will be a lot of control parameters to select between in the different tabs, e.g. 'Emulator', 'Generator', and 'Ch.Tester'. Some parameters will be found on every tab, therefore they will only be explained once. Answer Timeout - Selects the time the instrument will wait for a call to be answered. Answer TG - Selects the time the instrument will wait for a call to be answered. Associated TEI Number - The TEI number associated with the call. Call Duration - Selects the time the call will last before it is released. Call Type - Selects the bearer- and the teleservice. Called Phone Number - Selects the phone number to call. During this selection you may use the phone book. Individual phone numbers can be added or removed from the phone book. There may be up to 20 numbers in the phone book. Concurrent Calls - Select the number of simultaneous, independent calls.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-188

4.26 Application > ISDN Emulator

Cycle Phone List - Select whether to call a single phone number, or to use every number in the phone book in a cyclic manner. Duration - Select the test period of each channel, e.g. the time the call will last before it is released. Evaluation Item - Select the performance parameter on which to base the evaluation. Fail Limit - When appropriate, for the selected performance parameter, enter the fail value. Intercall Time - Select the time the instrument will wait after a call, before the next call is initiated. HR % - When appropriate, for the selected performance parameter, enter the HR percent. Invert - Selects if pattern is transmitted normally or inverted. Keypad Info - Enter a keypad string (up to 20 characters) to be send as soon as possible. Pass Limit - When appropriate, for the selected performance parameter, enter the pass value. Pattern Type - Selects or disable the pattern to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Choose between PRBS or special patterns. Test Type - Selects the contents of the B-Channel. User [16] - Select the user pattern to use in the channel test. User to User Info - Enter a user text (up to 20 characters) of User-to-User Information Type, which will be send as either a part of the call setup, or as an info message during the active state.

Only legal buttons will be shown. The button text will change according to possible functionality.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-189

4.26

Application > ISDN Emulator

4.26.3

ISDN Tests This screen contains the ISDN tests. It will show the results of the individual tests performed. Two different types of tests are available: • •

Bearer capabilities test Supplementary service tests

Fig. 4.170 ISDN Tests - Bear. Cap. Test launched. Test results

This box will show the results of the individual tests. If a LOG measurement is active, the results may also be found in the LOG file. Each test result occupies a single line, where a description of the test is seen. An icon will show the outcome of the test. This icon shows that a bearer capability is available, or that a supplementary service is subscribed. This icon shows that a bearer capability is not available, or a supplementary service is not subscribed. This icon shows that a supplementary service could not be determined. This icon shows that a supplementary service is not available. In order to enter parameters in connection with the individual supplementary service tests, you must select the line with the test you want to perform.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-190

4.26 Application > ISDN Emulator

Current Test

This box will show the name of the test being performed at the moment.

Control Parameters

There will be very few control parameters in connection with ISDN tests. In order to enter parameters for the supplementary service tests, you must first select the test in the Test Result box. Called Phone Number - Selects the phone number to call. During this selection you may use the phone book. Individual phone numbers can be added or removed from the phone book. There may be up to 20 numbers in the phone book. CUG Index - In connection with test of Closed User Group the instrument will need an index in order to perform the test. Number of retries - In case of failure the instrument will retry the test the number of times given here.

Only legal buttons will be shown. The button text will change according to possible functionality.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-191

4.27

Application > Service Activation Test

4.27

Application > Service Activation Test This feature requires the Service Activation Test option and an Ethernet option to be installed. Service Activation Test is an out-of-service test. It uses the test methodology described in the ITU-T recommendation Y.1564. This recommendation also defines the terms used in this part of the CMA 3000.

4.27.1

Control The "Control" tab describes the test mode and other general parameters. This is also where the test is initiated and may be stopped.

Fig. 4.171 Service Activation Test Control screen Port Selection

Select port to perform test on.

Test Mode

Select the test mode.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-192

4.27 Application > Service Activation Test

One-way Test In this test mode, two CMA 3000 units will work together performing the test. When the test is started on the local side, the unit will try to contact the remote side using the Destination IP and MAC address (or use ARP if selected) for the first enabled service. If the remote side receives the communication on a port with a matching Source address, the test will begin.

The remote side CMA 3000 must have the "Accept incoming CMA 3000 configuration frames" enabled, in order to detect the communication.

Frames from Service 1 on the local side must reach Service 1 on the remote side and vice versa. This applies to all services.

When the test is started, a popup will appear on the remote side, telling that the unit is being remotely controlled - providing a 'break connection' button. The popup will disappear when the test is completed or stopped on the local side. When the test is completed, the test results are transferred from the remote side to the local side. Round-trip This test mode is used when testing network by reflecting traffic back to the CMA 3000 instrument. This requires a device to reflect the traffic back e.g. a second CMA 3000.

A remote side CMA 3000 in Reflector mode must have Swap IP address and Swap Ports on UDP and TCP frames enabled (see section 4.8.1)

One-way Test Setup

General setting for the One-way Test mode. Direction Choose which directions to test, could be either Local->Remote, Remote->Local or both. Line If asymmetrical is selected, service attributes are setup for each direction. If symmetrical is selected, the same service attributes are used for both directions.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-193

4.27

Application > Service Activation Test

Time Sync. Mode For correct measurement of FTD and FDV in One-Way test mode, the two instruments performing the SAT test need to be synchronized. If external GPS receivers are available at both the local and remote sites, select GPS for the most accurate measurements. Select Pre-test sync. mode if GPS is not available for both instruments. In this mode synchronization is obtained using proprietary protocol prior to the first step of the Service Configuration Test. External GPS sensor available from Anritsu A/S (part no. 01475090). See section section 3.10, External GPS Sensor for more details.

Use local SRC addresses as DST on remote side Transfer the local source IP address to the remote side to be used as destination IP address. If ARP is enabled locally it will also be enabled on the remote side.

Bit Rate Realm

Choose which bit rate realm to operate in. Information Rate Information Rate is the bit rate of frames starting with the first MAC address bit and ending with the last FCS bit. Utilized Line Rate Utilized Line Rate is the bit rate of the Ethernet line, including the bits for: • The minimum inter frame gap

Service Configuration Tests

•

Preamble

•

Start of frame delimiter

•

Frame starting with the first MAC address bit and ending with the last FCS bit

General setting for the Configuration Test. Complete despite SAC violation When disabled the Configuration Test will stop when the first SAC violation is detected. If enabled the Configuration Test will be completed despite any detected SAC violations.

Service Performance Test

General setting for the Performance Test. Duration

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-194

4.27 Application > Service Activation Test

Set the duration to any of the three predefined values or specify a custom duration period for the Performance Test.

Test Status

Shows the current test progress and estimated test time remaining.

Start/Stop Test

Start or stop the test.

4.27.2

Services The left panel lists up to eight services. This icon enables the service

This icon disables the service

Each service is associated with an Ethernet stream. This icon edits the appropriate stream setting

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-195

4.27

Application > Service Activation Test

Fig. 4.172 The Service Activation Test Services screen

Even when a CMA 3000 is operated as a remote unit, some stream dependent parameters must be set. If VLAN or MPLS is used, they must be defined for the streams in which they are used. If you do not enable "Use local SRC addresses as DST on remote side", you may have to enter both source MAC and source IP.

Above the list of services there is a combo box to choose which kind of information is listed together with the service name. One of the following types of information can be chosen: • IP Address •

MAC Address

•

VLAN

•

CIR and EIR

•

Utilized Line Rate

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-196

4.27 Application > Service Activation Test

The right panel has a tab for setting up the attributes and a tab for setting up the step duration and number of steps in the service configuration test for the service selected on the left panel.

In case of asymmetrical one-way-test there will be an attributes tab for the local-to-remote direction, and an attributes tab for the remote-to-local direction.

4.27.3

Services > Attributes For each service the attributes tab is used to setup the Bandwidth Profile, Service Acceptance Criteria and frame size configuration.

Fig. 4.173 The Service Activation Test Attributes screen

Bandwidth Profile

CIR CIR is the Committed Information Rate. When zero, the CIR test is excluded. If Color Aware is enabled this is the bit rate for green frames. EIR EIR is the Excess Information Rate. When zero, the EIR test is excluded. If Color Aware is enabled this is the bit rate for yellow frames.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-197

4.27

Application > Service Activation Test

CIR plus EIR for a service must be greater than zero.

Traffic Policing A mark in the "Traffic Policing" check-box enables the traffic policing test. During the service configuration test, if enabled, specify a margin for the pass/fail evaluation. The test fails if the throughput is greater than CIR + EIR + Margin. For Color-Aware the transmit rate is 100 % CIR green-marked frames plus 25 % CIR yellow frames plus 100 % EIR yellow-marked frames if EIR is less than 20 % of CIR, otherwise the transmit rate is 100 % CIR green-marked frames and 125 % EIR yellow-marked frames. For Non-Color-Aware the transmit rate is 125 % CIR plus EIR if EIR is less than 20 % of CIR, otherwise the transmit rate is CIR plus 125 % EIR. CBS CBS is the Committed Burst Size in bytes. When zero, the CBS test is excluded. If Color-Aware is enabled this is the burst size for green frames.

CIR must be greater then zero before the CBS test can be executed. Further more it must be possible to send at least twice the number of CBS bytes with CIR rate within the step duration. EBS EBS is the Excess Burst Size in bytes. When zero, the EBS test is excluded. If Color-Aware is enabled this is the burst size for yellow frames.

EIR must be greater then zero before the EBS test can be executed. CBS must also be greater then zero if CIR is greater when zero for the EBS test to run. Further more it must be possible to send at least twice the number of EBS bytes with EIR rate within the step duration. Color Aware A mark in the "Color Aware" check-box enables color awareness. Choose color method IP DSCP to use IP priority coloring or the PCP method to use VLAN priority for coloring frames. PCP method requires VLAN to be enabled. Also choose the priority values to mark green and yellow frames with. When color aware, the test will include results for green and yellow frames for the EIR, Traffic Policing and the EBS tests.

Service Acceptance Criteria

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-198

4.27 Application > Service Activation Test

FTD The maximum acceptable frame transfer delay in ms (mean). FDV The maximum acceptable frame transfer deviation in ms (mean). FLR The maximum acceptable frame loss rate. AVAIL The minimum acceptable availability percentage.

Frame Size

Press the "Setup..." button to change the size(s) of the transmitted frames. Frame size has two modes: Constant and EMIX. Constant Select a constant frame size from one of the predefined sizes or define a custom frame size with the MTU or User Defined setting.

Fig. 4.174 The Service Activation Test Frame Size popup in constant mode EMIX Use EMIX to setup a repeating frame size pattern. The pattern must consist of at least 1 frame size and at most 16.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-199

4.27

Application > Service Activation Test

Fig. 4.175 The Service Activation Test Frame Size popup in EMIX mode Frame size is protocol headers and payload combined. Frame size does not include preamble and interframe gap.

4.27.4

Services > Steps For each service, the service configuration test step duration, number of stems and the slope can be specified.

Fig. 4.176 The Service Activation Test Steps screen

Step Duration

The test step duration. Set from 1 to 60 seconds.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-200

4.27 Application > Service Activation Test

Number of steps

The number of steps in the CIR test. Set from 1 to 10 steps.

Slope

Use an ascending or a descending test slope during the CIR test. In Round-trip test mode, when descending test slope is selected and a CIR step passes the remaining CIR steps are skipped. In One-way test mode all CIR steps are always performed.

4.27.5

Result Results for the Service Activation Test are presented as a tree view. Items can manually be expanded or collapsed by pressing the plus or minus symbol next to the item. Alternatively there are three buttons with predefined behavior.

Fig. 4.177 The Service Activation Test Result screen

This button expands all items currently in view. When the buttons is down all further added items will also be expanded. This button expands all items that have failed. When the button is down all further added items with a SAC violation will also be expanded.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-201

4.27

Application > Service Activation Test

This button collapses all items.

Item LED

Each item has a colored LED indicating the status for this item and its sub items: Green The item and all its sub items have passed the Service Acceptance Criteria. Yellow The GPS synchronization has been lost for a longer period, typical one hour or more. The results are shown, but you should be aware of the possibly limited precision of the FTD results. Red The item and one or more of its sub items have failed the Service Acceptance Criteria. Black Results for the item are pending.

IR / ULR

Shows the minimum, mean and maximum bit rate in Mbps. Depending on the test setup, the bit rate can be either Information Rate (IR) or Utilized Line Rate (ULR).

FL

Shows number of lost frames and frame loss ratio. The frame loss ratio is frames lost divided by frames transmitted.

FTD / RT FTD

Shows the minimum, mean, maximum and current Frame Transfer Delay in milliseconds. The result can be one-way or round-trip depending on test setup.

FDV / RT FDV

Shows the minimum, mean, maximum and current Frame Delay Variation in milliseconds. The result can be one-way or round-trip depending on test setup.

AVAIL.

Availability is the percentage of one-second in intervals that are categorized as available. An available second occurs when the line is in the available state. The available state begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SESeth outcomes. A SESeth is defined as a second with a frame loss rate of 0.5 or more. See Y.1563 clause 9. This is only measured in the Service Performance Test.

Unavail

Unavailable seconds count. An unavailable second occurs when the line is in the unavailable state. The unavailable state begins at the onset of

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-202

4.27 Application > Service Activation Test

10 consecutive SESeth outcomes. This is only measured in the Service Performance Test. GPS status

During a One-Way test, status for the GPS time synchronisation is displayed at the top of the page with a colored LED. One LED for the local side and one for the remote side. Green GPS synchronisation is OK. Yellow GPS synchronisation has been lost for too long a time, FTD and FDV results could be compromised.

To print or generate a test report of test results, press the printer icon shown.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-203

4.28

Result > Measurement Information

4.28

Result > Measurement Information Selecting the Measurement information from the Result folder will launch the information screen shown in Fig. 4.178.

Fig. 4.178 The measurement information screen.

Measurement info

In this screen an overview of the measurement is presented. The information contains: the time it occurred, and a color OK or not OK summary of the test results.

Comment

While a measurement is running or loaded, it is possible to insert, edit or read comments related to the measurement, the customer or like in the comment field. Also available from Stored Measurement. See Misc. > Stored Measurement on page 4 - 283. Press the [Keyboard] softkey to write in, or edit the text using the launched keyboard.

Clear

Press the [Clear] softkey to erase all previous content from the comments field.

Def

Press the [Def] softkey to erase all previous text content from the comment field and insert default text instead.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-204

4.29 Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

4.29

Result > Result List (2 Mbps) Depending on the type of measurement performed, the Result list will contain different tabs for displaying results.

Log measurement

Log measurement results are shown in section 4.29.1, Result List, section 4.29.2, Display Filter.

Filter

Pressing the [Filter on/off] softkey will enable or disable the filter function, each time it is pressed. When the filter is enabled it will hide all non-failed intervals in the measurement - showing a list of failed only. This function is a common feature and available in all result lists shown in the following sections.

4.29.1

Result List Alternative press Result list tab to open the result list screen. Depending on if the measurement is a ‘Log’ or a ‘Statistics’ measurement - a corresponding screen will appear.

Fig. 4.179 Example showing Log - Result list.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-205

4.29

Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

Result list shows the result of the current, the last, or a loaded measurement. Changes done on ‘Application > Measurement > general’ will not effect the results shown on ‘Result > Result list’ until a new measurement is started, or an old measurement is loaded. The result screen presents the results of the measurement, including timestamps, conditions of the receiver and a description of the signal. Pressing the [Content] softkey will open for more detailed information about the measurement. An example is shown in Fig. 4.180.

Fig. 4.180 Part of result list showing specific contents. Scroll bar

The scroll bar works a little different than regular scroll bars. The screen content is not updated until the touch screen/left mouse button is released.

Fig. 4.181 Example showing Signaling - Result list. The result screen presents the results of the measurement, including timestamps, conditions of the receiver and a description of the signal.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-206

4.29 Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

Content

Pressing the [Content] softkey will open for more detailed information about the measurement. An example is shown in Fig. 4.182. Switch the view to show only one message (content mode) Switch the view to show several messages (overview mode)

Fig. 4.182 Part of result list showing specific contents. Hex

Pressing the [Hex] softkey will present the message as Hex code, example shown in Fig. 4.183.

Fig. 4.183 Message presented as Hex code. Switch the view to show the binary content of the selected message in hexadecimal notation. This button is exclusive to This button is disabled when several messages is shown. Switch of the hexadecimal view. Details

Pressing the [Details] softkey will display detailed information. Switch to detailed view.

Switch of detailed view.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-207

4.29

Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

Fig. 4.184 Message shown as detailed information. Other types of messages, alarms or errors could look like the examples shown in Fig. 4.185.

Fig. 4.185 Examples on different message types.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-208

4.29 Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

4.29.2

Display Filter Pressing the Display filter tab from the Result folder will open a setup screen as shown in Fig. 4.186.

Fig. 4.186 Display filter screen. Alarms

Press the first Alarms field and select from the drop-down menu. All

All alarms will be logged.

None

No alarms will be logged.

=

The specified alarm will be logged.



The specified alarm will not be logged.

Press the second Alarms field and select from the drop-down menu. From here select: No Sync, Distant MF, No CAS, Distant, No CRC4 MF, No Frame, AIS, No Signal, TRAU Sync, No Flag, Bad Message. Pressing [Select All] softkey will select all alarms. Errors

Press the first Errors field and select from the drop-down menu. All

All alarms will be logged.

None

No alarms will be logged.

=

The specified alarm will be logged.



The specified alarm will not be logged.

Press the second Errors field and select from the drop-down menu. From here select: Pattern Slip, Pattern, E-Bit, CRC4, Frame Slip, CRC4 MFAS, FAS, Code, TRAU CRC, TRAU Bit. Pressing [Select All] softkey will select all alarms. C-Bits

Press C-Bits field and select from the drop-down menu: All, None, TAF or SID TAF.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-209

4.29

Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

Sa-Bits

Press Sa-Bits field and select from the drop-down menu: All or None Other parameters will appear if CCS signaling is activated. These parameters will depend on the selected protocol.

4.29.3

Graphics (A-Bis protocol decode required). In some cases, the instrument can show a graphical presentation of some of the measured data. This applies for ‘measurement result messages’ on a GSM ABIS interface. To display the graphics, first point out a meas_result message. Press the Graphics tab from the Result folder to open the screen shown in Fig. 4.187. Information from related meas_result messages are shown graphically.

Fig. 4.187 Graphics screen. The Graphics screen, presents the message(s) in graphs. Prev. 30 secs.

Press the [Prev. 30secs.] softkey to display the previous 30 seconds of messages on the graphs.

Next 30 secs.

Press the [Next 30secs.] softkey to display the next 30 seconds of messages on the graphs. Select the graph parameter from the drop-down menu: MS Rx Level [dBm], MS Tx Level (GSM 900) [dBm], MS Tx Level (GSM 1800) [dBm], BS Rx Level [dBm], BS Tx Level [dB], Rx Quality, Timing Advance [us], Timing Advance.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-210

4.29 Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

4.29.4

2 Mbps G.821 From the G.821 tab, statistic information concerning FAS-, Pattern-, CRC4- and E-bit errors is presented. See Abbreviation on page 5 - 7

Fig. 4.188 Example showing G.821 result Status bar icons

For all screens found in the sub-tabs under the result list tab the icons shown below and their functionality are available. Clicking the History softkey on the bottom bar followed by a parameter, will present results as a histogram function for that parameter. Clicking the Zoom softkey on the bottom bar followed by a parameter, will present zoomed results for that parameter. To print all pages beneath the Result folder, press printer icon shown.

To print only the page shown, press the printer icon shown.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-211

4.29

Result > Result List (2 Mbps)

4.29.5

2 Mbps Alarms and Errors From the Alarms & Errors tab, statistic information is presented. This result table covers the record of several parameters.

Fig. 4.189 Example showing Alarms & Errors result.

4.29.6

2 Mbps BERT From the BERT tab, results of related counters and ratios are shown. The BERT result screen gives a one-page overview.

Fig. 4.190 Example showing BERT result.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-212

4.30

4.30

Result > Result List (SDH)

Result > Result List (SDH) This feature requires the Enhanced SDH option to be installed.

Filter

Pressing the [Filter on/off] softkey will enable or disable the filter function, each time it is pressed. When the filter is enabled it will hide all non-failed intervals in the measurement - showing a list of failed only. This function is a common feature and available in all result lists shown in the following sections.

Status bar icons

For all screens found in the sub-tabs under the result list tab the icons shown below and their functionality are available. Clicking the History softkey on the bottom bar followed by a parameter, will present results as a histogram function for that parameter. Clicking the Zoom softkey on the bottom bar followed by a parameter, will present zoomed results for that parameter. To print all pages beneath the Result folder, press printer icon shown.

To print only the page shown, press the printer icon shown.

Results from SDH Statistics measurement Statistics SDH measurement results are shown in the next 3 sections.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-213

4.30

Result > Result List (SDH)

4.30.1

SDH Alarms and Errors Information concerning errors and alarms on SDH lines are available from the SDH Alarms & Errors tab.

Fig. 4.191 Example showing Alarms and errors result.

4.30.2

SDH Quality Information concerning quality of the SDH is available from the SDH Quality tab.

Fig. 4.192 Example showing SDH quality.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-214

4.30

Result > Result List (SDH)

The quality and error performance pages has dynamic content. If this is done with one of the Rx interfaces configured to SDH including VC12, the section VC12 will be shown.

4.30.3

SDH G.828 Information concerning the SDH G.828 is available from the SDH G.828 tab.

Fig. 4.193 Example showing SDH G.828 screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-215

4.30

Result > Result List (SDH)

4.30.4

SDH M.2100.1 (M.2100) Information concerning the SDH M.2101 is available from the SDH M.2101 tab.

Fig. 4.194 Example showing SDH M.2101 screen The tab presents the M.2101 measurement results. Results for MUX, and VC-4 are always present while result for lower-order path depends on the configured signal structure.

Result parameters BIS Limits (Bring Into Service Limits)

The calculation of these values are based on the Allocations and the Time period specified in Application > Measurement > Edit menu. • S1-ES: Soft Fail threshold for errored seconds •

S1-ES: Hard Fail threshold for errored seconds

•

S1-SES: Soft Fail threshold for severely errored seconds

•

S1-SES: Hard Fail threshold for severely errored seconds

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-216

4.30

Result > Result List (SDH)

If a Soft Fail threshold is exceeded the measurement period should be extended. If a Hard Fail threshold is exceeded the network should be repaired before further testing. Forward

Backward

Calculated values are based on errors in the received signal: • ES: Errored seconds •

SES: Severely errored seconds

•

UNAV: Unavailable time [seconds]

Calculated values are based on errors detected at the remote end: • ES: Errored seconds •

SES: Severely errored seconds

•

UNAV: Unavailable time [seconds]

Choose a measurement interval that matches the configured M.2101 Time period when possible.

When the Total interval is chosen the S1/S2 limits changes due to the progressing measurement time and according to the predefined measurement intervals which are: 15 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 1 day and 7 days. I.e. the threshold values will change when the current measurement time reaches one of the predefined interval lengths. When the Total interval is chosen the "Pass" / "Soft Fail" / "Hard Fail" indication only covers a duration matching the biggest of the predefined measurement intervals that is less than or equal to the current measurement time. I.e. errors occurred in the remaining time may exceed a threshold but they are excluded from the evaluation until covered by the next larger predefined interval. The Current interval cannot be selected on this result tab.

Display options

Clicking the softkey and then a parameter field will pop-up a histogram for the parameter. Clicking the softkey and then a parameter field will pop-up a zoomed result for the parameter.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-217

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet) This feature requires an Ethernet option to be installed.

Results from Ethernet measurement Ethernet measurement results are shown in section 4.31.1, Performance, section 4.31.2, Frame Stat, section 4.31.4, Size Distribution and section 4.31.5, Transmit Stat. Filter

Pressing the [Filter on/off] softkey will enable or disable the filter function, each time it is pressed. When the filter is enabled it will hide all non-failed intervals in the measurement - showing a list of failed only. This function is a common feature and available in all result lists shown in the following sections.

Status bar icons

For all screens found in the sub-tabs under the result list tab the icons shown below are available. Pressing the Graph icon at the status bar when the actual results are presented in the tabular form will launch another screen containing graphical presentation of the results. Press the Table icon at the status bar to return to the tabular presentation of the results. Clicking the History icon at the status bar followed by a parameter, will present results as a histogram function for that parameter. To print all pages beneath the Result folder, press printer icon shown. To print only the page shown, press the printer icon shown.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-218

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.1

Performance Result information about Ethernet performance is available from the Performance tab.

Fig. 4.195 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Performance.

Fig. 4.196 Graphical presentation of Ethernet Performance.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-219

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.2

Frame Stat From the Frame Stat tab Ethernet frame results are available. Referring to the screen below, a Fragmented Frame is a frame that is Undersized combined with FCS error. FCS= Frame Check Sequence.

Fig. 4.197 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Frame Stat.

Fig. 4.198 Graphical presentation of Ethernet Frame Stat.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-220

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.3

Burst Stat Result information about Ethernet Burst Stat is available from the Burst Stat tab.

Fig. 4.199 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Burst Stat.

Fig. 4.200 Graphical presentation of Ethernet Burst Stat results.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-221

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.4

Size Distribution Result information about Ethernet distribution is available from the Size distribution tab.

Fig. 4.201 Tabular presentation of Ethernet Size Distribution. The example shown in Fig. 4.202 is a compilation of information from top and bottom of the ‘Ethernet Size distribution’ screen you would see by using the scroll bar function in its full extension.

Fig. 4.202 Graphical presentation of Size Distribution.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-222

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.5

Transmit Stat Result information about Ethernet transmission and reception are available from the Transmit Stat tab.

Fig. 4.203 Tabular presentation of the Ethernet Transmit Stat. The ‘Total frames’ field informs about the difference between the transmitters and receivers.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-223

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.6

Multistream Transmit Stat This feature requires installation of the Ethernet Multistream option. Result information about Ethernet multistream transmission and reception are available from the Multistream Transmit Stat tab.

Fig. 4.204 Tabular presentation of the Multistream Transmit Stat.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-224

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.7

Multistream Throughput Stat This feature requires installation of the Ethernet Multistream option. Result information about number of transmitted/received frames and bytes for each individual multistream.

Fig. 4.205 Tabular presentation of the Multistream Throughput Stat.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-225

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.8

Multistream Frame Loss This feature requires installation of the Ethernet Multistream option. Result information about Frame Loss in the multistream transmission and reception are available from the Multistream Frame Loss tab.

Fig. 4.206 Graphical presentation of the Multistream Frame Loss.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-226

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.9

Multistream Latency/Jitter This feature requires installation of the Ethernet Multistream option. Result information about latency and jitter for each individual multistream.

Fig. 4.207 Tabular presentation of the Multistream Latency/Jitter.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-227

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.10

BERT – Alarms & Errors Result information about Ethernet Alarms and Errors are available from the BERT - Alarms & Errors tab.

Fig. 4.208 BERT – Ethernet Alarms & Errors screen - Scroll top.

Fig. 4.209 BERT – Ethernet Alarms & Errors screen - Scroll down.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-228

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.11

WAN – Alarms & Errors Information concerning errors and alarms on WAN lines are available from the WAN Alarms and Errors tab.

This feature requires installation of the Ethernet 10 Gbps option and the WAN option.

Fig. 4.210 WAN – Alarms & Errors screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-229

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.12

WAN – Performance Information concerning the WAN G.826, G.828+G.829 or M.2101.1 is available from the WAN Performance tab.

This feature requires installation of the Ethernet 10 Gbps option and the WAN option. The WAN performance parameters are selected on the Measurement > General page under the Application tab.

Fig. 4.211 WAN – Performance screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-230

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.13

WAN – Test Mode Information concerning the WAN Test (if seleced) is available from the WAN Test Mode tab. The tab is only shown if the PRBS 31 is selected.

This feature requires installation of the High speed Interface option and the WAN option. The WAN Test Mode is set on the Ethernet > Port Control page under the Interface tab.

Fig. 4.212 WAN – Test screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-231

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.14

SyncE This installation of the Synchronous Ethernet option.

Fig. 4.213 SyncE result screen SSM Stat.

Counts number of received and transmitter SSMs. Rx rate is average number of frames received per second.

Alarms

Server Signal Fault is set after five consecutive seconds with no received SSMs.

Rx SSM QL

Counters for all received QL values. Ratio is the percentage of the total received QL vales.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-232

4.31 Result > Result List (Ethernet)

4.31.15

IEEE 1588v2 This requires installation of the Synchronous Ethernet option.

Fig. 4.214 IEEE 1588v2 result screen. Port A is Master and port B is slave Offset Stat.

Offset between the slave and master. Shows the measured offset, the absolute offset and the offset deviation.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-233

4.31

Result > Result List (Ethernet)

Offset Variance

Shows the offset variance in s2. Calculated as per IEEE 1588-2008 section 7.6.3.2 with 32 samples

Mean Path Delay

Shows the mean path delay, for each delay mechanism separately.

Path Delay Variation

Measured packet delay jitter based on sync events.

Message Stat.

Counters for all transmitted and received PTP messages by type.

Clock State Stat.

Counts state transitions, state transition events, faults detected and number of grand master clock changes.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-234

4.32 Result > Result List (ATM)

4.32

Result > Result List (ATM) This feature requires the ATM option(s) to be installed. When measuring, the CMA 3000 will individually record cell statistics for 30 channels (vpi/vci pairs), empty cells and a sum of remaining cells (not covered by the mentioned 30 channels). Channels recorded will be foreground and background cells as defined in ATM Rx setup. If less than 30 are defined the CMA 3000 will automatically add the first VPI/VCI pairs received (after start of measurement) to the individual list until the list is full.

Filter

Pressing the [Filter on/off] softkey will enable or disable the filter function, each time it is pressed. When the filter is enabled it will hide all non-failed intervals in the measurement - showing a list of failed only. This function is a common feature and available in all result lists shown in the following sections.

4.32.1

ATM Alarms and Errors Screen displays all ATM alarms and errors for statistical measurement.

Fig. 4.215 Result screen showing ATM alarms and errors.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-235

4.32

Result > Result List (ATM)

Alarms

Loss of cell field lists number of seconds where loss of cell was detected.

Errors

HEC single field lists number of received cells containing a single HEC error. HEC multiple field lists number of received cells containing multiple HEC errors.

Foreground Alarms

The foreground errors and alarms refer to the user defined foreground VPI(OAM F4)/VCI(OAM F5) on the ATM setup page (2.8.1 and 2.8.2). VP_AIS field lists number of seconds where AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) is detected on foreground VP. VP_LOC field lists number of seconds where LOC (Loss Of Cell) is detected on foreground VP. VP_RDI field lists number of seconds where RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) is detected on foreground VP. VP_CC field lists number of seconds where CC (Continuity Check) is detected on foreground VP. VP_LB field lists number of seconds where LB (Loss of Backward Reporting Flow) is detected on foreground VP. The VC_XX alarms has the same meaning just for the foreground VC.

Foreground Errors

ERR PRBS: The number of detected PRBS errors on the foreground VCC.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-236

4.32 Result > Result List (ATM)

4.32.2

ATM Cell Statistics This page shows all ATM cell statistics for the statistical measurement.

Fig. 4.216 Result screen showing ATM cell statistics. Cell Statistics

Total Cells field lists the total number of cells. User Cells field lists number of user cells (PTI=000 or PTI=001). User Cells Congestion field lists number of user cells where congestion was observed (PTI=010 or PTI=011). OAM F5 Segmented field lists number of cells where PTI=100 OAM F5 End-to-End field lists number of cells where PTI=101 Resource Management field lists number of cells where PTI=110 Reserved Cells field lists number of cells where PTI=111 CLP=1 Cells field lists number of cells where CLP=1 (Cell Loss Priority) HEC Single field lists number of cells where a single HEC error is detected HEC Multiple field lists number of cells where a multiple HEC errors are detected

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-237

4.32

Result > Result List (ATM)

4.32.3

ATM VPI/VCI This page shows all ATM VPI/VCI for the statistical measurement - either all parameters for one channel or one parameter for all channels.

Fig. 4.217 Result screen showing ATM VPI/VCI channel results. Parameter results

When Channel is selected in the Display drop down box all parameters will be shown for the selected VPI/VCI. Total Cells field lists the total number of cells. User Cells field lists number of user cells (PTI=000 or PTI=001). User Cells Congestion field lists number of user cells where congestion was observed (PTI=010 or PTI=011). OAM F5 Segmented field lists number of cells where PTI=100. OAM F5 End-to-End field lists number of cells where PTI=101. Resource Management field lists number of cells where PTI=110. Reserved Cells field lists number of cells where PTI=111. CLP=1 Cells field lists number of cells where CLP=1 (Cell Loss Priority).

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-238

4.32 Result > Result List (ATM)

Fig. 4.218 Result screen showing ATM VPI/VCI parameter results. VPI/VCI results

When Parameter is selected in the Display drop down box all VPI/VCI's will show the parameter which is selected in the Name drop-down box. Total field shows the total number of cells for the selected parameter. Idle field shows number of idle cells. Rest field shows number of cells for the selected parameter which has a VPI/VCI that is different form idle and the listed VPI/VCI's on the list. The 225/44001 field in this example shows the number cells for the selected parameter.

4.32.4

ATM QoS This page shows the ATM QoS results for the statistical measurement. See figure below This page is only shown when QoS is selected as payload for one of the ATM Receivers.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-239

4.32

Result > Result List (ATM)

Fig. 4.219 ATM QoS results QoS Statistics • Errored Cells: Number of Errored cells •

Lost Cells: Number of Lost cells

•

Late Cells: Number Late cells

•

Misinserted Cells: Number of Misinserted cells

•

Cell Integrity Rate: Cells out of sequence

•

Sev. Err. Cell Block: Severely errored cell blocks

•

Minimum Delay: The smallest delay

•

Maximum Delay: The largest delay

•

Mean Delay: The mean delay

•

Cell Delay Variation: Difference between the smallest and the largest delay

•

CDV Distribution: Graph of the CDV

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-240

4.33

4.33

Result > Results VoIP Calls

Result > Results VoIP Calls This requires the VoIP Call Emulation option to be installed.

The 'VoIP Call Result' screen shows a list of calls that are answered or made while a measurement is running. The list only shows calls that are terminated during the measurement period. Ongoing calls are not shown in the list. When the Total interval is selected, summarizing statistics for all calls combined are available.

4.33.1

Total Call Info The 'Total Call Info' tab displays a summary of all completed calls.

Fig. 4.220 The Total Call Info result tab displayed The following information is presented: • Total - Total number of completed calls •

4.33.2

Incoming - Total number of incoming calls

•

Outgoing - Total number of outgoing calls

•

Succeeded - Total number of succeeded calls

•

Failed - Total number of failed calls

•

Call Duration - Shows call duration statistics of all completed calls

•

Answer Delay - Shows answer delay statistics of all completed calls

Total Call Quality

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-241

4.33

Result > Results VoIP Calls

The 'Total Call Quality' tab displays summary statistics of all completed calls.

Fig. 4.221 The Total Call Quality result tab displayed The following information is presented: • Total Bytes Received and Sent - Total number of sent and received bytes in all RTP packets •

Received Bytes - Total number of received bytes in all RTP packets

•

Sent Bytes - Total number of sent bytes in all RTP packets

•

Total Packets Received and Sent - Total number of sent and received RTP packets

•

Received Packets - Total number of received RTP packets

•

Sent Packets - Total number of sent RTP packets

•

QoS Packets - Total number of 'out of sequence' RTP packets in both directions

•

Lost Packets - Total number of missing RTP packets in both directions. This number may be negative if duplicate packets are received.

•

Packet Jitter - Minimum and Maximum packet delay for received/ sent RTP packets in milliseconds

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-242

4.33

Result > Results VoIP Calls

•

Packet RTT - Minimum and maximum round trip time in milliseconds

•

Voice Quality - Voice quality level for all calls calculated based on average MOS CQ and threshold values

Column description: • Min - Minimum number of received/sent bytes/packets per call

4.33.3

•

Avg - Average number of received/sent bytes/packets per call

•

Max - Maximum number of received/sent bytes/packets per call

•

Total - Number of received/sent bytes/packets in all calls

Total Voice Quality (Option) The 'Total Voice Quality' tab displays summary statistics of all completed calls.

Fig. 4.222 The Total Voice Quality result tab displayed The following information is presented: • MOS CQ - Estimated Conversational Quality MOS •

MOS LQ - Estimated Listening Quality MOS

•

MOS PQ - Estimated P.862 Score

•

MOS Nominal - The nominal maximum obtainable MOS score with the selected codec

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-243

4.33

Result > Results VoIP Calls

•

R Factor Conv - The Conversation Quality R-factor (R-CQ) is calculated including the effect of delay and recency

•

R Factor Listen - The Listening Quality R-factor (R-LQ) is calculated ignoring the effect of delay and recency

•

R Factor G.107 - Calculations based on ITU G.107 E-model

•

R Factor Burst - The average listening R-factor for the burst periods

•

R Factor Gap - The average listening R-factor for the gap periods

•

R Factor Nominal - The nominal maximum obtainable R-factor with the selected codec

•

Voice Quality - Voice quality level for all calls calculated based on average MOS CQ and threshold values

Column description: • Min - Minimum estimated quality of all calls on which quality was measured •

Avg - Average estimated quality of all calls on which quality was measured

•

Max - Maximum estimated quality of all calls on which quality was measured

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-244

4.33

4.33.4

Result > Results VoIP Calls

Call Info The ‘Call Info’ tab displays information of the currently selected call.

Fig. 4.223 The Call Info result tab displayed The following information is presented: •

State - Current state of the call.

•

Direction - Direction of the actual call.

•

Start time - Time when the call was started (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS)

•

Codec - The codec used for the call.

•

Answer delay - Delay between ring and call answer (DAY HH:MM:SS)

•

Silence - Silence suppression status (On/Off)

•

Call duration - Time elapsed since the call was answered till call was cleared. (DAY HH:MM:SS)

•

Call ID - Unique ID associated with each VoIP call.

•

Termination - Information concerning the termination of a call.

Refer to Info on page 4-171, for further information concerning the listed values shown in the window.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-245

4.33

Result > Results VoIP Calls

4.33.5

Call Log The 'Call Log' tab displays the message log of the currently selected call.

Fig. 4.224 The Call Log result tab displayed -> Indicates an incoming message Results VoIP Calls

Call Quality The ‘Call Quality’ tab displays statistics of the currently selected call.

Fig. 4.225 The Call Quality result tab displayed The following values are presented in the call quality screen: •

Bytes - Count of received/transmitted bytes in RTP packets

•

Packets - Count of received/transmitted RTP packets

•

Out of Sequence - The number of received packages, which are out of sequence during conversation.

•

Packet loss - Number of incoming packages not received.

•

Packet Jitter - The shortest delay for any incoming/outgoing package received by peer in msec. This information is reported in RTCP packages.

Refer to Quality on page 4-173, for further information concerning the listed values shown in the window.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-247

4.33

Result > Results VoIP Calls

4.33.7

Voice Quality (Option) The ‘Voice Quality’ tab displays statistics of the currently selected call.

Fig. 4.226 The Voice Quality result tab displayed Refer to Voice on page 4-174, for further information concerning the listed values shown in the window.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-248

4.34 Result > Result List (T1 Unframed)

4.34

Result > Result List (T1 Unframed) This feature requires the T1 Unframed option to be installed. The Alarms & Errors tab presents the statistic information of the measurement.

Fig. 4.227 T1 Unframed result

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-249

4.35

Result > IEEE 1588v2 Log

4.35

Result > IEEE 1588v2 Log This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option or the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option and the Synchronous Ethernet option.

Fig. 4.228 IEEE 1588v2 Log screen. Port B has Ext. log enabled. The IEEE 1588v2 Log shows changes to the clock, like a clock state change or a new grandmaster. The timestamp is taken from the internal instrument time. Ext. log When the extended log functionality is enabled all transmitted and received frames will be inserted into the log. ->

Means frame was sent from this port

Physical

Status > Physical This screen shows the current physical conditions of the received signal.The status parameters presented on the screen is dependent on the currently selected receiving interface.

4.36.1

2 Mbps Interface

E1

The Signal Level indicators show the attenuations of the currently received signals compared to a nominal signal. Please note that the nature of these levels depend on the Input Level setup for each receiver (Normal or Monitor). In Normal mode the attenuation is assumed to be caused by a cable, whereas in Monitor mode, linear attenuation is assumed. The actual bit rate and deviation from 2048000 Hz is shown for each of the receivers. The difference in bit rate of RxA with RxB as reference and the accumulated RxA-RxB frequency difference is displayed in the physical line. The information is presented as number of bits of difference detected over the accumulation period. This is important information to identify small frequency differences, which may not be visible by showing the current difference. The accumulated information is also available in the Interval measurements results, where the information is presented as total numbers of bits (or UI) and the deviation in ppm relative to the measurement time. The accumulated difference information is accumulated continuously. The accumulation is reset when measurement is started or when SHIFT + LED TRAP/RESET is pressed.

Propagation Delay

This presents a measurement of the delay from the transmitter to either of the receivers. The measurement requires transmission and reception of a PRBS-pattern, and the setup of the receiver must match the setup of the transmitter. The accuracy of the measurement is better in unframed mode than in framed mode. The maximum delay that can be determined correctly depends on both the unframed/framed mode setting and the number of time slots used to transmit the PRBS. Note that if the actual delay is greater than this limit, the results presented will be incorrect. See chapter 6, Specifications for exact specifications of the delay measurement limitations.

Pattern Bit Rate

Shows the effective bit rate of the patterns received. It is the number of pattern bits received per second.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-251

4.36

Status > Physical

4.36.2

E3/DS3 Interface This feature requires the E3/DS3 option to be installed.

E3/DS3

Signal level field shows the received signal level in dB. It is a combination of linear and cable attenuation. Deviation field shows the deviation from the nominal bit rate (E1:34368000bps,DS3:44736000bps) in ppm and bps. Bit rate field shows the current bit rate. Difference RxA-RxB field shows the difference RxA-RxB in ppm and bps. This value is only shown when both E3/DS3 receivers are on. Accumulated Diff. field shows the accumulated RxA-RxB in bits. This value is only shown when both E3/DS3 receivers are on. It can be reset using SHIFT+LED TRAP or by pressing the eraser in the status bar. Propagation Delay field - See “Propagation Delay” on page 251. Pattern Bit Rate field - See “Pattern Bit Rate” on page 251.

4.36.3

STM-1/4/16/64 Optical/Electrical Interface This feature requires the Enhanced SDH option to be installed, STM-64 requeres the High Speed Single or Dual Port option and the STM-64 option installed.

STM

Signal level (Optical) field shows the optical signal level is shown in dBm. Signal level (Electrical) field shows the value ‘Good’ if there is signal and ‘None’ if there is loss of signal. Deviation field shows the actual bit rate and deviation from the nominal bit rate (STM-1:155520000bps, STM-4:622080000bps, STM16:2488320000bps, STM-64:9953280000). Bit rate field shows the current bit rate. Difference RxA-RxB field - see Difference RxA-RxB in E3/DS3 above. Accumulated Diff. field- see Accumulated Diff. in E3/DS3 above. Propagation Delay field - See “Propagation Delay” on page 251.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-252

4.36

Status > Physical

Pattern Bit Rate field - See “Pattern Bit Rate” on page 251. Tx: When optical is selected this shows the maximum power the SFP module is capable of transmit

4.36.4

ATM Interface This feature requires the ATM option to be installed. When ATM is activated the lower part of the physical page is allocated to basic ATM information.

ATM

User Cells Total field shows the total number of received users cells (PTI=000 or PTI=001). Idle Cells Total field shows the number of received idle cells. HEC Cells Total field shows the number of received cells containing HEC error. These values can be cleared using SHIFT+LED TRAP or the eraser button on the status bar.

ATM VCC VPI/VCI

Actual Cell Rate field shows the number of cells per second on the foreground VCC. Used Bandwidth field shows the bandwidth the actual cell rate occupies.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-253

4.37

Status > Alarms and Errors

4.37

Status > Alarms and Errors Press Alarms and Errors tab available from the Status folder to open the screen shown in Fig. 4.229.

Fig. 4.229 Example shows 2 Mbps Alarms and Errors screen. Alarms and Errors appearing on the receivers are indicated on this screen by green, yellow or red LED icons. Red LED icon indicates an alarm appeared on the receiver(s). Yellow LED icon indicates an error appeared on the receiver(s). Green LED icon indicates a no trouble situation on the receiver(s).

Press the in the alarm trap since it was last reset.

to display alarms and errors

Press the and errors.

to only show current alarms

Press the to reset the alarm trap function. Alternatively press (SHIFT) followed by the (LED TRAP) key to reset the function.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-254

4.38

4.38

Status > ATM Alarms and Errors

Status > ATM Alarms and Errors This feature requires the ATM option to be installed. This page shows all ATM alarms and errors for the status page.

Fig. 4.230 ATM Alarms and Errors. Current Alarms & Errors

Higher order - indicates that the transport layer is not working properly. Loss of cell - Loss of cell (Loss of Cell Delineation) detected. HEC Single - ATM cell header with a single and correctable bit error detected. HEC Multiple - ATM cell header with multiple and incorrectly bit error detected.

Current Alarms VPI / VCI

Shows Current Alarms for the selected foreground VPI / VCI pair. VP_AIS - AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) is detected on foreground VP. VP_LOC - LOC (Loss Of Cell) is detected on foreground VP. VP_RDI - RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) is detected on foreground VP. VP_CC - CC (Continuity Check) is detected on foreground VP. VP_LB - LB (Loss of Backward Reporting Flow) is detected on foreground VP. VC_AIS - AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) is detected on foreground VC. VC_LOC - LOC (Loss Of Cell) is detected on foreground VC. VC_RDI - RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) is detected on foreground VC. VC_CC - CC (Continuity Check) is detected on foreground VC. VC_LB - LB (Loss of Backward Reporting Flow) is detected on foreground VC. LSS - Loss of Sequence Synchronization is detected. ERR PRBS - PRBS errors on the foreground VCC is detected.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-255

4.39

Status > ATM IMA

4.39

Status > ATM IMA This feature requires the ATM over E1 option to be installed. If ATMoE1 receivers are active, a ATM IMA status display will be available. The IMA status page contains an IMA ICP cell capture part, and an IMA cell statistic part.

ICP Capture

The ICP capture screen is capable of showing one ICP cell at a time. When pressing the [Details] softkey, a popup with decoded information for the selected value is shown. To close the popup press close.

Refresh key

Click the [Refresh] softkey, to refresh the ICP capture screen ones.

Follow key

Click the [Follow] softkey, to refresh the ICP capture screen continuously.

IMA Cell Statistics

This part of the display contains 3 counters which counts: •

Total number of IMA cells received on the selected receiver

•

Number of Filler cells received

•

Number of ICP cells received

The counters are updated regardless of a measurement is running or not, they are automatically reset when another interface is selected for the selected receiver. Reset key

Click the [Reset] softkey, manually reset the counters. Pressing [Shift] + [LED TRAP] will also reset the counters.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-256

4.40

4.40

Status > SDH Capture

Status > SDH Capture This feature requires the Enhanced SDH option to be installed. If SDH receivers are active, a SDH capture display will be available. Selecting the SDH capture from the Status folder will launch the SDH screen as shown in the example Fig. 4.231.

Fig. 4.231 Example showing SDH capture results. The SDH capture screen is capable of showing one frame at a time. By using the softkeys [Frame 00 - 07] ... [Frame 56 - 63] in combination with the numeric softkeys [x0] ... [x7] as a matrix selection, it is possible to select specific frame to display. The example shown in Fig. 4.231 displays the captured information for Frame 00. Refresh key

Clicking the [Refresh] softkey, will refresh the screen information ones.

Follow key

Clicking the [Follow] softkey, will refresh the screen information continuously.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-257

4.40

Status > SDH Capture

Frame information

Detailed overhead byte information is available by pointing and pressing the overhead byte you want to see details for. This will launch a separate pop-up screen. An example is shown in Fig. 4.232. Press the [Close] softkey at the bottom of the detailed frame information screen to close it.

Fig. 4.232 Detailed frame information launched.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-258

4.41 Status > Alignment

4.41

Status > Alignment The Alignment screen accessible from the Status folder, gives information on the frame alignment when available. The frame alignment information includes the 16 first FAS/NFAS words of the CRC4 multiframe.

Fig. 4.233 Alignment example If multiframe is not available, the frame information will show 16 FAS/ NFAS words in sequence. Cx:

Cyclic Redundancy Check bits.

E:

Bits used to indicate received faulty sub-multiframes.

A.:

Remote alarm indication.

Sa:

Spare bits reserved for national use.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-259

4.42

Status > CAS

4.42

Status > CAS The CAS screen accessible from the Status folder, gives information on the CAS signaling when available. This screen displays the state of the four signaling bits in both directions for all 30 channels. Activity is indicated with bold characters (to reset, press LED RESET).

Fig. 4.234 The CAS screen.

CAS MFAS-Signal

This field shows the status of the CAS MFAS-Signal

CAS Bits, RxA and RxB

This field shows the status of the CAS Bits in the RxA and RxB.

Set red pattern

For easy recognition of special bit combinations, coloring is available. Press the Set red pattern field to launch the setup shown in Fig. 4.235.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-260

4.42 Status > CAS

Fig. 4.235 Red pattern setup menu launched. The red pattern consists of four binary digits. The minimum and the maximum acceptable value is 0000 and 1111, respectively. To increase the binary word stepwise in binary ones (1), press the [+] softkey. To decrease the binary word stepwise in binary ones (1), press the [-] softkey. Use the softkeys [->] and [ Traffic

4.43

Status > Traffic The Traffic screen accessible from the Status folder, shows the activity of the speech channels represented on the 2 Mbps line.

Fig. 4.236 Traffic screen. With A-law systems, busy / idle is displayed. With GSM systems, the different channels are displayed according to their TRAU frame type (speech, data or O&M). Two dBm meters show the volume of the currently selected audio channel - (RxA - RxB). The current audio channel is marked with an yellow cursor, point out on the time slot or use Navigator keys to move the marker. Pressing this softkey will convert the screen to display the time slot content. Use this softkey to get back to the traffic display again.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-262

4.43 Status > Traffic

Icon

PCM description Flags detected in currently selected signaling channel No flags detected in currently selected signaling channel Flags detected in not assigned signaling channel No flags detected in not assigned signaling channel Shown during measurement only Channel activity

Icon

A-bis description Speech Speech Enhanced Full Rate Speech Half Rate (16 kbit/s) Speech AMR Data O&M (Operation and Maintenance) Speech in only one direction Signalling channel Channel activity

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-263

4.43

Status > Traffic

Pressing the [TS Content] softkey will convert the screen to display the time slot content.

Fig. 4.237 Traffic screen displaying ‘TS Content’.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-264

4.44

4.44

Status > Audio

Status > Audio Pressing the Audio tab from the Status folder will launch the Audio Channel screen shown in Fig. 4.238.

Fig. 4.238 Audio Channel screen. Content

The received line content. For sub-rates this field shows the content of the subchannel.

Content (Even Bit Inv.)

The received line content with even bits inverted. With A-law coded speech it is possible to observe the A-law code words before the evenbit inverting.

Peak Level and Frequency

The peak value of the signal. This only applies for A-law speech and it represents the largest received A-law coded value.

Level

The level of the audio signal is shown here.

Frequency

The frequency of the audio signal is shown here.

Coder offset

The coder offset is also presented if the time slot displayed is a normal 64 kbit/s time slot (i.e. the coder offset is not presented for 16 or 8 kbit/s sub-rate channels). If the Abis functionality option is installed additional information is displayed: Trau frame type, and in case the Trau frame type is AMR data rate information is shown in the other C-Bits parameter.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-265

4.45

Status > Frame Relay

4.45

Status > Frame Relay This feature requires the Frame relay option to be installed. Pressing the Frame relay tab from the Status folder will launch the screen shown in Fig. 4.239.

Fig. 4.239 Frame relay status screen. LMI Type

Indicates the state and/or type of the LMI.

Integrity Verify count

The count of received link integrity verification status frames.

Full Status Report count

The count of received full status report frames.

Send seq. no.

Send sequence number in the last received status frame. A correct/incorrect sequence number is indicated by the green or red background.

Receive seq. no.

The receive sequence number in the last received status frame. A correct/incorrect sequence number is indicated by the green or red background, respectively.

Show DLCI report

Displays information about each PVC included in the full status report. If the full status report contains more than eight PVC's, then use the up/ down cursor keys to scroll through all the PVC's. If the full status report contains LLCP, then use the left/right cursor keys to scroll through all the parameters (will be presented in the right most column). Press the [Request full status report] softkey to request for status report.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-266

4.46 Status > V-Series

4.46

Status > V-Series This feature requires the V-Series interface option to be installed. Selecting V-Series Interface Control Signals tab from the Status folder will launch the status screen shown in Fig. 4.240.

Fig. 4.240 The V-Series status screen. From this Control Signals status screen indications of the present control signals for the selected data interface will be presented. The signals will reflect the LEDs on the top of the instrument, completed by more detailed information.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-267

4.47

Status > Ethernet Interface

4.47

Status > Ethernet Interface This feature requires an Ethernet option to be installed.

4.47.1

Ethernet Interface > Interface Status Selecting Interface Status tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.241.

Fig. 4.241 Ethernet Interface Status screen. In the example shown above in Fig. 4.241 the screen presents key interface status indicators. These indicators are gives a quick overview of the condition of the lines. The optical status screen is shown in Fig. 4.242. Here the status parameters for the optical ethernet will be presented.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-268

4.47 Status > Ethernet Interface

4.47.2

Ethernet Interface > Optical Status SFP Selecting Ethernet - Optical Status SFP tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.242. The tab will only be available if an optical SFP interface is active on at least one port.

This requires installation of the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option or High Speed Interface option.

Fig. 4.242 Ethernet Optical Status SFP screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-269

4.47

Status > Ethernet Interface

4.47.3

Ethernet Interface > Optical Status XFP Selecting Ethernet - Optical Status XFP tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.243. The tab will only be available if an optical XFP interface is active on at least one port.

This requires installation of the Ethernet 10Gbps option.

Fig. 4.243 Ethernet Optical Status XFP screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-270

4.47 Status > Ethernet Interface

4.47.4

Ethernet Interface > WAN - Alarms and Errors Selecting Ethernet – WAN – Alarms and Errors tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.244. The tab will only be available if WAN is active on at least one port.

This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option and the WAN option.

Fig. 4.244 Example shows WAN Alarms and Errors screen For more please see Status > Alarms and Errors section.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-271

4.47

Status > Ethernet Interface

4.47.5

Ethernet Interface > WAN - Capture Selecting Ethernet – WAN – Capture tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.245. The tab will only be available if WAN is active on at least one port.

This requires installation of the Ethernet 10Gbps option and the WAN option.

Fig. 4.245 Example showing WAN Capture screen The WAN capture screen is capable of showing one frame at a time. By using the softkeys [Frame 00 - 07] ... [Frame 56 - 63] in combination with the numeric softkeys [x0] ... [x7] as a matrix selection, it is possible to select specific frame to display. Refresh key

Clicking the [Refresh] softkey, will refresh the screen information ones.

Follow key

Clicking the [Follow] softkey, will refresh the screen information continuously.

Frame information

Detailed overhead byte information is available by pointing and pressing the overhead byte you want to see details for. This will launch a separate pop-up screen. An example is shown in Fig. 4.246.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-272

4.47 Status > Ethernet Interface

Press the [Close] softkey at the bottom of the detailed frame information screen to close it.

Fig. 4.246 Detailed frame information launched.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-273

4.47

Status > Ethernet Interface

4.47.6

Ethernet Interface > Timing This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option and the Synchronous Ethernet option. Selecting Timing tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.247

Fig. 4.247 Ethernet Timing status screen Timing

Timing source Shows the status of the currently selected timing source. In parenthesis the currently selected source is displayed and the status is indicated with a LED icon. Red means that it is not possible to use the currently selected timing source. Green means that the timing source signal is ok. Black means that the internal clock of the instrument is used as source. Reference source Shows the status of the currently selected reference source. In parenthesis the currently selected source is displayed and the status is indicated with a LED icon.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-274

4.47 Status > Ethernet Interface

Red means that it is not possible to use the currently selected reference source. Green means that the timing reference signal is ok. Black means that the internal clock of the instrument is used for reference. Bit rate

Current Shows the current received bit rate in bits per second. Difference Shows the current difference between the received signal and the reference source signal in part per million and bits per second. Accumulated Diff Shows the accumulated difference between the received signal and the reference source signal in bits. Press (SHIFT) followed by (LED TRAP) key to reset the accumulated difference.

4.47.7

Ethernet Interface > SyncE This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option or the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option and the Synchronous Ethernet option. Selecting SyncE tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.248

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-275

4.47

Status > Ethernet Interface

Fig. 4.248 Ethernet SyncE status screen SSM/QL

Last received Shows the latest QL value. SSF Server signal fail. Becomes red when no ESMC message has been received within the last five seconds.

4.47.8

Ethernet Interface IEEE 1588v2 This requires installation of the High Speed Interface option or the Ethernet 10/100/1000 option and the Synchronous Ethernet option. Selecting IEEE 1588v2 tab from the Status folder will launch a status screen as shown in Fig. 4.249

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-276

4.47 Status > Ethernet Interface

Fig. 4.249 Ethernet IEEE 1588v2 status screen Local clock

State The current clock state. Offset The current offset from the master clock. Mean path delay Time from master to slave back to master again, divided by two. Sync timeout Becomes red if no Sync Message's has been received within five times the Sync interval.

Wall clock

UTC The current UTC time. Requires an external GPS receiver. Port offset (A-B) The offset between the two clocks. Current The current wall clock time.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-277

4.47

Status > Ethernet Interface

UTC offset The offset between the wall clock and UTC time. Parent clock

Identity The identity of the parent clock.

Grandmaster clock

Port number The port number of the parent clock. Identity The identity of the grandmaster. Class The class of the grandmaster. Accuracy The accuracy of the grandmaster. Offset variance The offset variance of the grandmaster. Shows both the announced value and a calculated estimate. Shown in s2. Priority 1/2 Priority 1 and 2 of the grandmaster.

Foreign masters

Identity A list of detected foreign masters. Port number Port number of the currently selected foreign master. Announce count Number of received Announce Message's from currently selected foreign master.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-278

4.48 Status > T1 Unframed

4.48

Status > T1 Unframed This feature requires an T1 Unframed option to be installed.

4.48.1

Status -> Physical This screen shows the current physical conditions of the received signal.

Fig. 4.250 T1 Unframed Status Physical

Signal Level

The Signal Level indicators show either a green indicator (Signal OK), or a red indicator (No Signal).

Deviation, Bit Rate, Driiference, and Accumulated Diff.

The actual bit rate and deviation from 1544000 Hz is shown for each of the receivers. The difference in bit rate of RxA with RxB as reference and the accumulated RxA-RxB frequency difference are displayed in as well.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-279

4.48

Status > T1 Unframed

The information is presented as number of bits of difference detected over the accumulation period. The accumulated information is also available in the Interval measurements results, where the information is presented as total numbers of bits (or UI) and the deviation in ppm relative to the measurement time. The accumulated difference information is accumulated continuously. The accumulation is reset when measurement is started or when SHIFT + LED TRAP/RESET is pressed.

Propagation Delay

This presents a measurement of the delay from the transmitter to either of the receivers. The measurement requires transmission and reception of a PRBS-pattern, and the setup of the receiver must match the setup of the transmitter The resolution of the measurement is 1 us. The maximum delay that can be determined correctly, depends on the order of the PRBS pattern. Note that if the actual delay is greater than this limit, the results presented will be incorrect.

Pattern Bit Rate

Shows the effective bit rate of the received pattern. It is the number of pattern bits received per second. Because only unframed T1 is supported, the value is identical to the bit rate.

Status -> Alarms and Errors

Press Alarms and Errors tab available from the Status folder to open this screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-280

4.48 Status > T1 Unframed

Fig. 4.251 T1 Unframed Status Alarms & Errors Alarms and Errors appearing on the receivers are indicated on this screen by green, yellow or red LED icons. Please refer to the Status -> Alarms and Errors section in the CMA 3000 User Guide for more information.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-281

4.49

Misc. > Quick Start

4.49

Misc. > Quick Start Please refer to section 4.2, Quick Start regarding this function.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-282

4.50

4.50

Misc. > Stored Measurement

Misc. > Stored Measurement The Stored measurement screen available from the Miscellaneous folder contains information about any stored measurement, e.g. start and stop time, file size and its file name.

Fig. 4.252 Stored measurement information screen. Update list

Pressing the [Update list] softkey refreshes the list of stored measurements.

Expand

Pressing the [Expand] softkey will either expand or collapse the list of stored measurements, respectively. In the expanded mode both start and stop times will be presented as well as the file size.

USB Memory

Pressing the [Import] or [Export] softkey will connect to the USB connector allowing import or export of stored measurements from another memory source, e.g. an external USB memory stick.

FrontSim

Pressing the [Import] or [Export] softkey will import or export measurements to/from the FrontSim, respectively. The directory where the files are transferred to/from can be managed by clicking the ‘Folder’ icon placed at the top right on the FrontSim screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-283

4.50

Misc. > Stored Measurement

Measurement

The following actions are available for a measurement selected from the list: • Load the measurement by pressing the [Load] softkey •

Rename the measurement by pressing the [Rename] softkey

•

Insert or edit comments to a selected measurement by pressing the [Comment] softkey. Press the keyboard icon to insert or edit the text data.

•

Delete the measurement by pressing the [Delete] softkey

•

Delete all measurements (the selected included) by pressing the [Delete all] softkey

The ‘speech balloon’ symbol figuring in the name column indicates that there are comments added to the measurement. Click the symbol to see or edit the comments. The comment function is also available from the Result > Measurement Information on page 4-204.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-284

4.51 Misc. > Print Setup

4.51

Misc. > Print Setup The CMA 3000 instrument is able to generate hardcopies of measurements, instrument setups, and status information. A dedicated setup allows hardcopy prints of ‘Results from 2 Mbps interfaces’ to be printed directly to a serial printer. All other results and status may be prepared as a PDF document on an USB memory stick or written directly to a connected USB printer. Alternatively it may be generated as a XML file (on an USB memory stick) for further editing, e.g. as input for a worksheet. In addition to that, the hardcopy may be send to a remotely connected PC. The following section 4.51.1, 2Mbps Print Setup and section 4.51.2, PDF Print Setup describes how to setup print from the Misc. -> Print setup folder. Activating printing directly from a Result or Status screen is described in section 4.51.3, Activating Print Setup Directly From a Screen.

4.51.1

2Mbps Print Setup This setup is dedicated print results recorded on the 2 Mbps interfaces. It covers serial printers connected to the serial ‘IOIOI’ connector located on the left panel of the CMA 3000 instrument. Selecting the Print setup from the Misc. folder will launch the screen shown in Fig. 4.253.

Fig. 4.253 The Print setup screen.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-285

4.51

Misc. > Print Setup

Type

Use the Type field to choose which screen to print. Select Result to printout the result screen or Status to printout the status screen.

Filter

Press the Filter field and use the launched drop-down menu to select between: Print All, Skip Error Free, Skip Identical, Skip Error Free and Identical, Print using Display filter.

Start Printing

After the printout screen is chosen - press the [Start Printing] softkey to start the printout. When the printout is activated the softkey changes to a [Stop Printing] softkey - allowing a cancellation of the activated print job.

4.51.2

PDF Print Setup From the Logo Image section it is possible to select default logo or import a logo to go with your printout document. You can also assign a description to the document.

Logo Image

Description

To import your own logo used for printout, do: •

Have your logo saved in jpg-format (120 x 80 pixels) to an USB memory stick or on the PC accessible from Front Sim.

•

Press the [Import logo] or [Import FrontSim] softkey and select the logo from the pop-up screen.

To assign a description to your printout document, do: •

Press the [keyboard] softkey and type in the title you want to add to your printout.

•

Press the [Accept] softkey to accept.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-286

4.51 Misc. > Print Setup

4.51.3

Activating Print Setup Directly From a Screen The following example will describe how to printout SDH Alarms and Errors from the Result folder: •

Connect a USB storage device to a free USB port on the CMA 3000

•

Select Result folder and then SDH Alarms and Errors to launch the result screen as shown in Fig. 4.254.

Fig. 4.254 SDH Alarms and Errors screen launched. Whenever a hardcopy is possible the hardcopy printer icons will be presented on the status bar. To print only the page shown (SDH Alarms and Errors screen), press the print icon shown. The icon appears on the status bar. To print all pages beneath the Result folder, press print all icon shown. The icon appears on the status bar. When pressing a hardcopy icon various selections will be presented from the launched printout menu. Depending on the hardcopy type some parts of the menu fields may be hidden or disabled. A theoretical full menu would look like the one shown in Fig. 4.255.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-287

4.51

Misc. > Print Setup

Fig. 4.255 Printout menu for Log measurement. Receivers

You may enable or disable individual receivers. Disabling both receivers may be used to get measurement setup.

Destination

Destination can be selected as USB Memory Stick, USB Printer, or FrontSim.

FrontSim can only be selected during remote access. Format

The normal Format is PDF. In connection with statistics also XML is available.

This box will only be shown when XML format is available. Setup

A check mark in the Setup box will enable the function of including the measurement setup during printout. If the measurement consists of more PDF-files, only the very last file will contain the measurement setup.

Comment

When checked a comment section is inserted to the printout.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-288

4.51 Misc. > Print Setup

Printout type

From the drop-down menu next to the Include Setup box, it is possible to select different printouts. E.g. during log measurement the user may select: Log current page, printing the content on the screen. Log all pages, printing the whole measurement. Log selected interval, printing the selected interval print from - print to. Log follows measurement, printing the followed ongoing measurement.

If the Log follows measurement is selected, it is possible to start the hardcopy directly, or be pending for a start of the measurement. If the instrument is doing a log-measurement at the time the ‘Log Follows Measurement’ hardcopy is activated, the hardcopy will start immediately by selecting the very last message in the log-buffer, and continuing from that point. If no measurement is running when the ‘Log Follows Measurement’ hardcopy is activated, the instrument will end up in a pending state awaiting the user to start a measurement. During this time the printer icon will be animated.

Fig. 4.256 Animated icon during pending state. You may stop the pending hardcopy be pressing the icon. Name

From the Name field it is possible to insert custom information, describing the file contents. However, the file names are generated automatically by the hardcopy software - it may be convenient to apply custom information.

Fig. 4.257 Name field. The full name consists of the following: [.].[.][.].

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-289

4.51

Misc. > Print Setup

The possible value of each field is described below:

only used when printing to FrontSim.



CIR-test, PING-test, Log-CurPage, Log-Follows, LogInterval, Log-Total, Statistic-Total, Statistic-Interval and others.



This is an optional field totally defined by the user, assigned at the Name field.

Only letters, digits and dash (-) may be used in the username.

This only used by statistical measurements and only if a single page is printed out. (example: 2Mbps_G821).



Date and time given as year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and eventual 1/1000 second. yyyy-mm-dd.hhmm-ss[.mmm] 1/1000 second solution is only used in Log-file hardcopy.



pdf or xml

If possible, the whole hardcopy will be contained in one file. However in connection with Log-file hardcopy, the measurement may be split into several files. Each file will in this case get the field filled from the very first log-entry in each file. If the hardcopy is split over more files, only the very last file will contain the measurement setup, if selected. Print from/Print to

By setting up these values, an interval is defined from which the printing will be made.

Printer process running

While the printer process is running, a ‘Please wait’ pop-up screen is displayed, indicating that printing is in progress and that any other task cannot be performed meanwhile.

Fig. 4.258 Please wait pop-up launched during printing. If the hardcopy will take a longer time to perform, the hardcopy icon will be animated during the hardcopy.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-290

4.51 Misc. > Print Setup

Fig. 4.259 The animated printer icon Stopping process

During a running printer process while showing the animation the user may press the animated icon. In this way the user gets the option to stop a running hardcopy or a pending hardcopy.

Fig. 4.260 Stop printer process menu.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-291

4.51

Misc. > Print Setup

4.51.4

Printing Directly to a USB Printer The CMA 3000 supports printing directly to a printer connected through the USB interface. Most Hewlett-Packard printers with a USB interface are supported. When a supported printer is connected the icon shown below will appear on the status bar. Pressing this printer icon, opens the screen shown in Fig. 4.261.

Fig. 4.261 Printer status/cancel pop-up. From the screen it is possible to cancel the currently printing report, or all reports queued for printing. If there are pending reports to print, but no printer connected, the printer icon on the status bar line will flash.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-292

4.51 Misc. > Print Setup

4.51.5

Loading a File From the USB Memory Stick If the destination for the printer file is selected to be the USB Memory Stick - the generated file found on it will be in PDF. To read a PDF file (Portable Document Format) document - your PC needs to have an Adobe Acrobat Reader installed. To load and view a saved file from the USB memory Stick: •

Insert the USB device into a free USB port on your PC, and open it from your browser by double-clicking on it.

Fig. 4.262 Printout example.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-293

4.52

Misc. >Touch Screen Calibrate

4.52

Misc. >Touch Screen Calibrate Selecting the Touch Screen Calibrate from the Misc. folder drop-down menu, will launch the test screen shown in Fig. 4.263. This calibration will secure the precision of the positioning and individual distances of elements displayed on the screen. This screen is also displayed when the instrument is started totally clean i.e. after installation of new software.

Fig. 4.263 Touch Screen Calibration screen launched. Press the centre of the ‘fore sight’ figure appearing in the upper left corner and when it moves to the lower right corner of the screen, press it again. The the instrument is ready for normal use after this calibration. If you do not succeed to press the centre of the ‘fore sight’ figure close enough - press the ‘ESC’ key on the front of the CMA 3000 to start over again.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-294

4.53

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

Misc. > System Configuration The System configuration tab contains status information about the instrument, as well as setup parameters for e.g. interface communication.

4.53.1

Instrument Information The Instrument Information screen shown in Fig. 4.264 will be launched when selected from the scroll bar on the left.

Fig. 4.264 Instrument Information screen launched. The following information is presented on the status screen: • The instruments Serial Number • Version Number of the software, the hardware and the mechanics used • List of Options Installed • List of Protocols Installed Pressing the [Details] softkey opens a pop-up screen with detailed information concerning software, hardware and mechanics. Whenever the FrontSim program is connected to the CMA 3000, two additional buttons will be shown.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-295

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

[SW Upd.]

it is possible to remotely update the instrument SW via the FrontSim program. After pressing this button, you will be given the choice to select an update from the Transfer Directory defined in FrontSim.

[Info Exp.]

Any logged crash dumps may be exported via FrontSim. In case of any chrashes, they will be transferred to the Transfer Directory defined in FrontSim and removed from the internal log.

4.53.2

Service Interfaces Pressing the Service Interfaces field located on the left scroll bar in the System Configuration screen, will open the information setup screen relating to the interface.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-296

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

Fig. 4.265 Service Interfaces screen launched. Use

If the the V.24 service interface is used for a serial printer, or for an external GPS sensor (see 3.10).

Baud rate

Press the Baud rate field menu and select the baud rate from the appearing drop-down menu. Select between the following: 300, 1200, 2400, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600 and 115200. Press the [Change baud rate] softkey to activate selected baud rate. Note: The Baud rate fields are not shown when "GPS sensor" is selected, as the baud rate is fixed in that case.

DHCP/Static IP

Select the IP address type by pressing either DHCP or Static IP. Choose DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) if you prefer the network to automatically assign an IP-address. Choose Static IP when a fixed IP-address is dedicated to your CMA 3000 - and you know the exact address.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-297

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

IP Address

From the IP Address field menu it is possible to define the IP address for interfacing with the CMA 3000. Acceptable addresses between 1.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255. Press the [...] menu field - to launch a numeric key pad as shown in Fig. 4.266. Key in the address, using the numeric softkeys. It is possible to move the active cursor point by using the of the [>] and [ System Configuration

Display Setup The Display Setup screen is launched when selected from the scroll bar at the left pane. From this screen it is possible to define the intensity of the TFT display’s back light. It is also possible to enable the screen saver and define the time before launch.

Fig. 4.268 The Display Setup screen launched. Backlight

To set the back light intensity, press the knob on the slide-bar and move it to the right to increase light level or to the left to decrease the light level. Leave at the level you may find convenient.

When the backlight is increased, the battery time is decreased. Screen saver

To activate the screen saver, press the [arrow up] softkey several times or press until the display reads the number of minutes you want. It is possible to set the wait time from 0 to 99 minutes.

Disable

To disable the screen saver, either press the [arrow down] softkey until the display read 0 (zero), alternatively press the [Disable] softkey.

Test

Pressing the [Test] softkey, will activate the screen saver immediately.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-299

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

4.53.4

Global Configuration The Global Configuration screen is launched when selected from the scroll bar at the left.

Receiver Labels

From this screen it is possible to define alternative names for the receiver labels RxA and/or RxB throughout all the program screens.

Fig. 4.269 The Global Configuration screen launched. From the drop-down menus, it is possible to select pre-defined alternative names from the list, or if selecting Custom from the list - a completely customized name. After selecting Custom, click the [keyboard] softkey to open the screen keyboard to enter a specific name at your choice. Front Buttons on Screen

If putting a check in the Show start/stop button box and/or Show error button box the symbols shown below will appear on the status bar.

Menu

If the Show inactive menu items field is selected all inactive menus will be shown in the tabs on the screen. If this field is left non-selected all inactive menu items will be unlisted in the tabs.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-300

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

If the Gray-out inactive menu items field is selected (this is only selectable when the Show inactive menu items field is enabled) all inactive menus will be shown in the tabs on the screen in dimmed text. If the Intelligent Menus field is selected then when pressing one of the menu buttons in top of the screen the last active page from the menu will shown. If pressing the menu button one more time the menu is shown. For the Misc. menu this feature can be set separately.

Start up

If you want the CMA 3000 to automatically load the last measurement at start up, set a check in the Load last measurement box. If you want the CMA 3000 to show the page that was active when the instrument was switched off when switched back on, check the Restore active page box.

Measurement/Test Saving Mode

From the Measurement/Test Saving Mode field is possible to select in which mode the test performed, is saved. Modes are: Auto, Manual or None. If the Ask for name when saving field is selected the user will be asked to name the measurement file when saving.

Fig. 4.270 Set measurement name [Set] will save the file with the specified name. Keep Original will save the file with its default name.

LED indicators

From the Layout drop-down menu it is possible to decide whether the LED indicator overlay should be shown as Normal or as Slim. See LED Indicators on page 3-6 for details. From the V-Series Mode drop-down menu it is possible to select whether the LED indicators are shown as Green/Off or Green/Red.

Alerts

If the Beep on Alarms & Errors field is selected the CMA 3000 loudspeaker will beep each time an alarm or error are detected.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-301

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

Load Setup with Measurement

Select how to handle the load of the setup part stored when loading a measurement.

Battery Time Optimize

This field is only shown when certain combinations of hardware options are installed in the CMA 3000.

Fig. 4.271 Optional fields on the Global Configuration screen. You may need to use the scrollbar to view these. When the Turn off unused HW box is checked, parts of the CMA 3000 hardware will be powered down, depending on the interface currently in use. The drawback is that some time (a few seconds) is needed to reactivate hardware that has been powered down. Note: Some hardware options are always powered down when not in use, while others cannot be powered down at all. Therefore, the availability of the Battery Time Optimize box depends on the actual hardware configuration.

Instrument On/Off mode

The On/off follows AC-power option is intended for CMA 3000 instruments that are used in permanent test setups, e.g. under remote control, where it is preferable that the instrument becomes operable whenever power is applied from the AC mains adapter. When the external power source is removed, the CMA 3000 will power itself down. Operation on battery power is thus not possible. This field is only shown when the On/off follows AC-power option is installed in the CMA 3000. Please contact Anritsu A/S for information about available options for the CMA 3000. The Instrument On/Off mode field makes at possible to choose the instrument behaviour when the On/off follows AC-power option is installed. When the Turn on when power is applied box is checked (the default), the CMA 3000 behaves as described above. When the box is unchecked, the CMA 3000 behaves as if the option was not installed, i.e. the On/Off key must be pressed to turn on the instrument, and battery powered operation becomes possible.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-302

4.53

4.53.5

Misc. > System Configuration

Local Access Configuration

Fig. 4.272 The Local Access Configuration screen launched Mode

Password protection disabled – Means that nothing is password protected. Password protection enabled – Means that you cannot change anything without knowing the instrument password.

Change Password

Use these fields to change this instrument password. Password protection will prevent any unauthorised change in the instrument settings. Furthermore the protection will prevent any unauthorised starting, stopping, or turning off the instrument.

4.53.6

Remote Access Configuration The Remote Access Configuration screen is launched when selected from the scroll bar at the left. From this screen it is possible to define the access to the instrument e.g. by setting and changing user name and password.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-303

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

Fig. 4.273 The Remote Access Configuration screen launched. Remote Control

Here it is possible to select between Ethernet and GPIB remote control. When Ethernet is chosen the port number can be set and the use of prompt can be selected. When GPIB is chosen the device ID can be set.

RFC2544

Allow remote connection from RFC2544 master – This box must be checked for the instrument to be used as RFC2544 slave.

FrontSim

Logon Mode: Allow remote access – This box must be checked in order to allow FrontSim Connection. Mode: If No protection is selected any remote access will terminate and take over any ongoing access without warning. If Logon with user name is selected it is not possible to take over any ongoing access (except you are actually administrator). If Logon with user name and password is selected it is not possible to take over any ongoing access. Furthermore you must know one of the normal or administrator passwords.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-304

4.53

Misc. > System Configuration

Enter password

Here it is possible to establish yourself as either normal user or as administrator. This field must be set before you can change any passwords, except after a software update where no passwords are actually defined.

Change passwords

Here it is possible to change the user and administrator passwords. You must be an administrator in order to change the administrator password.

It is always possible to take over a remote connection as administrator, except if the currently connected user is actually an administrator himself. During remote access some instrument setting are locked, except if you are an administrator. These are settings are positioned on this page and on the ‘Service Interface’. After entering or changing the password(s), press [Change normal password] or [Set admn. password] softkey to accept the settings.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-305

4.54

Misc. > Front Panel Buttons

4.54

Misc. > Front Panel Buttons Choosing the Front Panel Buttons from the Misc. drop-down menu will launch a screen that contains softkeys of the physical operation keys from the front panel. The work the exactly same way as the ‘real’ keys on the front. Press the [Close Frontpanel] softkey to shut down this function.

Fig. 4.274 The soft version of the front panel keys.

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-306

4.54

Misc. > Front Panel Buttons

This page intentionally left blank

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-307

4.54

Misc. > Front Panel Buttons

CMA 3000, Graphical User Interface 4-308

5

Specifications

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-1

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument This section contains specifications for the CMA 3000 basic instrument.

5.1.1

2 Mbps interface, Transmitters The interface complies with ITU-T recommendations G.703 for 2 Mbps. Unbalanced connector is either of BNC type or Siemens 1.6/5.6 (as specified by the user). Balanced connector is of BNO type. The 2 Mbps interface contains two identically transmitters.

Impedance

Input impedances supported 75Ω (unbalanced), 120Ω (balanced).

Clocks

• • • •

Line Code

HDB3 or AMI (user selectable).

Framing

Unframed or Framed FAS/nFAS. Sa-bits (non-FAS) are user programmable

Drop and insert

The instrument supports Drop & Insert of one or multiple 64kb/s timeslots (TS) within E1.

Alarms

Following alarm may be generated: No Signal, AIS, No Frame, CRC4 MF loss, Distant Alarm, CAS MF loss, Distant MF Alarm.

Errors

Errors may be generated in:

Internal 2.048 Mbps clock Accuracy: 4.6 ppm. Clock may be deviated +/-125 ppm in 1 ppm steps Recovered from a receiver TTL level external 2.048 MHz clock in a D-Sub 15 male connector.

Error insertion: (Bit, code, FAS bit, FAS word, CRC-4, E-bit) • • •

Manual: 1-255 consecutive errors (1-16 consecutive FAS word errors) Continuous: 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7 Provoking of G.821, G.826 or M.2100 events (ES, SES etc.) (Bit, FAS, CRC-4, E-bit)

Manual slip insertion: Frame slip, pattern slip CAS

CAS signaling bits may be generated

BER test patterns

Pattern generation, unframed of framed n* 64 Kbps in contiguous or noncontiguous channel access. Test patterns supported: PRBS 6, PRBS 7, PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 12, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, QRBS 11, QRBS 20, All 0s,

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-2

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument

All 1s, Alternating (1:1), (1:3), (1:7), (3:1), (7:1), (3:24), Quick brown fox. User-defined up to 16 bits. Length in steps of 1 bit. User-defined up to 2048 bits. Length in steps of 8 bits. All patterns, except “All 0”, “All 1” and “Fox”, can be inverted. Tone and speech signal insertion

Tone in one speech channel on one of the transmitters: • •

Frequency: 1 Hz to 4 kHz in 1 Hz steps Level: +3 dBm to -70 dBm in 1 dBm steps

Artificial speech signal in one speech channel on one of the transmitters.

5.1.2

2 Mbps interface, Receivers The 2 Mbps interface contains two identically receivers.

Impedance

Input impedances supported 75Ω (unbalanced), 120Ω (balanced), High (> 10 * nominal).

Jitter tolerance

In accordance with ITU-T G.823 section 3.1.1

Return loss

Complies with the ITU-T Rec. G.703

Receiver attenuation and impedance modes

Monitor: Up to 6 dB cable attenuation +20 dB to 30 dB linear attenuation, nominal impedance. Bridged: Up to 40 dB cable attenuation, high impedance. Terminate: Up to 40 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance.

Receiver sensitivity

As stated above. Inputs will tolerate input levels up to 3 dB above nominal value.

Input level indication

Range: 0 to -42 dB (normal) or -20 to -32 dB (monitor)

Receive signal rate

2048 kbps ±100 ppm. Frequency deviation indication accuracy: ± 1 ppm.

Line Code

HDB3 or AMI (user selectable).

Framing

Unframed or Framed FAS/nFAS.

Detectors

Each input has a No Signal Detector with levels -20dB, -33dB, and full sensitivity. Each input has a signal level and signal frequency detector.

Auto configuration

Framing and pattern are automatically determined. Signaling channels are identified if signaling options are installed.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-3

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument

Alarms

Alarms detected: No Signal, AIS, No Frame, CRC4 MF loss, Distant Alarm, CAS MF loss, BERT Pattern Sync Loss, Distant MF Alarm.

Errors

Errors detected: FAS/nFAS errors, Pattern Errors, CRC4 errors, E-bit (FEBE) errors, Code errors, Pattern Slips, Frame Slips.

CAS

CAS channel contents (TS16) can be supervised. Whenever a CAS channel contents change an event is logged and time-stamped.

BER test patterns

Same as transmitter. Test patterns are detected in nx64 kbps contiguous or non-contiguous channels (framed) or as an unframed signal.

Error performance

G.821, G.826 or M.2100 analysis of a PRBS in the received signal, or based on CRC-4, E-bit or FAS. ES, SES, DM (G.821), BBE (G.826), UAT, EFS, AT % or count. Error performance evaluation for the total measurement: HR% for a user defined error performance parameter or programmable OK and not-OK limits for Bit, FAS, CRC-4 or E-bit count or ratio.

Round trip delay (propagation time) measurement

Resolution: 1 µsec (unframed), 0.1 msec framed.

Time-slot monitoring

FAS, NONFAS, CAS signaling, Contents of single time slot incl. positive/ negative peak values and coder offset. Level and frequency for encoded tone:

Range: 0 - 4 sec.

• •

Frequency: 1 Hz to 4 kHz with 1 Hz resolution Level: +3 dBm to -66 dBm with 1 dBm resolution

Speech decode

64 kbit/s (ITU-T Rec. G.703): A-law according to ITU-T Rec. G.711

5.1.3

Results

Status

Current information on: • • • • • • •

Statistics

Alarms and errors on the monitored line Input level indication Frequency deviation Round trip delay Contents of one time slot FAS/non-FAS and CAS bits Traffic overview: Busy/idle indication from all 31 channels

User-defined resolution: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec, 1, 5, 15, 30 min., 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hour

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-4

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument

Information logged: • • • •

Alarms Code error count/ratio Pattern bit, FAS, CRC-4 and E-bit error count/ratio and G.821, G.826 or M.2100 parameters Frequency deviation information

Event log

Events are logged with 1 msec resolution time stamps. Time stamps are absolute, relative to start or relative to previous. Logged events are detected alarms and errors. Changes in CAS and Sa bits. Filters enable/ disable the logging of individual events.

5.1.4

Memory Capacity

Internal memory

32 Mbytes are available for measurement results.

5.1.5

Service Interfaces

USB data Interface

USB 1.1 port. Connector type A. CMA 3000 will operate as host.

Ethernet Interface

Ethernet 10/100. One RJ45 connector.

V.24 data Interface

DTE. Connector: 9 pin, D-sub, Male.

5.1.6

Other Interfaces

Aux connector

Auxiliary connector can be used for External Clock Input and Output. Sensitivity is min. 0.2 Volt / 2048 kHz / TTL / 75 Ohm. It can be used with Clock in/clock out cable, part No.: 01467890, available from Anritsu A/S.

Phone Interface

For connection of an optional telephone set - to insert human voice into a traffic channel and to listen in using the loud speaker in telephone set. Physical connector: RJ11 (1x6) Female

Built-in loudspeaker

The built-in loudspeaker monitors speech in both directions of a voice channel. A jack provides ear phone access to the audio signal. The builtin loudspeaker is disconnected when a headset is plugged in. A nominal level (at 600 Ohms load) can be provided through the jack for connection to an external test set. Output level is user-controlled from front panel

Compact Flash

The instrument is equipped with one Compact Flash socket for future applications.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-5

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument

5.1.7

Miscellaneous

Display

8 ¼ inch active TFT display with VGA resolution (640x480 pixels) and touch screen. Please note, that the TFT display is made with high-precision technology. However, black points or bright points of light (red, blue, or green) may appear constantly on the screen, and irregular colored stripes or brightness may appear on the screen. These conditions are acceptable according to display manufacturer specifications, and is not due to a malfunction.

LEDs

34 bi-color soft LEDs (with text on display).

Battery

10.8 V rechargeable and replaceable intelligent LiIon battery. Operating time (basic instrument): With PowerSave:

more than 10 hours.

Without PowerSave:

more than 6 hours.

Charging time:

typically 3 to 8hours.

Indicator for remaining capacity:

% and hours/minutes.

Type: Li202S-6600 Enertech International Inc. ST202

STL Technology

Required for High Speed Interface option.

NI2020XD24 Inspired Energy

Required for High Speed Interface option.

Mains adapter

Input: 100-240 V AC, 50-60 Hz, 100-200 VA Output: 18 V DC, max. 3.61 A

Dimensions

Basic instrument: approx. 230 mm x 330 mm x 75 mm (HxWxD)

Weight

Approx. 3.3 kg (basic instrument).

Temperature range

Tested in compliance with the various classes listed in ETS 300 019.

Humidity

Operating:

0°C to +40°C (non-condensing).

Storage:

-25°C to +55°C.

Transportation:

-40°C to +70°C (max. 72 hours).

Tested in compliance with the various classes listed in ETS 300 019. During operation:

max. 85 % RH.

During storage and transportation:

max. 93 % RH.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-6

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument

Environmental

CE-marked and complies with EN 613261-1 and EN 61010-1.

Standard accessories

User Guide, Li-Ion battery, Mains adapter with mains cable and Stylus Touch Pen.

Options

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

SDH test options Frame relay test option. A-bis protocols - ETSI and vendor specific *) Vendor specific GPRS A-bis PCU protocols *) GPRS Gb interface protocol decode (requires Frame relay test option). SS7 protocols *) ISDN protocols *) E3 interface testing Data interface measurement option Ethernet 10/100 interface measurement option Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface measurement option ATM measurement option IP measurement option (requires Ethernet options) Ethernet Multistream option (requires Ethernet options) VoIP options (requires Ethernet options) Tandem connection monitoring (requires SDH test option) High speed single port interface incl. Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface High speed dual port interface incl. Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface 10 GigE LAN (requires High speed single or dual port interface options) 10 GigE WAN (requires High speed single or dual port interface options) STM-64 (requires High speed single or dual port interface options) T1 Unframed (requires T1 Unframed option) Service Activation Test (requires Service Activation Test option) Synchronous Ethernet Test option (SyncE and IEEE 1588v2) (requires Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface measurement option, High Speed single port interface incl. Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface or High Speed dual port interface incl. Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface)

*) Please contact your local Anritsu representative for details on available protocols.

Additional accessories

• • • • • • •

Abbreviation

The following abbreviations are used in the description of error counts and error ratio.

Carrying case Carrying soft bag Instrument carrying strap Extra LiIon battery Ear phones Telephone set Measurement cables

ALS

Alarm Second

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-7

5.1

Specifications, Basic Instrument

AVM

Available Minute

AVT

Available Time

BBE

Background Block Error

BBER

Background Block Error Ratio

DM

Degraded Minute

EB

Errored Block

EFS

Error Free Seconds

ER

Error Ratio

ES

Errored Second

SES

Severely Errored Second

UAT

Unavailable Time

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-8

5.2

5.2

Specifications, SDH Test Option

Specifications, SDH Test Option In the following you find specifications for the CMA 3000 SDH option. The SDH specification lists the functionality added to the basic CMA 3000 by installing the SDH test option. Refer to Specifications, Basic Instrument on page 5-2 for further information on the CMA’s basic functionality.

5.2.1

Specifications

Electrical

Available module: •

Enhanced SDH test option Incl. STM-1e.

Comply with ITU-T recommendation for electrical 155 Mbps interfaces. • • • • • •

Interfaces: STM-1 Line Code: CMI No. of Transmitters (Tx): 1; No. of Receivers (Rx): 2 Test configurations: Tx/Rx, Rx/Rx Connectors: BNC Impedance: 75 ohms

•

The Enhanced SDH test option incl. STM-1e provides an electrical level indicator for a received signal

Attenuation and impedance modes (electrical receivers)

Terminate: Up to 12.7 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance.

Optical

Available modules:

Monitor: Attenuation in accordance with ITU-T recommendations.

• • •

Enhanced SDH test option Incl. STM-1e (supports up to two optional optical STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 modules). High speed single port (support one optional optical STM-64 modules). High speed dual port (support up to two optional optical STM-64 modules).

Available pluggable modules (each with one transmitter and one receiver): • • • • • • • • •

STM-1 1310 nm, short haul, LC connector STM-1/-4 1310 nm, short haul, LC connector STM-1/-4/-16 1310 nm, short haul, LC connector STM-1 1310 nm, long haul, LC connector STM-1 1550 nm, long haul, LC connector STM-1/-4 1310 nm, long haul, LC connector STM-1/-4 1550 nm, long haul, LC connector STM-1/-4/-16 1310 nm, long haul, LC connector STM-1/-4/-16 1550 nm, long haul, LC connector

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-9

5.2

Specifications, SDH Test Option

• • •

STM-64 1310 nm, Single Mode, 10 km, LC connector STM-64 1550 nm, Single Mode, 40 km, LC connector STM-64 1550 nm, Single Mode, 80 km, LC connector

Test configurations are Tx/Rx. With two optical modules also Rx/Rx. An optical level indicator for a received optical signal is provided. Input offset range

± 50 ppm

Transmitter clocks

Internal Accuracy: 4.6 ppm. Clock may be deviated up to 50 ppm from nominal. • • •

Recovered from SDH input with same speed. TTL level external 2 MHz clock. Recovered from 2 Mbps.

Framing

According to ITU-T rec. G.707.

Scrambling

According to ITU-T rec. G.707.

SDH Mappings

The following mappings in accordance with the ITU-T rec. G.707 are supported: VC-12/2 Mbps structure (x = 1, 4n1, 16n2 or 64n5) STM-x -> AU4 -> VC4 -> TUG-3 -> TUG-2 -> TU-12 -> VC12 -> C12 -> 2 Mbps PDH (async./sync. mapping)

VC-3/34/45 Mbps structure (x = 1, 4n1, 16n2 or 64n5) STM-x -> AU4 -> VC4 -> TUG-3 -> TU-3 -> VC3 -> C3 -> 34/45 Mbps PDH (requires E3 option)

VC-4/140 Mbps structure (x = 1, 4n1, 16n2 or 64n5) STM-x -> AU4 -> VC4 -> C4 -> 140 Mbps PDH (requires E4 option) Bulk test VC-4/Bulk test (x = 4n1, 16n2 or 64n5) •

STM-x -> AU-4-> VC-4-> Bulk test pattern

VC-4-4c/Bulk test (y = 4n1, 16n2 or 64n5) •

STM-y-> AU-4-4c-> VC4-4c->C4-4c->bulk test pattern

VC-4-16c/Bulk test (z = or 16n2 or 64n5) •

STM-z-> AU-4-16c-> VC4-16c-> C4-16c-> Bulk test pattern

VC-4-64c/Bulk test •

STM-64-AU-4-64c-> VC4-64c-> C4-64c-> Bulk test patternn5

ATM structuren3 + n4 VC-4/ATM structure x = 1, 4n1 or 16n2

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-10

5.2

•

Specifications, SDH Test Option

STM-x-> AU-4-> VC-4-> ATM

VC-4-4c/ATM structure y = 4n1 or 16n2 •

STM-y-> AU4-4c-> VC4-4c-> ATM

n1

Requires installation of an STM1/-4 optical module and the Enhanced SDH test option incl. STM-1e n2 Requires installation of an STM-1/-4/-16 optical module and the Enhanced SDH test option incl. STM-1e n3 Requires installation of the ATM-over-SDH option n4 Not supported at STM-64 rate n5 Requires installation of the High speed single or dual port option, STM64 optical module and STM-64 option

Alarms

Following alarms can be detected or generated: LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-PLM, HP-UNEQ, HPTIM, HP-RDI, TU-LOM, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, LP-PLM, LP-UNEQ, LP-TIM, LP-RDI, LSS.

For 2 Mbps alarms supported please refer to the basic instrument specification sheets. Errors

Errors can be detected or generated: B1, A1/A2, B2, MS-REI, B3, HP-REI, LP-B3, LP-REI, V5,

Error insertion: • •

Manual: 1-8000 consecutive errors Continuous 10-5, 10-6, 10-7, 10-8, 10-9, 10-10

For 2 Mbps errors supported please refer to the basic instrument specification sheets. Error performance

G.826/G.828/G829/M.2100 analysis of the received signal based on detected errors and alarms: ES, SES, BBE (not M.2100), UAT, EFS, AT. Error performance evaluation for the total measurement: HR% allocation.

BER test patterns

Pattern generation and detection for O.181 bulk test pattern: Test patterns supported: PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29, PRBS 31 PRBS patterns can be inverted. All 0s, All 1s, Alternating 1/0, 1000 binary. User-defined 1 or 2 bytes.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-11

5.2

Specifications, SDH Test Option

All patterns, except ’All 0’, ’All 1’ and ’Fox’, can be inverted. For 2 Mbps test patterns supported please refer to the basic instrument specification sheets. Round trip delay (propagation time) measurement. Resolution: 0.1 usec Range at STM-1: 0 - 15 sec with PRBS 31 as test pattern Range at STM-4: 0 - 3.5 sec with PRBS 31 as test pattern Range at STM-16: 0 - 0.85 sec with PRBS 31 as test pattern Range at STM-64: 0 - 0.2 sec with PRBS 31 as test pattern Pointers

Monitoring and generation of pointer events are supported. Pointer operations in accordance with G.783. Graphical display of pointer movements.

Overhead

Events for Section Overhead display and testing, including path tracing and generation.

Tributary signals

For E1 signals (one per active receiver) embedded in a selected VC-12 the CMA 3000 basic instrument E1 functionality is available. For E3/DS-3 signals (one per active receiver) embedded in a selected VC-3, the E3/DS-3 functionality is available if the E3 test option is installed.

5.2.2

Results

Status

Current information on: • • • • n

Statistics

Alarms and errors on the monitored line Input level indication for optical signals Input level indication for electrical signalsn Frequency deviation

Requires installation of the Enhanced SDH test option incl STM-1e

User-defined resolution: •

1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours

Information logged: • • •

APS

Alarms Errors Pointer operations

APS (Automatic Protection Switching) test and analysis: •

APS switching time is measured. Switching time above a user defined treshold is highlighted •

Trigger events (user selectable): SDH alarms and errors; APS switchover

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-12

5.2

Specifications, SDH Test Option

•

Number of switchovers indicated by APS protocol

•

K1/K2 bytes can be set and displayed

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-13

5.3

Specifications, E3 Test Option

5.3

Specifications, E3 Test Option In the following you find specifications for the CMA 3000 E3 option. The E3 specification lists the functionality added to the basic CMA 3000 by installing the E3 test option. Refer to Specifications, Basic Instrument on page 5-2 for further information on the CMA’s basic functionality.

5.3.1

Specifications Electrical Comply with ITU-T recommendation for 34 368 kbps and 44 736 kbps/s interfaces (ITU-T rec. G.703). • • • • • •

Interfaces: E3 / DS-3 Line Code: HDB3 (E3), B3ZS (DS-3) No. of Transmitters (Tx): 2; No. of Receivers (Rx): 2 Test configurations: Tx/Rx, dual Tx/Rx, Rx/Rx Connectors: BNC through the connectors also used for 2 Mbps signals Impedance: 75 ohms

Attenuation and impedance modes (electrical receivers): • •

Terminate: Up to 12 dB cable attenuation nominal impedance. Monitor: Attenuation in accordance with ITU-T recommendations.

Transmitter clocks

Accuracy: 2.5 ppm. Clock may be deviated up to 40 ppm from nominal.

Framing

According to ITU-T rec. G.751 for 34 Mbps signals (only on E3; 45 Mbps signals are unframed only).

Alarms

Following alarms can be detected and generated: • • • • •

Errors

Following Errors can be detected and generated: • • • •

Error insertion

Signal Loss (LOS) AIS Frame Loss (LOF) (E3 only) Pattern Sync Loss RDI (E3 only)

Frame errors (E3 only) Code errors Pattern Errors Pattern Slips.

•

Manual: 1-255 consecutive errors

•

Continuous: 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7, ES and SES

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-14

5.3

Error performance

G.826/M.2100 analysis of the received signal based on detected errors and alarms: •

BER test patterns

Specifications, E3 Test Option

ES, SES, ALS, UAT, AVT, EFS

Pattern generation and detection for O.181 bulk test pattern. Test patterns supported: •

PRBS 7, PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29, PRBS 31, Fox Pattern, All 0's, All 1's, Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating 1:7, Alternating 3:24, User 16 bits, User 2048 bits

All patterns, except ’All 0’, ’All 1’ and ’Fox’, can be inverted. Round trip delay (propagation time) measurement • •

5.3.2

Resolution: 0.1 msec Range: 0-15 swc with PRBS 29 as test pattern

Results Status Current information on: • • • •

Alarms and errors on the monitored line Input level indication Frequency deviation Round trip delay

User-defined resolution: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours Statistics Information logged: • • •

Alarms Errors Frequency deviation

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-15

5.4

Specifications, E4 Test Option

5.4

Specifications, E4 Test Option In the following you will find specifications for the CMA 3000 E4 option. The E4 specification lists the functionality added to the basic CMA 3000 by installing the E4 test option. Refer to Specifications, Basic Instrument on page 5-2 for further information on the CMA’s basic functionality.

5.4.1

Specifications Electrical compliance with ITU-T recommendation for 139 264 kbps interfaces (ITU-T rec. G.703). • • • • • •

Interfaces: E4 Line Code: CMI No. of Transmitters (Tx): 1; No. of Receivers (Rx): 2 Test configurations: Tx/Rx, Tx/dual Rx, Rx/Rx Connectors: BNC through the connectors also used for STM-1 electrical signals Impedance: 75 ohms

Attenuation and impedance modes (electrical receivers): • •

Termination: Up to 12.7 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance. Monitor: Attenuation in accordance with ITU-T recommendations. •

Enhanced SDH test option incl STM-1e: The two modes are manually selected by the user

Transmitter clocks

Accuracy: 4.6 ppm. Clock may be deviated up to ±50 ppm from nominal.

Framing

According to ITU-T rec. G.751 for 140 Mbps signals.

Alarms

Following alarms can be detected and generated: • • • • •

Errors

Signal Loss (LOS) AIS Frame Loss (LOF) Pattern Sync Loss RDI

Following Errors can be detected and generated: • • •

Frame errors Pattern Errors Pattern Slips.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-16

5.4

Specifications, E4 Test Option

Error insertion

• •

Error performance

G.826/M.2100 analysis of the received signal, based on detected errors and alarms: •

BER test patterns

Manual: 1-255 consecutive errors Continuous: 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7, ES and SES

ES, SES, ALS, UAT, AVT, EFS

Pattern generation and detection for O.181 bulk test pattern. Test patterns supported: •

PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29, PRBS 31, All 0's, All 1's, Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating 1:7, User 16 bits and QRSS.

All patterns, except ’All 0’ and ’All 1’ can be inverted. Round trip delay (propagation time) measurement • •

Resolution: 0.1 usec Range: 0-15 sec with PRBS 31 as test pattern

5.4.2

Results

Status

Current information on: • • • •

Alarms and errors on the monitored line Input level indication (Enhanced SDH test option) Frequency deviation Round trip delay

User-defined resolution: •

Statistics

1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours

Information logged: • • •

Alarms Errors Frequency deviation

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-17

5.5

Specifications, V-Series Option

5.5

Specifications, V-Series Option In the following you find specifications for the CMA 3000 V-Series option. The V-Series specification lists the functionality added to the basic CMA 3000 by installing the V-Series Interface. Refer to Specifications, Basic Instrument on page 5-2 for further information on the CMA’s basic functionality.

5.5.1

Data Interfaces

Supported interfaces

RS-232C/V.24 async., RS-232C/V.24 sync., X.21/V.11, V.35, RS-449/V.36, RS530.

Modes of operation

DTE, DCE, Monitor, All Tx (for dual-drop from 2 Mbps)

Data rates for BER tests

• • • • • • • • •

Drop-and-insert

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s. 4928 kbps, 4992 kbps m*8000 where m= 1 to 8 n*56000 bit/s, n*64000 bit/s (n=1 to 32) q*1024 kbit/s (q=1 to 10) Any rate from 50 bps to 10240000 bps (except for RS-232C/V.24) in 1 bps increment. BER test in DTE mode: any rate up to 10 Mbit/s RS-232C/V.24 async., max. data rate: 128 kbit/s RS-232C/V.24 sync., max. data rate: 64 kbit/s

Modes: • •

Drop and insert between a 2 Mbit/s receiver/transmitter and a data interface selected by the user. Dual-drop from the two 2 Mbit/s receivers to a data interface selected by the user. The instrument will operate all circuits as outputs in this mode

Number of traffic channels: • •

n*64 kbit/s time slots 8 or 16 kbit/s sub-channel of a selected time slot.

5.5.2

Results

Status

Current information on: •

Alarms (no signal/no clock) and pattern bit errors on the monitored line

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-18

5.5

•

Statistics

Specifications, V-Series Option

Clock rate and deviation

User-defined resolution: •

1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec, 1, 5, 15, 30 min, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours

Information logged: • • •

Event log

Alarms (no signal/no clock) Pattern bit-error count/ratio and G.821 or M.2100 parameters (ES, SES, UAT, EFS, AT % or count) Pattern slip

Events logged 1 msec resolution time stamps: • •

Detected alarms and pattern bit error Changes in Control Circuit states

Filters enable/disable the logging of individual events.

5.5.3

Test Patterns

Patterns supported for BERT in DCE or DTE mode

Patterns generated and detected: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Error Insertion

PRBS 6 PRBS 7 PRBS 9 PRBS 11 PRBS 12 PRBS 15 PRBS 20 PRBS 23 QRBS 11 - as PRBS 11, but max. 7 consecutive zeros (ITU-T O.152) QRBS 20 - as PRBS 20, but max. 14 consecutive zeros (ITU-T O.151 and ANSI T1.403) All 0s, All 1s Alternating (1:1), (1:3), (1:7), (3:1), (7:1), (3:24) Quick brown fox (ITU-T O.151 and ANSI T1.403) User-defined up to 16 bits. Length in steps of 1 bit User-defined up to 2048 bits. Length in steps of 8 bits All patterns, except “All 0”, “All 1” and “Fox”, can be inverted

Insertion of pattern errors and slip in generated signal

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-19

5.5

Specifications, V-Series Option

• • • • •

Manual burst Burst length: 1-255 consecutive errors Continuous: burst length * 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7 Provoking of G.821 events (ES, SES) Slip insertion: manual

5.5.4

Miscellaneous

Optional accessories for the data interface option

•

• •

Converter cables (“Y” cables) for the data interface option. Individual cables are available for each of the supported interfaces. The cables support DTE and DCE emulation for the interface. V.35 converter cable for DTE emulation Connector box for data interface option. The converter box supports DTE and DCE emulation for all the supported interfaces.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-20

5.6

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

Specifications, Ethernet Option In the following specifications for the CMA 3000 Ethernet options are listed. The Ethernet specification lists the functionality added to the basic CMA 3000 by installing either of the Ethernet options. Refer to Specifications, Basic Instrument on page 5-2 for further information.

5.6.1

Ethernet Test Interfaces

Hardware option built into basic instrument

•

Electrical line interfaces 2 ports 10/100 Mbps RJ45 (unshielded and shielded twisted pair cables, category 3, 4, 5, 5E, and 6) FDX and HDX operation.

Ethernet 10/100/ 1000 hardware option attached to basic instrument

•

Optical line interfaces 2 ports 1000 Mbps, user-selectable 850 nm (SX), 1310 nm (LX) and 1550 nm (ZX). Electrical line interfaces 2 ports (in addition to the optical ports) 10/100/ 1000 Mbps RJ45 (unshielded and shielded twisted pair cables, category 5, 5E, and 6).

High speed interface hardware option attached to basic instrument

•

•

• •

Optical line interfaces 1 or 2 ports 10 Gbps, user-selectable 850 nm (SR), 1310 nm (LR) and 1550 nm (ER). Optical line interfaces 2 ports 1000 Mbps, user-selectable 850 nm (SX), 1310 nm (LX) and 1550 nm (ZX). Electrical line interfaces 2 ports (in addition to the optical ports) 10/100/ 1000 Mbps RJ45 (unshielded and shielded twisted pair cables, category 5, 5E, and 6).

Test configurations

• • •

5.6.2

Reflector Delays • • • •

Monitor/generate Pass-through Reflector

18,7 μs with 10 Mbps link 2,1 μs with 100 Mbps link 0,8 μs with 1000 Mbps electrical link 0,7 μs with 1000 Mbps optical link

5.6.3

Ethernet Measurements

Supported encapsulations (frame formats)

• • •

EtherType ll (DIX v.2) IEEE 802.3 with 802.2 (LLC1) IEEE 802.3 with SNAP

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-21

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

Traffic generation

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Variable line rate traffic generation, up to full line rate Configurable IP and Ethernet source and destination addresses (supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing). Fixed, DHCP, DNS. User-defined traffic mix of unicast and broadcast frames Adjustable frame size from 38 bytes to 10,000 bytes User-defined VLAN ID and VLAN priority Frame sizes may be set to constant, stepped or random length Generate pause frames Respond to pause frames Answer incoming ARP request On/Off) User programmable DSCP/TOS byte User programmable UDP/TCP address Optional Ethernet (MAC) address swapping (reflector mode)

Receiver settings

• • •

User-defined expected preamble length (3 to 15 bytes) User-defined IFG lower threshold (8 to 15 bytes) User-defined Jumbo frame size upper limit (1519 to 10000 bytes)

Error generation

• • • •

IFG, FCS, Preamble, Error symbol Alignment (Ethernet 10/100 only) Wrong IP checksum, fragmented IP, UDP with zero checksum PRBS bit error, BERT sequence error

Alarm generation

• •

No link Remote fault

RFC2544 installation and commissioning

Switch/router test and Single ended network test modes: • • • •

Throughput Frame loss Latency or packet jitter Back-to-back frames (burstability)

End to end network test mode (two CMA 3000s in a master-slave setup) • • •

Throughput Frame loss Back-to-back frames (burstability)

Router latency test mode: IP ping based latency test or packet jitter. For RFC2544 throughput measurement the user can choose to make the measurement for: • •

Physical layer Physical layer excl. preamble

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-22

5.6

• • • •

Throughtput calculation

Specifications, Ethernet Option

Link layer Network layer Data layer Average or maximum values

For RFC2544 throughput measurement and BER test, see Fig. 5.1.

Fig. 5.1 Throughtput calculation

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-23

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

BER test

Generation and detection of test patterns. Count of errors in received test pattern. Pattern generation: •

Unframed or framed with IP header

Detection of sequence errors and loss of sequence synchronization. Frame loss count and frame loss seconds Throughput measurement for: • • • • • • •

Ultilization layer Physical layer Physical layer excl. preamble Link layer Network layer Data layer Min, avg. and max. values are presented

Test patterns supported: • •

Cable test

PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29, PRBS 31, HF test pattern, CRPAT, JTPAT, SPAT User-defined up to 16 bits. Length in step of 1 bit

Identifies failures on electrical cables like shor-circuits or breaks of a wire pair and indicates the distance from the instrument to the fault. • •

Max distance: 110 m Accuracy: +/-1 m (+/-3 m for High speed interface option)

On the Ethernet 10/100 Mbps option port A pair 1 (which is not used for the Ethernet data) is reserved for internal applications and is not tested. Ping test

For connectivity and configuration check • • •

Traceroute

Trace the IP route over the IP network • •

Service Activation Test

Round Trip Time (RTT) Supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing Answer incoming Ping requests (On/Off)

User-defined max no. of hops (1 to 255) Information per hop: Min/avg/max ping time and no. of ping time outs

Service Activation Test is an out-of-service test to asses the proper configuration and performance of Ethernet services • •

Test up to 8 services Color-Aware and Non-Color-Aware in combinations (IP DSCP or VLAN PCP)

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-24

5.6

•

Specifications, Ethernet Option

GPS timing synchronization

Two test mode: • •

One-way (uni- or bi-directional, symmetrical or asymmetrical) Round-trip

Service Configuration Test with subtests for: • • • • •

Committed Information Rate Excess Information Rate Traffic Policing Committed Burst Size Excess Burst Size

Service Performance Test: •

All services tested simultaneously at CIR

Verification against Service Acceptance Criteria: • • • • •

Information Rate Frame Transfer Delay Frame Delay Variation Frame Loss Rate Availability

5.6.4

Ethernet Results

Status

• • • • • • • • • • •

Link status Remote fault Signal present Frames present Speed Full or half duplex Interface type Local clock (Ethernet 1000) Pause capable Asymmetric pause capable Link partner capabilities

CMA 3000 indicates the optical level for optical Ethernet 1000 and 10 G interfaces DHCP

• • •

Show source IP address assigned by DHCP Show current lease expire time Show IP addresses of primary and secondary DNS server when obtained by DHCP

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-25

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

•

Gateway setup can be achieved by DHCP

Performance statistics

• • •

Max/min/avg utilization Max/min/avg user and total throughput Max/min/avg frame

Frame statistics

• • • • • • • • • • •

Total frames Total valid frames Unicast/multicast/broadcast frames Number of pause frames Total errored frames Number of oversize and undersized (runts) frames Number of FCS errored frames Number of collisions (10/100 Mbps half duplex) Preamble violations Alignment errors (not High speed interface option) IFG violations

Frame distribution statistics

• • • • • • • •

Total valid/good frames 64 - 127 byte frames 128 - 255 byte frames 256 - 511 byte frames 512 - 1023 byte frames 1024 - 1518 byte frames Total number of jumbo frames Max/min/avg frame size

Burst statistics

• •

Total frames in burst Max/min/avg burst size

Adjustable thresholds

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Utilization Throughput Collision rate Unicast frames Multicast frames Broadcast frames Pause frames Errored frames Undersized frames (runts) Oversized frames FCS errored frames IFG violations Preamble violations Alignment errors

Filters

Up to 8 filter conditions can be defined. Each condition can filter on:

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-26

5.6

• • • • • • • • • •

5.6.5

Specifications, Ethernet Option

IP or MAC source address IP or MAC destination address Broadcast address IEEE OUI value Encapsulation type VLAN ID VLAN tag priority MPLS TPC/UDP source and destination port User-defined pattern at a defined offset

Ethernet Multistream Option The Multistream option requires that an Ethernet option is installed in the CMA 3000.

Number of streams

Up to 8 streams can be activated on the Ethernet line

Parameters per stream

• • • • • • • • •

Encapsulation (frame format) Line rate traffic load, up to full line rate Configurable IP and Ethernet source and destination addresses (supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing) User-defined traffic mix of unicast and broadcast frames Adjustable frame size from 38 bytes to 10,000 bytes Frame sizes may be set to constant, stepped or random length User-defined VLAN ID and VLAN priority User programmable DSCP/TOS byte User programmable UDP/TCP address

In stream 1 a BER test can be made Statistics

Available information per stream: • • •

5.6.6

Frame loss count/rate Frames and bytes received Frames and bytes transmitted

IP Channel Statistics Option The IP measurement option requires that an Ethernet option is installed in the CMA 3000.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-27

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

Statistics

The statistics are provided for up to 232 channels, identified by user-defined combinations of: • • • • •

IPv4, IPv6 or MAC address VLAN ID or MPLS label Protocol information IP next header (protocol) TPC/UDP ports

Traffic Capacity: • • • •

10 Mbps line speed: 100% line load 100 Mbps line speed: 100% line load 1 Gbps line speed: 100% line load 10 Gbps line speed: • With average frame size 530 bytes (or higher) and the longest burst of short frames (64 bytes) is 84: 100% line load •

For all frame sizes: The traffic capacity is up to 2.20 Mframes per second when the longest burst of short frames (64 bytes) is 84.

•

If the above conditions are not fulfilled, frames will be discarded from the IP Channel statistics. A special counter will show the number of frames discarded from the IP Channel statistics.

Available information per channel: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Frame count/rate Throughput Byte count MPLS frames Jumbo frames Errored frames Errored frame rate Errored throughput Errored byte count Frame/packet size distribution IP header bytes IP fragments TTL threshold violations IP packet count, rate IP bytes IP throughput IP header errors TCP/UDP bytes TCP/UDP packet count, rate, throughput TCP/UDP errored packets

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-28

5.6

5.6.7

Specifications, Ethernet Option

VoIP Call Emulation Options The VoIP option requires that an Ethernet option is installed in the CMA 3000.

Interfaces

The VoIP options for the CMA 3000 work with the Ethernet test interface options for the instrument: • • •

The High speed interface Ethernet option with electrical interfaces and optional 10 Gbps optical interfaces The 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet option with electrical interfaces and optional 100/1000 Mbps optical interfaces The 10/100 Mbps Ethernet option with electrical interfaces

Please refer to spec. sheets on the Ethernet options for details on the Ethernet test functionality of the instrument. Emulation modes

The instrument supports Client/Terminal emulation.

Supported protocols (options)

• • • •

SIP RFC 3261 RTP/RTCP RFC 3550 and RFC 3551 H.323 Fast connect H.323 Full connect

The VoIP call emulation options run on IP v4 only. Settings

The following settings are user selectable: • • • • • •

Supported Voice Coding

Calling alias IP address DHCP/static Subnet mask Gateway address and DNS server DSCP/TOS byte MAC address VLAN ID and VLAN priority

The following Voice codings are supported: • • • • • • • •

µ-law/A-law (G.711) ADPCM 16/24/32/40 kbps (G.726) ACELP 5.3, MPC-MLQ 6,3 kbps (G.723.1) CS-ACELP 8 kbps (G.729 a, b) GSM FR GSM EFR LD-CELP 16 kbps (G.728) Fixed codec preference list

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-29

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

User selectable: • •

Silence suppression (optional telephone), jitter buffer delay Source: Voice conversation (optional telephone), tone, pre-recorded speech signal

Simultaneous calls Up to 8 calls can manually be generated at the time Call generator

Up to 8 simultaneous calls can automatically be generated repeatedly.

Call emulation logs

The following information is provided for each call:

Call statistics

• • • • • • •

IP address/Alias RTP ports Answer delay Duration of call Encoding (codec) Silence suppression On/Off Call progress and error messages

•

Throughput sent/Throughput received •

Bytes Packets

•

Out of sequence packets.

•

• • •

Voice quality (optional)

Packet jitter (min/avg/max) Packet Round Trip Time (RTT) Packet loss

Voice quality measurement on one call at the time: • •

•

Uses Telchemy's algorithms for achievement of MOS and R-factor values at live traffic end points MOS: •

Conversational

•

Listening

•

P.862 estimate

•

Maximum with selected codec

R-factor •

Conversational

•

Listening

•

G.107 estimate

•

Listening during Burst and Gap periods Maximum with selected codec

•

•

Phone Interface

Voice quality evaluation summary, based on user defined thresholds

RJ-11 with a 6 slot 4 connector configuration for connection of an analog telephone

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-30

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

AC impedance: Approx. 600 ohm. The phone will be supplied with a constant current of approx. 20 mA The phone supports receiving and transmitting speech signals.

5.6.8

MPLS Option The MPLS option requires that an Ethernet option is installed in the CMA 3000.

Number of layers

•

Up to 8 layers of MPLS labels and the EoMPLS control word can be inserted into the Ethernet frame.

Status

•

Detection of MPLS and EoMPLS frames.

Statistics

• •

Count of detected MPLS and EoMPLS frames. Maximum MPLS level detected.

5.6.9

Stacked VLAN Option The Stacked VLAN option requires that an Ethernet option is installed in the CMA 3000.

Number of layers

•

Up to 8 layers of VLAN can be inserted into the Ethernet frame.

Status

•

Detection of VLAN frames.

Statistics

• •

Count of detected VLAN frames. Maximum VLAN level detected.

5.6.10

10 GigE WAN Option The 10 GigE WAN option requires that High speed interface option is installed in the CMA 3000.

WAN modes

•

10 GigE, - 10 GigE WAN interface with Mixed-frequency test pattern, Square wave pattern, PRBS 31 pattern.

Terminology

•

SONET or SDH.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-31

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

Error insertion

SONET Terminology: •

A1A2, B1, B2, REI-L, B3, REI-P.

SDH Terminology: •

Alarm insertion

B1, A1/A2, B2, MS-REI, B3, HP-REI.

SONET Terminology: •

LOS, LOF, SEF, TIM-S, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, UNEQ-P, ERDI P-PD, ERDI P-SD, ERDI P-CD, LSS.

SDH Terminology: •

LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, MS-TIM, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-PLM, HP-UNEQ, HP-TIM, HP-RDI, LCD, LSS.

Overhead byte functionality

Generation of overhead bytes, defined by the user. Capture and display of current overhead bytes.

Error measurement

SONET Terminology: •

A1A2, B1, B2, REI-L, B3, REI-P.

SDH Terminology: • •

Alarm detection

B1, A1/A2, B2, MS-REI, B3, HP-REI.

G.826 error performance parameters are calculated.

SONET Terminology: •

LOS, LOF, SEF, TIM-S, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, UNEQ-P, ERDI P-SD, ERDI P-CD, ERDI P-PD, LCD-P, LSS.

SDH Terminology: •

LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, MS-TIM, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-PLM, HP-UNEQ, HP-TIM, HP-RDI, LCD, LSS.

Pointer operation monitor

Positive movements, Negative movements, NDF.

5.6.11

Miscellaneous

Mechanical

The Ethernet 10/100 interface measurement option is installed inside the basic instrument. The Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface measurement option module, plugged onto the back of the instrument. • •

Dimensions: Approx. 10 x 30.7 x 3.5 cm (HxWxD) Weight: Approx. 1.0 kg

The High speed interface measurement option module, plugged onto the back of the instrument. • •

Dimensions: Approx. 10 x 30.7 x 4.3 cm (HxWxD) Weight: Approx. 1.1 kg

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-32

5.6

5.6.12

Specifications, Ethernet Option

Synchronous Ethernet Option The Synchronous Ethernet option requires that an Ethernet option is installed in the CMA 3000.

Ethernet Test interfaces

Ethernet 10/100 hardware option build into basic instrument: Incompatible with the Synchronous Ethernet option. Ethernet 10/100/1000 hardware option attached to basic instrument: Selection of timing source and custom deviation is not supported. High speed interface hardware option attached to basic instrument: Fully supported. The offered properties falls into three parts: Timing, SyncE and IEEE 1588v2.

Timing

Timing offers multiple choices of timing source for the transmitted Ethernet signal. As timing source one of the following sources can be chosen: Internal, Ethernet port A, Ethernet port B*, 2,048 MHz signal, E1 PDH signal, T1 PDH signal, IEEE 1588 clock A, IEEE 1588 clock B or a signal form an optional GPS receiver*. (*depends on other options) It is possible to apply a frequency deviation of +/- 100ppm in 1ppm steps to the selected timing source. The frequency deviation of received Ethernet signals can be measured against a chosen reference timing source.

SyncE

SyncE offers the possibility to specify the quality level of the transmitted Ethernet signal. The quality level indicated in the received Ethernet signal is analysed and an alarm is raised if such quality level indications are missing. ESMC messages can be captured and exported in a Wireshark compatible format with the use of the FrontSim option. In pass-through mode, the quality level indicated in ESMC messages can be changed on the fly to a given value in both directions independently. The following SyncE results are recorded: • • • •

IEEE 1588v2

SSM Rx count and rate SSM Tx count Indicated quality level statistics SSF seconds

Each port of the Ethernet interface can act as a timing master or a timing slave independently. The following IEEE 1588 parameters can be configured (per port): • •

Clock identity Priority 1

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-33

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Priority 2 Domain number Clock class Slave only mode Time source Encapsulation Announce receipt timeout Clock accuracy Clock step mode Announce interval Sync interval Minimum delay request interval

A UTC time offset to be used when acting as a clock master can be specified. The following IEEE 1588 clock results are recorded: • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Clock state Announce count Sync count Follow-up count Delay request count Delay response count Delay follow-up count Peer delay request/response/response-follow-up counters Min-/max-/average offset Min-/max-/average offset deviation Min-/max-/average offset variance Min-/max-/average mean path delay Min-/max-/average peer mean path delay Min-/max-/average path delay variation

With a GPS signal present, the offset from UTC time is calculated. The time offset between the two clocks is always shown. Parent clock results: •

Identity and Port number

Grand-master results: • • • • • •

Identity Class Accuracy Priority 1 Priority 2 Announced- and observed offset variance

Foreign master clock results (up to five clocks per port): • •

Identity Port number and Announce count.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-34

5.6

Specifications, Ethernet Option

The following IEEE 1588 events are counted and logged: Clock state transitions • •

State transition events Faults and Changes in grand-master clock.

IEEE 1588 messages can be captured and exported in a Wireshark compatible format with the use of the FrontSim option. In pass-through mode the CMA 3000 acts as an end-to-end transparent clock in one-step mode.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-35

5.7

Specifications, ATM Option

5.7

Specifications, ATM Option The specifications below list the functionality for a basic CMA 3000 with SDH and/or E3 test module installed together with the ATM option. For more information on the functionality of the basic configuration please refer to the CMA 3000 basic instrument specifications sheet. For more information on the functionality of the SDH and E3 test modules please refer to the SDH and E3 test modules specifications sheet.

5.7.1

Specifications

ATM over SDH option

• •

ATM over STM-1: requires that the Enhanced SDH test option is installed in the instrument ATM over STM-4 (VC4-4c): requires that the Enhanced SDH test option and at least one STM-1/-4 optical module is installed in the instrument

ATM over E1/E3 option

•

5.7.2

Traffic Generation

No. of transmitters

One transmitter can be activated for generating ATM traffic

Channels

• •

Interface

UNI/NNI

Traffic profiles

Constant, Variable, Burst, Poisson, Binominal and 2-state Markovian

Cell scrambler

User selectable: On/Off

Cell header editing

VPI, VCI, GFC, PTI, CLP

Payload contents

Foreground channel: • • •

ATM over E1 and E3. ATM is mapped to E3 in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.832. ATM over E3 requires that the E3 test option is installed in the instrument

1 foreground channel 14 background channels

PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29, PRBS 31, Normal/inverted User defined cell User defined 8 bit word

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-36

5.7

Specifications, ATM Option

Background channels: •

A fixed 8 bit value selectable for each channel

Payload programmable as kbps, cps and % O.191 test cells

Test cells in accordance with ITU-T rec. O.191.

Error generation

HEC single, HEC multiple, PRBS error insertion

Alarm generation

• • •

5.7.3

ATM Layer Traffic Analysis

No. of receivers

One or two receivers can be activated for receiving ATM traffic

Auto-detect active VCI/VPIs

Up to 30 VCI/VPI pairs

No. of channels monitored

Up to 30 VCI/VPI pairs + total ATM stream

Channel definition

VCI/VPI

Statistics

Total ATM stream: •

Loss of Cell Delineation VP-AIS, VP-LOC, VP-RDI, VP-CC, VP-LB VC-AIS, VC-LOC, VC-RDI VC-CC, VC-LB

Idle, Unassigned, HEC correctable, HEC uncorrectable.

Total ATM stream and selected VCI/VPI pairs: •

User, User Congestion, Segmented OAM F5, End-to-end OAM F5, Resource Management, Reserved, Cells with CLP = 1

Selected VCI/VPI pairs: •

Traffic descriptor parameters – Peak Cell Rate (PCR), Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR), Minimum Cell Rate (MCR), Maximum Burst Size (MBS), Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT)

Error detection/ statistics

Total ATM stream: HEC correctable, HEC uncorrectable

Alarm detection

• •

Loss of Cell Delineation VP-AIS, VP-LOC, VP-RDI, VC-AIS, VC-LOC, VC-RDI

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-37

5.7

Specifications, ATM Option

O.191 QoS measurements

CER, CLR, CMR, SECBR, CTD max/mean/min, CDVpp, 1-point CDV, 2point CDV estimated as described in ITU-T rec.O.191 section 7.1.1

Cell BER tests

Detection of errors in user defined payload in the foreground channel G.826/M.2100 parameters

OAM functionality

• •

IMA Status monitor (E1 only)

Readout of ICP cell information, including: • • • • • •

Generation of AIS and RDI OAM F4 and F5 frames. Monitoring of AIS and RDI for F4 and F5 level.

IMA version Cell and Link ID Link stuff indication Group status and control Tx Test control and Timing information Link information for the up to 32 lines that can be included in an IMA system

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-38

5.8 Specifications, ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option

5.8

Specifications, ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option Below are specifications for a basic CMA 3000 with an ISDN PRI call emulation option. For further information on the basic functionality please consult the CMA 3000 basic instrument specifications sheet.

5.8.1

General

Emulation modes

The instrument supports 2 Mbps PRI: • •

TE simulation NT simulation

General functionality

• •

Setup a call, user conversation through handset, clear call Setup a call, make an automated BER test, clear call

Emulation settings

• • •

Simulator mode: Emulate terminal, Emulate Network Configuration: Loopback, self-call, end-to-end B channel, called number, type of number, numbering plan, calling party number Test type (e.g. Voice, BERT) Call type (e.g. speech, data) Incoming call reply: manual (always), manual (speech), automatic (loopback, pattern, tone), selective (loopback, pattern, tone) Dial mode: Overlap (digit-by-digit), en-bloc Answer timer (1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, ? seconds) Send charge pulse (off, send in INFO, send in FACILITY), interval (150 sec) TEI: 0 to 63

• • • • • • •

Called number list

Up to 20 called numbers can be stored in the instruments phone book

Simulator status and result

Each call will provide the following information: • • • • • • •

Simultaneous calls

Call state (idle, calling, dialling etc.) Call type (outgoing, incoming) Start time: the time the call was initiated Release cause Call time: the duration of the call Connection time: the duration of the connection Charging information (if any)

Up to 30 active calls simultaneously

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-39

5.8

Specifications, ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option

Automatic test of services

General functionality: •

Setup a call with required service, clear call. After a call, a PASS/FAIL indication will show if the call setup was successful

ISDN bearer capability test: •

For ISDN DSS1 (Q.931 etc.) the test includes: Speech call, Data unrestricted/64k, 3.1k audio, 7k call, 3.1k telephony, Fax group 2/3, Fax group 4, Videotext new, Teletext, Mixed mode, OSI, 7k telephony

Supplementary services: •

Measurement of Bit Error Ratio (BERT)

For ISDN DSS1 (Q.931 etc.): Call Waiting (CW), Calling-Line Id. Presentation (CLIP), Calling-Line Id. Restriction (CLIR), Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN), SUB-addressing (SUB), Call Forwarding Unconditional/ Busy/No Reply (CFU/CFB/CFNR), Malicious Call ID. (MCI), Terminal Portability (SUSPEND/RESUME), Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS), Call Hold (HOLD), Three-PartY service (3TPY), Conference calling (CONF), Closed User Group (CUG), User-to-User Signalling (UUS), Advice Of Charge (AOC)

Supported patterns • • • • • • • •

PRBS 6, PRBS 7, PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 12, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23 QRSS 11, QRSS 20 All 0s, All 1s Alternating (1:1), (1:3), (1:7), (3:24) Quick brown fox User-defined up to 16 bits. Length in steps of 1 bit User-defined up to 2048 bits. Length in steps of 8 bits All patterns, except "All 0", "All 1" and "Fox", can be inverted

BERT functionality: • •

Detection of pattern errors and slip-in received signal Insertion of pattern errors and slip-in generated signal

Error insertion: • • • •

Manual burst Burst length: 1-255 consecutive errors Continuous: burst length * 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6,10-7 Provoking of G.821 events (ES, SES etc.)

Slip insertion: manual.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-40

5.8 Specifications, ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option

Call Generator

Continuous generation of calls: • • • • • •

Channel test

Number of concurrent calls: Up to 8 Call type: User selectable Answer time out: User selectable Call duration: User selectable Time between calls: User selectable Number to call: Cyclic from the instruments phone book or defined by the user when the call generator is started

Automated test of the available B-channels: • • • • • • •

Call type: User selectable Answer time out: User selectable Test duration: User selectable Pattern type: Available test patterns or none Pass/fail evaluation: on a user defined parameter or HR% Time between calls: User selectable Number to call: Cyclic from phone list or defined by the user when the call generator is started

5.8.2

Results

Statistics

User-defined resolution: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours

Information logged: • • • •

Event Log

Alarms Code error count/ratio Pattern bit (BER), FAS, CRC-4 and E-bit error count/ratio and G.821, G.826 or M.2100 parameters Frequency deviation information

Events are logged with 1 msec resolution time stamps. Logged events: Detected alarms and errors. Call emulation logs - Each call will provide the following information: • • • • • • • •

Call state (idle, calling, dialling etc.) Call type (outgoing, incoming) Called or calling phone number if applicable Start time: the time the call was initiated Release cause Call time: the duration of the call Connection time: the duration of the connection Charging information (if any)

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-41

5.8

Specifications, ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option

Filters enable/disable the logging of individual events Display of logged events: •

Logged events are shown as text in a table

5.8.3

Miscellaneous

Phone Interface

RJ-11 with a 6 slot 4 connector configuration. AC impedance: Approx. 600 ohm. The phone will be supplied with a constant current of approx. 20 mA. The following functions are supported: • • • •

Detection of ON/OFF hook state Generation of dial tone Reception and recognition of DTMF digits Receiving and transmitting speech signals

5.8.4

Options Related to the ISDN PRI Call Emulation Option

Available call emulators

• • • • • • •

ISDN DSS1 (Q.931) call emulation (requires Basic ISDN protocol functionality) ETSI Euro ISDN call emulation (requires Basic ISDN protocol functionality) QSIG call emulation (requires Basic ISDN protocol functionality) VN6 call emulation (requires Basic ISDN protocol functionality) 1TR6 call emulation (requires Basic ISDN protocol functionality) DPNSS call emulation (requires Basic ISDN protocol functionality) DASS-2 call emulation (requires Basic ISDN protocol functionality)

Storage capabillty

•

Up to 8 call emulator programs or protocols can be stored in the instrument

Other options

• •

Basic ISDN protocol functionality National and international ISDN protocols (requires basic ISDN protocol functionality). For details on available protocols, please contact your local Anritsu representative

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-42

5.9 Specifications, Unframed T1 option

5.9

Specifications, Unframed T1 option Below are the specifications for a basic CMA 3000 witn a T1 Unframed option. For further information on the basic functionality please consult the CMA 3000 basic instrument specifications sheet.

5.9.1

Transmitters The interface complies with ANSI T1 recommendations for 1544 kbps. Connector is of BNO type. The T1 interface contains two identical transmitters.

Impedance

100 ohms.

Clocks

• •

Internal 1.544 Mbps clock. Accuracy: 4.6 ppm. Clock may be deviated +/125 ppm in 1 ppm steps Recovered from a receiver

Line Code

B8ZS or AMI (user selectable). Each Rx-Tx pair must use same line code.

Line Build Out

•

Alarms

The following alarms may be generated: • • •

Errors

No Signal (LOS) AIS No Sync (LSS)

The following errors may be generated: • • •

BER test patterns

0-133 ft, 133-266 ft, 266-399 ft, 399-533 ft, 533-655 ft.

Code (BPV): Manual, single Pattern slip: Manual, single Pattern: •

Manual: 1-255 consecutive errors

•

Continuous: 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7

Test patterns supported: •

PRBS 6, PRBS 7, PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 12, PRBS 15, PRBS 20,

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-43

5.9

Specifications, Unframed T1 option

• • •

PRBS 23, QRBS 11, QRBS 20 All 0s, All 1s, Alternating (1:1), (1:3), (1:7), (3:1), (7:1), (3:24), Quick brown fox. User-defined up to 16 bits. Length in steps of 1 bit. User-defined up to 2048 bits. Length in steps of 8 bits.

All patterns, except "All 0", "All 1" and "Fox", can be inverted.

5.9.2

Receivers The interface complies with ANSI T1 recommendations for 1544 kbps. Connector is of BNO type. The T1 interface contains two identically receivers.

Impedance

100 ohms.

Receiver sensitivity

T1 Short Haul / -15 dB

Receive signal rate

1544 kbps ± 100 ppm. Frequency deviation indication resolution: ± 1 ppm.

Line Code

B8ZS or AMI (user selectable). Each Rx-Tx pair must use same line code.

Alarms

Alarms detected: • • •

Errors

Errors detected: • • •

BER test patterns

No Signal AIS BERT Pattern Sync Loss (LSS)

Pattern Errors Code (BPV) errors Pattern Slips

Same as transmitter.

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-44

5.9 Specifications, Unframed T1 option

Round trip delay (propagation time) measurement

Resolution: 1 ?sec Range: 0 - 5 sec., depending on selected pattern

5.9.3

Results

Status

Current information on: • • •

Statistics

Alarms and errors on the monitored line Frequency deviation Round trip delay

User-defined resolution: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30s, 1, 5, 15, 30 min., 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hour Information logged: • • • • •

Alarms Code error count/ratio Pattern bit error count/ratio Pattern slip count Frequency deviation information

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-45

5.9

Specifications, Unframed T1 option

This page intentionally left blank

CMA 3000, Specifications 5-46

6

Support

This chapter contains information about general maintenance of the CMA 3000. It also contains information about how to obtain support or service assistance.

CMA 3000, Support 6-1

6.1

Maintenance and Cleaning

6.1

Maintenance and Cleaning This section contains information about general maintenance and cleaning of the CMA 3000.

6.1.1

Maintenance The CMA 3000 does not require any regular adjustments. Using the CMA 3000 in normal environment and under normal conditions will not call for general maintenance.

! 6.1.2

There are no user-serviceable parts in the CMA 3000. Possible service or repair should be performed by Anritsu authorized personnel only.

Cleaning From time to time the CMA 3000 need to be cleaned. The surfaces of the CMA 3000 can be cleaned with any mild detergent that does not contain solvents. Before any cleaning, please take notice of the warnings below:

!

Disconnect CMA 3000 from the mains power connection before any cleaning involving fluid.

!

Only use a soft cloth moisturized with a mild detergent to clean the surface of the touch screen.

CMA 3000, Support 6-2

6.2 Support and Service Assistance

6.2

Support and Service Assistance In case your CMA 3000 need support or service, follow the instructions given in the sub-sections below.

6.2.1

Before you obtain assistance To ensure fast help the Anritsu representative or the Anritsu Customer Services need detailed information about the CMA 3000 and the problems concerning the CMA 3000. The minimum of needed information are listed below:

6.2.2

•

Instrument type and model number.

•

Serial number.

•

Software version, this is displayed in the Misc > System configuration > Instrument information screen.

•

Possible error code or indications from the front panel LEDs

•

A detailed description of the problem and how it occurred. Please make the description as detailed as possible, e.g. by drawing an illustration.

Obtaining Support or Service Assistance •

6.2.3

Please contact your local Anritsu representative to get support or service assistance, after you have collected the information required above.

Download You can download latest version of the CMA 3000 software from our ftpserver. The server has the ftp address: ftp://sftpdk.anritsu.com •

Log in as:

•

User: cma3000user

•

Password: 4Nhz17hKKhg8

•

Open the folder: Basic

•

Download all files in the folder and follow the instructions in the readme.pdf file.

CMA 3000, Support 6-3

6.2

Support and Service Assistance

In other folders on the ftp-server you can find latest versions of the User’s Guide, the Remote Control Scripting manual and the FrontSim PC part.

CMA 3000, Support 6-4

6.3

6.3

Packing and Shipping

Packing and Shipping This section contains general information concerning packing and shipping of the CMA 3000 in case of return for service or repair.

! 6.3.1

Never return any item for service until you have made an agreement with the local Anritsu representative or the Anritsu Customer Services.

Packing Instruments to be returned for service, either to the local Anritsu representative or to Anritsu Customer Services, should be properly packed in order to reach the address in undamaged condition. If packed in the same manner as originally shipped, the CMA 3000 tolerates normal transportation. If the original packing material no longer is available, the CMA 3000 should be packed as described below: •

Wrap the CMA 3000 in heavy duty plastic.

•

If a carrying case is available, place the CMA 3000 in the case and close it.

•

Use a strong shipping container of same quality as the original container received from Anritsu. Double-walled carton is recommended. The container should be large enough to accommodate a 75 to 100 mm layer of shock absorbing material all around the carrying case.

•

Wrap a shock-absorbing material all around the carrying case ensuring that the material fills the shipping container.

•

Seal the container securely. Make sure that it cannot break open during transportation.

•

Mark the container with the Text ’FRAGILE’ to ensure careful handling. Mark the container ’FOR REPAIR’ to ensure top priority when received at the local representative or at Anritsu.

CMA 3000, Support 6-5

6.3

Packing and Shipping

6.3.2

Shipping Please remember to enclose a note containing: •

Your name, address, telephone number and e-mail

•

The information described in the section Before you obtain assistance on page 6-3.

•

A description of the type of service required.

CMA 3000, Support 6-6

6.4

Anritsu Offices

6.4

Anritsu Offices

Headquarters

Anritsu Corporation 5-1-1 Onna, Atsugi-shi, Kanagawa, 243-8555 Japan Phone: +81-46-223-1111 Fax: +81-46-296-1238

U.S.A

Anritsu Company 1155 East Collins Blvd., Suite 100, Richardson, TX 75081, U.S.A. Toll Free: +1-800-267-4878 Phone: +1-972-644-1777 Fax: +1-972-671-1877

Canada

Anritsu Electronics Ltd. 700 Silver Seven Road, Suite 120, Kanata, Ontario K2V 1C3, Canada Phone: +1-613-591-2003 Fax: +1-613-591-1006

Brazil

Anritsu Eletrônica Ltda. Praca Amadeu Amaral, 27-1 Andar, 01327-010 - Bela Vista - São Paulo - Brasil Phone: +55-11-3283-2511 Fax: +55-11-3288-6940

Mexico

Anritsu Company, S.A. de C.V. Av. Ejército Nacional No. 579 Piso 9, Col. Granada, 11520 México, D.F., México Phone: +52-55-1101-2370 Fax: +52-55-5254-3147

U.K.

Anritsu EMEA Ltd. 200 Capability Green, Luton, Bedfordshire LU1 3LU, U.K. Phone: +44-1582-433200 Fax: +44-1582-731303

France

Anritsu S.A. 12 avenue du Québec, Bâtiment Iris 1- Silic 612, 91140 VILLEBON SUR YVETTE, France Phone: +33-1-60-92-15-50 Fax: +33-1-64-46-10-65

Germany

Anritsu GmbH Nemetschek Haus, Konrad-Zuse-Platz 1, 81829 München, Germany Phone: +49-89-442308-0 Fax: +49-89-442308-55

Italy

Anritsu S.r.l. Via Elio Vittorini 129, 00144 Roma, Italy Phone: +39-6-509-9711 Fax: +39-6-502-2425

Sweden

Anritsu AB Borgarfjordsgatan 13A, 164 40 KISTA, Sweden Phone: +46-8-534-707-00 Fax: +46-8-534-707-30

CMA 3000, Support 6-7

6.4

Anritsu Offices

Finland

Anritsu AB Teknobulevardi 3-5, FI-01530 VANTAA, Finland Phone: +358-20-741-8100 Fax: +358-20-741-8111

Denmark

Anritsu A/S (Service Assurance) Anritsu AB Denmark (Test & Measurement except Service Assurance) Kay Fiskers Plads 9, 2300 Copenhagen S, Denmark Phone: +45-7211-2200 Fax: +45-7211-2210

Russia

Anritsu EMEA Ltd. Representation Office in Russia Tverskaya str. 16/2, bid. 1, 7th floor., Russia, 125009, Moscow Phone: +7-495-363-1694 Fax: +7-495-935-8962

United Arab Emirates

Anritsu EMEA Ltd. Dubai Liaison Office P O Box 500413 - Dubai Internet City, Al Thuraya Building, Tower 1, Suit 701, 7th Floor, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Phone: +971-4-3670352 Fax: +971-4-3688460

Singapore

Anritsu Pte. Ltd. 60 Alexandra Terrace, #02-08, The Comtech (Lobby A), Singapore 118502 Phone: +65-6282-2400 Fax: +65-6282-2533

India

Anritsu Pte. Ltd. India Branch Office 3rd Floor, Shri Lakshminarayan Niwas, #2726, 80 ft Road, HAL 3rd Stage, Bangalore - 560 075, India Phone: +91-80-4058-1300 Fax: +91-80-4058-1301

P. R. China (Hong Kong)

Anritsu Company Ltd. Units 4 & 5, 28th Floor, Greenfield Tower, Concordia Plaza, No. 1 Science Museum Road, Tsim Sha Tsui East, Kowloon, Hong Kong Phone: +852-2301-4980 Fax: +852-2301-3545

P. R. China (Beijing)

Anritsu Company Ltd. Beijing Representative Office Room 2008, Beijing Fortune Building, No. 5, Dong-San-Huan Bei Road, Chao-Yang District, Beijing 100004, P.R. China Phone: +86-10-6590-9230 Phone: +86-10-6590-9235

CMA 3000, Support 6-8

6.4

Anritsu Offices

Korea

Anritsu Corporation, Ltd. 8F Hyunjuk Building, 832-41, Yeoksam Dong, Kangnam-ku, Seoul, 135-080, Korea Phone: +82-2-553-6603 Fax: +82-2-553-6604

Australia

Anritsu Pty. Ltd. Unit 21/270 Ferntree Gully Road, Notting Hill, Victoria 3168, Australia Phone: +61-3-9558-8177 Fax: +61-3-9558-8255

Taiwan

Anritsu Company Inc. 7F, No. 316, Sec. 1, Neihu Rd., Taipei, 114 Taiwan Phone: +886-2-8751-1816 Fax: +886-2-8751-1817

CMA 3000, Support 6-9

6.5

Special Information

6.5

Special Information

6.5.1

Licensing Information This product includes copyrighted third-party software licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License. Please see the GNU General Public License for the exact terms and conditions of this license. Especially the following parts of this product are subject to the GNU GPL: •

The Linux operating system kernel

•

The busybox swiss army knife of embedded linux

•

e2fsprogs - filesystem utilities for use with the ext2 filesystem

All listed software packages are copyright by their respective authors. Please see the source code for detailed information.

6.5.2

Availability of Source Code Anritsu A/S has the full source code of the GPL licensed software, including any scripts to control compilation of the object code.

CMA 3000, Support 6-10

6.5 Special Information

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any

CMA 3000, Support 6-11

6.5

Special Information

patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

CMA 3000, Support 6-12

6.5 Special Information

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

CMA 3000, Support 6-13

6.5

Special Information

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than

CMA 3000, Support 6-14

6.5 Special Information

a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.

CMA 3000, Support 6-15

6.5

Special Information

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all

CMA 3000, Support 6-16

6.5 Special Information

those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

CMA 3000, Support 6-17

6.5

Special Information

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

CMA 3000, Support 6-18

6.6

6.6

Declarations

6.6.1

Disposal According to WEEE Recycling

Declarations

Equipment marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol complies with council directive 2002/96/EC (the “WEEE directive”) in European Union.

For products placed on the EU market after August 13, 2005, please contact your local Anritsu representative at the end of the product’s useful life to arrange disposal in accordance with your initial contract and the local law.

CMA 3000, Support 6-19

6.6

Declarations

6.6.2

Information for the Chinese Market Only Concerning declaration of China RoHS, please see note below. China RoHS is not 100% identical to the European (EU) RoHS. EU RoHS has exemptions for Pb and Hg in various alloys, soldering, displays and other products. The China RoHS declaration in the next paragraph does NOT comply with EU RoHS.

CMA 3000

CMA 3000, Support 6-20

Index

Index reference structure: ‘Subject... Chapter number - Page number’

Numerics 2 Mbps Interface Receiver(s) 4 - 13 Transmitter(s) 4 - 6

A About this book CMA 3000 introduction 1 - 2 Editorial information 1 - B Hints indication 1 - 3 Notes indication 1 - 3 Option indication 1 - 3 Symbols and conventions 1 - 3 Warnings indication 1 - 3 Accessories Optional accessories (extra) 2 - 2 Standard accessories 2 - 2 Application 4 - 144 Application folder APS 4 - 116 ATM 4 - 111 Auto configure 4 - 93 BERT 4 - 148 Cable Test 4 - 157 Channel Statistics 4 - 152 Ethernet Ping 4 - 71, 4 - 144 Ethernet RFC2544 4 - 124 Ethernet Traceroute 4 - 155 Frame relay 4 - 82 ISDN Emulator 4 - 183 Measurement 4 - 75 Pointer movement 4 - 118 Service Activation Test 4 - 192 Stimuli 4 - 95 Tributary scan 4 - 122 VoIP 4 - 160 WAN Pointer Movement 4 - 181 APS 4 - 116 ATM 4 - 111 Auto configuration 4 - 93

CMA 3000, i

B Back panel connectors 3 - 10 Basic Instrument (2 Mbps) 3 - 10 Ethernet 10/100/1000 Interface 3 - 12 Ethernet High Speed Dual Port Interface 3 - 14 Ethernet High Speed Single Port Interface 3 - 13 Fully Equipped Instrument (Internally Mounted Modules) Basic Instrument 1 - 2 Battery Handling of internal lithium battery 1 - 4 How to install rechargeable battery 2 - 5 How to replace rechargeable battery 2 - 5 How to use fast charge mode 2 - 6 How to use normal charge mode 2 - 6 Introduction to rechargeable battery 2 - 4 Status bar 2 - 7 BERT 4 - 148

3 - 11

C Cable Test 4 - 157 Carrying strap (optional) 2 - 10 Channel Statistics 4 - 152 China RoHS 6 - 20 Cleaning 6 - 2 Company addresses 6 - 7 Connecting measurement cables 2 - 8

D Declarations China RoHS 6 - 20 Disposal Correct disposal of product Dispose of batteries 1 - 4

6 - 19

E E3 Interface Resceiver(s) 4 - 22 Transmitter(s) 4 - 20 Earphone 3 - 9 Editorial information 1 - B ESD Avoid build-up 1 - 7 Precautions 1 - 7

CMA 3000, ii

Ethernet Application > Ping control 4 - 144 Application > Port A/B 4 - 144 Ping > Frame config 4 - 145 Ping > Graphical presentation 4 - 147 Ping > Results 4 - 146 Port A/B > Filter 4 - 61 Port A/B > Thresholds 4 - 63 Port A/B >Traffic 4 - 43 Port Control 4 - 31 Port Control (Multistream) 4 - 33 Port setup > Filter 4 - 61 Port setup > Frame Content (Multistream) 4 - 50 Port setup > Settings 4 - 59 Port setup > Thresholds 4 - 63 Port setup > Traffic 4 - 43 Port setup > Traffic (Multistream) 4 - 45 Port Setup > WAN Frame 4 - 46 RFC2544 config > Content 4 - 129 RFC2544 config > Latency 4 - 135 RFC2544 config > Port A/B 4 - 128 RFC2544 config > Test setup 4 - 124 RFC2544 config > Throughput 4 - 131 RFC2544 config > Throughput and frame loss 4 - 133 RFC2544 results > Burst 4 - 143 RFC2544 results > Frame loss 4 - 140 RFC2544 results > Latency 4 - 142 RFC2544 results > Throughput and frame loss 4 - 141 Service Activation Test > Control 4 - 192 Service Activation Test > Results 4 - 201 Service Activation Test > Services 4 - 195 SyncE 4 - 63 Timing 4 - 69 Traceroute 4 - 155 External GPS Sensor 3 - 20

F Frame Content BERT 4 - 57 Ethernet 4 - 50, 4 - 161 IPv4 4 - 53, 4 - 163 IPv6 4 - 56, 4 - 165 LLC 4 - 53, 4 - 163 SNAP 4 - 53, 4 - 163 TCP 4 - 57 UDP 4 - 56 VLAN 4 - 52, 4 - 162 Frame Loss (Multistream) 4 - 226

CMA 3000, iii

Frame relay BERT load 4 - 85 CIR test 4 - 88 CIR test, result 4 - 89 CIR test, setup 4 - 88 DLCI statistics 4 - 87 Frame relay 4 - 82 Ping test 4 - 90 Ping test, result 4 - 91 Ping test, setup 4 - 90 FrontSim Assigning instruments to the list 3 - 18 Connection and setup 3 - 16 FrontSim option 3 - 16, 3 - 19 Installation 3 - 16 Launching 3 - 16 Selecting and connecting instruments from the list

3 - 18

G GPS 3 - 20 Graphical User Interface General handling of screens Quick start 4 - 3

4-2

I IEEE 1588v2 4 - 65 Results 4 - 233 Setup 4 - 66 Status 4 - 276 Instrument carrying strap 2 - 10 Instrument support stand 2 - 10 Interface 4 - 71 2 Mbps 4 - 6 E3 4 - 20 Ethernet 4 - 31 SDH 4 - 17 V-Series 4 - 26 Interface > T1 Unframed 4 - 71 ISDN Emulator 4 - 183

L LED indicators 3 - 6 Left panel connectors 3 - 15 Log IEEE1588v2 Log 4 - 250

M Mains power Warnings 1 - 5 Mains power adapter How to connect 2 - 3 Maintenance 6 - 2

CMA 3000, iv

Measurement General 4 - 75 Log filters 4 - 79 Signalling 4 - 78 Statistics filters 4 - 81 Misc. folder Front panel buttons 4 - 307 Printout setup 4 - 285 Quick start 4 - 282 Stored measurement 4 - 283 System Configuration 4 - 295 Touch Screen Calibrate 4 - 294

O Operator keys 3 - 3 Enter key 3 - 5 Error key 3 - 4 Esc key 3 - 5 LED TRAP key 3 - 3 Navigation keys 3 - 4 Power ON/OFF 3 - 3 SHIFT keys 3 - 3 Start/Stop key 3 - 3 Volume key 3 - 4

P Pointer Movement 4 - 118 Port 4 - 31 Precautions ESD precautions 1 - 7 ESD sensitivity 1 - 7 Optical surfaces 1 - 9 Personal 1 - 6 Port connectors 1 - 8 Radio emissions 1 - 8 Transportation 1 - 8 Printout Assigning title to prinout document 4 - 286 Importing your own logo 4 - 286 Printout example 4 - 287 Printout setup 4 - 285

Q Quick start Load and save settings list 4 - 4 Loading setups 4 - 3 Saving setups 4 - 4

R Radio 1 - 8 Radio Emissions Warnings 1 - 8 Receiver 4 - 19 Remote Control 3 - 19

CMA 3000, v

Result folder 2 Mbps result list 4 - 205 IEEE1588v2 Log 4 - 250 Measurement information 4 - 204 Result list (2 Mbps) Alarms and errors 4 - 212 BERT 4 - 212 G.821 4 - 211 Result list 4 - 205 Result list (ATM) ATM Alarms and Errors 4 - 235 ATM Cell Statistics 4 - 237 ATM VPI/VCI 4 - 238 Result list (Ethernet) Alarms and Errors 4 - 228 Burst Stat 4 - 221 Frame Stat 4 - 220 IEEE 1588v2 4 - 233 Multistream Frame Loss 4 - 226 Multistream Latency/Jitter 4 - 227 Multistream Throughput Stat 4 - 225 Multistream Transmit Stat 4 - 224 Performance 4 - 219 Size distribution 4 - 222 SyncE 4 - 232 Transmit Stat 4 - 223 WAN - Alarms & Errors 4 - 229 WAN - Performance 4 - 230 WAN - Test Mode 4 - 231 Result list (SDH) Alarms and Errors 4 - 214 G.828 4 - 215 Graphics 4 - 210 Quality 4 - 214 Result list (Signalling) Display filter 4 - 209 Graphics 4 - 210 Result list (VoIP Calls) Calls 4 - 241

S Safety precautions Personal precautions 1 - 6 Sales offices 6 - 7 SDH Interface Receiver 4 - 19 Transmitter 4 - 17 Service Activation Test 4 - 192 Service and support Download 6 - 3 Notes for shipment 6 - 6 Obtaining support or service assistance 6 - 3 Packing instrument for shipment 6 - 5 Special information Third-party software license 6 - 10

CMA 3000, vi

Specifications 10 GigE WAN 5 - 31 2 Mbps receivers 5 - 3 2 Mbps transmitters 5 - 2 ATM 5 - 36 ATM Layer Trafic Analysis 5 - 37 E3 5 - 14 E4 5 - 16 Ethernet 5 - 21 Ethernet Measurements 5 - 21 Ethernet Multistream 5 - 27 IP Channel Statistics 5 - 27 ISDN PRI Call Emulation 5 - 39 Memory capacity 5 - 5 Miscellaneous 5 - 6 MPLS 5 - 31 Other interfaces 5 - 5 Relults, V-Series 5 - 18 Results, basic instrument 5 - 4 Results, E3 5 - 15 Results, E4 5 - 17 Results, Ethernet 5 - 25 Results, ISDN PRI Call Emulation 5 - 41 Results, SDH 5 - 12 SDH 5 - 9 SDH results 5 - 9 Service interfaces 5 - 5 Stacked VLAN 5 - 31 Synchronous Ethernet 5 - 33 Test Patterns V-Series 5 - 19 Traffic generation, ATM 5 - 36 VoIP Call Emulation 5 - 29 V-Series 5 - 18 Status tab Alarms and errors 4 - 254 Alignment 4 - 259 Audio 4 - 265 CAS 4 - 260 Ethernet Interface 4 - 268, 4 - 279 Ethernet Interface Optical SFP 4 - 269 Ethernet Interface Optical XFP 4 - 270 Ethernet Interface WAN - Alarms and Errors 4 - 271 Ethernet Interface WAN - Capture 4 - 272 Frame relay 4 - 266 IEEE 1588v2 4 - 276 Physical 4 - 251 SDH capture 4 - 257 SyncE 4 - 275 Timing 4 - 274 Traffic 4 - 262 V-Series Interface 4 - 267 Status Timing 4 - 274

CMA 3000, vii

Stimuli 4 - 95 2 Mbps TxA and 2 Mbps TxB 4 - 96 AU4 Pointer 4 - 104 Ethernet 4 - 107 Ethernet Timing 4 - 109 Ethernet WAN 4 - 108 Frame Relay 4 - 97 Frequency 4 - 100 SDH Alarm 4 - 102 SDH Error 4 - 103 Using stimuli (an example) 4 - 109 V-Series Interface 4 - 106 Support and service Before you obtain assistance 6 - 3 Download 6 - 3 How to obtain assistance 6 - 3 Support stand 2 - 10 SyncE 4 - 63 Results 4 - 232 Setup 4 - 63 Status 4 - 275 System Configuration Display Setup 4 - 300 Global Configuration 4 - 301 Instrument Information 4 - 295 Service Interfaces 4 - 296

T Telephone interface 3 - 8 Timing Ethernet Interface 4 - 69 Status 4 - 275 Timing Ethernet Interface 4 - 69 Touch screen display 3 - 2 Transmit Stat (Multistream) 4 - 224 Transmitter 4 - 17 Transportation Warning 1 - 8 Tributary Scan 4 - 122

V VoIP Address Book 4 - 179 Application 4 - 160 Emulator Control 4 - 169 Call Info 4 - 171 Call Quality 4 - 173 Emulator tab 4 - 176 Generator tab 4 - 178 Thresholds 4 - 175 Voice Quality 4 - 174 Emulator Setup 4 - 166 Port A/B 4 - 160 Results 4 - 241

CMA 3000, viii

W WAN Pointer Movement 4 - 181 Warnings Authorized personnel information 1 - 4 General service and repair 1 - 4 Lithium Battery 1 - 4 Mains power 1 - 5 Optical laser 1 - 5 Personal injury 1 - 6 Radio Emissions 1 - 8 Transportation 1 - 8 WEEE Recycling 6 - 19

CMA 3000, ix

CMA 3000, x

Anritsu A/S Kay Fiskers Plads 9 2300 Copenhagen S, Denmark Phone.: +45 72 11 22 00 Fax: +45 72 11 22 10 www.anritsu.com

09108217